JP2021129668A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of increasing a degree of freedom in design without sacrificing appearance of the game machine because of electronic components.SOLUTION: A game machine includes: an electronic component (for example, an LED boar 303) provided so as to be visible from a player; a specific member (for example, a base member 301) that is provided around the electronic component and is formed in color similar to that of the electronic component; and a light-transmitting member (for example, a cover member 302) that is a member having a light-transmitting property and allows the player to visually recognize the electronic component and the specific member through the member. The light-transmitting member (for example, the cover member 302) has a decorative pattern 331 formed so as to spread over the electronic component (for example, the LED board 303) and the specific member (for example, the base member 301).SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 10-12

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of playing a game.

Some pachinko machines and slot machines, which are examples of game machines, are provided with electronic components such as a display means such as a liquid crystal display and a light emitting means such as an LED (light emitting diode).

As a game machine of this type, for example, a game board and a display device arranged apart from the game board on the back side are provided, and an opaque frame member is provided between the game board and the display device to play a game. Some of them prevent the inside of the gaming machine from being exposed from the gap formed between the back surface of the board and the display unit of the display device (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP-A-2007-296205

In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, in order to prevent the appearance of the gaming machine from being spoiled by making the electronic parts such as the display means and the light emitting means visible to the player, these electronic parts are made of frame members. It is necessary to install it inside the gaming machine that is invisible to the player, but there is a problem that the degree of freedom in design cannot be increased because the arrangement position of the electronic component is limited.

The present invention has been made by paying attention to such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing the degree of freedom in design without spoiling the appearance of the gaming machine by electronic components.

The gaming machine of means 1 is
When the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed and the specific display result (for example, the jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed, the player is in an advantageous state (for example, the jackpot gaming state). A controllable gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 75SG001).
Electronic components (for example, LED substrates 303, 403, 603, 803) provided so as to be visible to the player, and
Specific members (for example, base members 301, 401, 601, 801) provided around the electronic component and formed in a color similar to that of the electronic component, and
A translucent member (for example, a cover member 302, 402, 602, 802) which is a translucent member and is provided so that the player can visually see the electronic component and the specific member through the member.
Display means (for example, image display device 5) and
Step 100 IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIG. 11-17, are state control means capable of controlling a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state. The part to be executed, as shown in FIG. 11-19, the part to execute step 100 IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100) and
An update means that can update numerical information based on the execution of the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-13, a portion that executes step 100 IWS 71 in the game control microcomputer 100).
With
The translucent member (for example, cover member 302) has a decorative pattern (for example, decorative pattern 331) formed so as to straddle the electronic component (for example, LED substrate 303) and the specific member (for example, base member 301). ) (See Fig. 10-12),
The electronic component (for example, the LED substrate 303) is provided at a position farther from the display means than the specific member (for example, the upper part of the base member 301).
The state control means can control the special state when the special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times (for example, FIG. 11-13). As shown in the part where step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 are executed in the game control microcomputer 100, and the part where step 100IWS170 and step 100IWS173 are executed in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 11-17).
The updating means updates the numerical information depending on whether the variable display of the first identification information is executed or the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-13). , The part that executes step 100 IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, even if the electronic components are arranged so as to be visible to the player, the decorative patterns make the electronic components inconspicuous, so that the degree of freedom in design can be increased. Further, since the electronic component is located at a position away from the display means that the player pays attention to, it becomes less noticeable. In addition, the relief of the player can be suitably realized. Specifically, even if the game state changes and the variable display of any identification information is executed, the numerical information is continuously updated, so that the player can be easily rescued and the motivation for the game is increased. Can be done.

Further, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the invention relating to the gaming machine of the following means 2 or means 3. Conventionally, in a gaming machine, the number of special figure games (number of times variable display is executed) executed in a normal gaming state as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-95449 (0058, 0133, etc.) is 1000. When the big hit (advantageous state) does not occur even if the number of times (special number of times) is reached (the special condition is satisfied), the game state is controlled to the probabilistic state, and the probability that the big hit is decided as a result of the special figure game is high. It is increased to about 1/100, and big hits are likely to occur in subsequent special figure games, and even if the number of special figure games (number of times variable display is executed) reaches 1000 in the normal game state, big hits occur. When not, there was something that generated a time saving state instead of a probabilistic state. However, in such a gaming machine, the degree of relief of the player when the number of times the variable display is executed reaches the special number is insufficient, and in view of this point, the relief of the player can be suitably realized. There is a demand for the provision of various gaming machines.

The gaming machine of means 2 is
It is possible to execute the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information, and control the advantageous state (for example, the big hit gaming state) when the specific display result (for example, the big hit symbol) is derived and displayed. It ’s a gaming machine,
Step 100 IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIG. 11-17, are state control means capable of controlling a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state. The part to be executed, as shown in FIG. 11-19, the part to execute step 100 IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100) and
It is provided with an updating means (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-13, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 for executing step 100 IWS71) in which numerical information can be updated based on the execution of the variable display.
The state control means can control the special state when the special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times (for example, FIG. 11-13). As shown in the part where step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 are executed in the game control microcomputer 100, and the part where step 100IWS170 and step 100IWS173 are executed in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 11-17).
The updating means updates the numerical information depending on whether the variable display of the first identification information is executed or the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-13). , A portion for executing step 100 IWS 71 in the game control microcomputer 100).
According to such a configuration, the relief of the player can be suitably realized. Specifically, even if the game state changes and the variable display of any identification information is executed, the numerical information is continuously updated, so that the player can be easily rescued and the motivation for the game is increased. Can be done.

The gaming machine of means 3 is the gaming machine of means 2,
When the variable display is being executed, the predetermined suggestion effect execution means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-49) capable of executing the predetermined suggestion effect (for example, the advance notice effect) is executed in step 108IWS811 in the effect control CPU 120. Part) and
The background image changes as shown in FIGS. 11-52 (C1) and 11-52 (C2), for example, a special notification effect for notifying that the control of the special state is started based on the satisfaction of the special condition. , Blackout at the start of fluctuation as shown in FIG. 11-53 (B), blackout at the end of fluctuation as shown in FIG. 11-54 (C), etc.) and a special notification effect executing means (for example, , A portion in which the effect control CPU 120 executes step 100 IWS638), as shown in FIGS. 11-23).
The predetermined suggestion effect execution means has a common ratio of executing the predetermined suggestion effect in the period before the special condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-44, the effect control CPU 120 performs the effect control CPU 120 in step 108IWS802A. (See FIG. 11-50).
According to such a configuration, the player can be surprised by suddenly executing the special notification effect, and the interest can be improved.

The present invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, or may have a configuration other than the invention-specific matters together with the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention. It may have.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the effect control board which concerns on the feature part 91AK, 92AK. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the storage area which concerns on the characteristic part 91AK, 92AK. It is a figure which shows the determination example of the moving image data and a text display process table which concerns on a feature part 91AK, 92AK. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the text display process table which concerns on the feature part 91AK, 92AK. It is a figure which shows the text display control example which concerns on the feature part 91AK, 92AK. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the text display setting information which concerns on a feature part 91AK, 92AK. It is a figure which shows the text display example which concerns on the feature part 91AK, 92AK. It is a figure which shows the text display example which concerns on the feature part 91AK, 92AK. It is a figure which shows the text display example which concerns on the feature part 91AK, 92AK. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the screen display which concerns on the feature part 01AK, 02AK. It is a figure which shows the drawing command for effect which concerns on the feature part 01AK, 02AK. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the screen display which concerns on the feature part 01AK, 02AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect drawing composition processing which concerns on a feature part 01AK, 02AK. It is a figure which shows the execution example of the image processing which concerns on the feature part 01AK, 02AK. It is a figure which shows the image display example which concerns on the feature part 01AK, 02AK. It is a figure which shows the reach effect content and the drawing processing pattern which concerns on the feature part 01AK, 02AK. It is a figure which shows the determination example of the drawing processing pattern which concerns on the feature part 01AK, 02AK. It is a figure which shows the effect execution period which concerns on the feature part 01AK, 02AK. It is a figure which shows the production execution example which concerns on the feature part 01AK, 02AK. It is a figure which shows the production execution example which concerns on the feature part 01AK, 02AK. It is a figure which shows the production execution example which concerns on the feature part 01AK, 02AK. It is a figure which shows the production execution example which concerns on the feature part 01AK, 02AK. It is a front view which shows the pachinko game machine as a feature part 75SG. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine as a feature part 75SG. It is a front view which shows the game board of the pachinko game machine as a feature part 75SG. 10-3 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 10-3. It is a front view which shows the light guide plate device. (A) is an enlarged front view showing a main part of the light guide plate device, (B) is a sectional view taken along line BB of (A), and (C) is an enlarged view showing a main part of (B). (A) is a front view showing the first effect unit, and (B) is a rear view. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the state which saw the structure of the 1st effect unit diagonally from the front. (A) is a sectional view taken along the line CC of FIG. 10-7 (A), (B) is a sectional view taken along the line DD of FIG. 10-7 (A), and FIG. It is E cross-sectional view. (A) is a front view showing a base member, (B) is a front view showing an LED substrate, and (C) is a front view showing a cover member. (A) is a front view showing the first effect unit with the cover member removed, and (B) is a front view showing the first effect unit with the cover member attached. It is an enlarged view which shows the main part of FIG. 10-11 (B). (A) is a front view showing a variable winning ball unit, and (B) is a sectional view taken along the line FF of (A). (A) and (B) are cross-sectional views showing a main part of the first effect unit, and (C) and (D) are cross-sectional views showing the main part of the variable winning ball unit. It is a figure for comparing the 1st production unit and the variable winning ball unit. It is a figure for demonstrating the similar color. (A) is a front view showing the second effect unit, and (B) is a front view showing the second effect unit in a state where the cover member is removed. (A) is a sectional view taken along the line GG of FIG. 10-17 (A), and FIG. 10B is a sectional view taken along the line HH of FIG. 10-17 (A). (A) is a diagram for explaining the boundary between the base member and the LED substrate, and (B) is a diagram showing the configuration of the second effect unit. (A) is a front view which shows the 3rd effect unit and the 4th effect unit. (A) is a sectional view taken along line II of FIG. 10-20, and (B) is a sectional view taken along line JJ of FIG. 10-20. It is a KK cross-sectional view of FIG. 10-20. It is explanatory drawing which shows the visual appearance state of the 3rd effect unit and the 4th effect unit. It is a figure which shows the structure of the 3rd effect unit and the 4th effect unit. It is a figure which shows the effect mode when the 3rd effect unit and the 4th effect unit emit light. (A) is a schematic front view showing a state in which the third effect unit is located at the origin position, and (B) is a schematic front view showing a state in which the third effect unit is located at the effect position. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in the feature part 108IW. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the jackpot probability and the time saving loss probability for each set value. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the jackpot probability and the time saving loss probability for each set value. It is explanatory drawing which shows the jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the time saving type determination table. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the time saving type. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the fluctuation pattern table in the feature part 108IW. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the fluctuation pattern table in the feature part 108IW. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main processing in a feature part 108IW. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol stop processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the external output signal. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end processing. It is a state transition diagram for demonstrating the state transition in the feature part 108IW. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of the effect control main processing in the feature part 108IW. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the customer waiting demo production control processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the telop display execution lottery table and the telop mode determination lottery table. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the concrete example of the effect mode of the telop display while waiting for a customer. It is a flowchart which shows the read-ahead notice setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the pre-reading notice effect execution decision table, the pre-reading notice effect type determination table, and the pre-read notice effect mode determination table. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of each effect type of the look-ahead notice effect. It is a time chart for explaining the fluctuation period and the execution period of the look-ahead notice effect in the time saving state via the jackpot and the time saving state via the relief. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display start setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the advance notice effect execution decision table and the advance notice effect mode determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the effect processing during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows the effect processing during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows the waiting process per special figure. This is a timing chart for explaining the execution timing of the effect when executing the variable display that shortens the relief time. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the concrete example of the effect mode until shift to the relief time shortening. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the concrete example of the effect mode until shift to the relief time shortening. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the concrete example of the effect mode until shift to the relief time shortening. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the concrete example of the effect mode until shift to the relief time shortening. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the concrete example of the production mode of the time saving rushing appearance effect. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a concrete example of the production mode of the countdown effect and the effect effect of Gase. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol process processing in the modification 1. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol stop processing in modification 1. It is a flowchart which shows the next fluctuation postponement processing in modification 1. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the execution timing of the effect at the time of executing the variation display which shortens the relief time in the modification 1. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating modification 2-4 of the method of selecting the fluctuation pattern in the time saving state based on the relief time saving. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variation pattern setting process in Example 2. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process in Example 2. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the advance notice effect execution decision table and the advance notice effect mode determination table in Example 2. FIG. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the execution timing of the effect at the time of executing the variation display which shortens the relief time in Example 2. FIG. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the effect mode until shift to the relief time shortening in Example 2. FIG. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the effect mode until shifting to the relief time shortening in the modification 1 of the second embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the effect mode until shifting to the relief time shortening in the modification 2 of the second embodiment.

A mode for carrying out the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

(form)
The gaming machine of Form 1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 75SG001).
Electronic components (for example, LED substrates 303, 403, 603, 803) provided so as to be visible to the player, and
Specific members (for example, base members 301, 401, 601, 801) provided around the electronic component and formed in a color similar to that of the electronic component, and
A translucent member (for example, a cover member 302, 402, 602, 802) which is a translucent member and is provided so that the player can visually see the electronic component and the specific member through the member.
It is characterized by having.
According to this feature, even if the electronic components are arranged so as to be visible to the player, the electronic components are less noticeable due to the specific members of the same color, so that the degree of freedom in design can be increased.

The gaming machine of the second embodiment is the gaming machine according to the first embodiment.
Predetermined electronic components (for example, first start port switch 22A, second start port switch 22B, solenoids 81, 82, etc.) provided so as to be difficult to see or invisible to the player,
A predetermined member (for example, a member for fixing the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, the solenoids 81, 82, etc.) provided around the predetermined electronic component, and the like.
With
The predetermined member is characterized in having a color non-similar to that of the predetermined electronic component.
According to this feature, for a predetermined electronic component that is difficult or invisible to the player, a general-purpose product can be used without considering the balance with the predetermined member, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

The gaming machine of the third form is the gaming machine according to the first or second form.
A display means (for example, an image display device 5) is provided.
The electronic component (for example, the LED substrate 303) is characterized in that it is provided at a position farther from the display means than the specific member (for example, the upper part of the base member 301).
According to this feature, the electronic component is inconspicuous because it is located away from the display means that the player pays attention to.

The gaming machine of the fourth embodiment is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to third forms.
A protrusion (for example, a protrusion 3A) provided above the electronic component (for example, LED substrate 603,803) and protruding toward the player from the electronic component is provided.
The protruding portion is characterized in that it is larger than the electronic component.
According to this feature, the electronic component becomes a shadow of the protruding portion and becomes inconspicuous.

The gaming machine of the fifth embodiment is the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment.
The electronic component (for example, LED substrate 603,803) and the specific member (for example, base member 601,801) are dark (for example, black) (variation example).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the electronic component is easily mixed with the shadow of the protruding portion, so that it becomes less noticeable.

The gaming machine of the sixth embodiment is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to fifth aspects.
The specific member is characterized in that the color brightness or saturation is higher than that of the electronic component.
According to this feature, the specific member has higher visibility than the electronic component, so that the electronic component can be made relatively inconspicuous.

The gaming machine of the seventh embodiment is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to sixth embodiments.
The translucent member (for example, cover member 302) has a decorative pattern (for example, decorative pattern 331) formed so as to straddle the electronic component (for example, LED substrate 303) and the specific member (for example, base member 301). ) (See Fig. 10-12)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, even if the electronic components are arranged so as to be visible to the player, the decorative patterns make the electronic components inconspicuous, so that the degree of freedom in design can be increased.

The gaming machine of the eighth embodiment is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to seventh embodiments.
The electronic component (for example, LED board 303) is a circuit board.
The specific member (for example, base member 301) has a decorative pattern (for example, decorative pattern 341) that shares at least a part of the form of the circuit pattern (for example, printed wiring 320) formed on the circuit board. It is provided (see Fig. 10-12).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the circuit pattern formed on the circuit board becomes less noticeable.

The gaming machine of the ninth aspect is the gaming machine according to the seventh or eighth form.
The specific member (for example, the base member 301) has a predetermined region (for example, rear wall portions 313A to 313D) that can be visually recognized from the player side without passing through the translucent member (for example, the cover member 302). ,
A predetermined decorative pattern (for example, decorative pattern 341) having the same or similar aspect as the decorative pattern (for example, decorative pattern 331) of the translucent member is provided in the predetermined area (see FIG. 10-12).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it becomes difficult to understand that the specific member and the translucent member are different members.

The gaming machine of the tenth form is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to ninth forms.
A decorative portion (for example, a decorative portion 420) provided at a position corresponding to a boundary (for example, the boundary portion BD) between the electronic component (for example, the LED substrate 403) and the specific member (for example, the base member 401) is provided. (See Fig. 10-19)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, even if the electronic component is arranged so as to be visible to the player, the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member is obscured by the decorative portion, so that the electronic component becomes inconspicuous, so that the degree of freedom in design is increased. Can be enhanced.

The gaming machine of the eleventh form is the gaming machine according to the tenth aspect.
The decorative part includes a plurality of decorative parts.
A plurality of predetermined decorative portions are provided at positions that do not correspond to the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member.
The plurality of decorative portions are characterized in that the number is larger than that of the plurality of predetermined decorative portions.
According to this feature, the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member is made difficult to see by the plurality of decorative portions, so that the electronic component is made inconspicuous.

The gaming machine of the 12th form is the gaming machine according to any one of the 1st to 11th forms.
The translucent member (for example, the cover member 402) corresponds to a boundary corresponding region (for example, the boundary portion BD) between the electronic component (for example, the LED substrate 403) and the specific member (for example, the base member 401). It has (for example, a convex portion 410) and a boundary non-corresponding region (for example, a region other than the convex portion 410) that does not correspond to the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member.
The translucency of the boundary-corresponding region is lower than that of the non-boundary-corresponding region.
According to this feature, it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member through the boundary corresponding area, so that the electronic component becomes inconspicuous.

The gaming machine of the thirteenth aspect is the gaming machine according to the eleventh or twelveth forms.
A logotype (for example, the letter "V") is displayed on the decorative portion (for example, the decorative portion 420) (see FIG. 10-19).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it becomes difficult for the player to pay attention to the logotype and be aware of the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member, so that the electronic component becomes inconspicuous.

The gaming machine of the 14th embodiment is the gaming machine according to any one of the 11th to 13th aspects.
The electronic component (for example, LED substrate 403) includes a light emitting means (for example, a second effect LED 404A) capable of causing the decorative portion (for example, the decorative portion 420) to emit light (see FIG. 10-18).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the decorative portion is conspicuous due to light emission, the player is less likely to be aware of the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member, so that the electronic component is less conspicuous.

The gaming machine of the 15th embodiment is the gaming machine according to the 14th aspect.
The light emitting means (for example, the second effect LED 404A) is provided so that the decorative portion (for example, the decorative portion 420) can emit surface light (for example, the light from the second effect LED 404A is an inner lens). The entire front surface of the convex portion 410 including the decorative portion 420 emits surface light by being emitted from the entire front surface of the 405 substantially evenly forward and incident on the region corresponding to the convex portion 410.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the decorative portion is conspicuous due to surface emission, the player is less likely to be aware of the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member, so that the electronic component is less conspicuous.

The gaming machine of the 16th embodiment is the gaming machine according to any one of the 1st to 15th aspects.
Around the electronic component (for example, LED substrate 803) and the specific member (for example, base member 801), an effect means (for example, a third effect unit 600) having higher visibility than the electronic component and the specific member is provided. Provided (see Fig. 10-20)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, even if the electronic components are arranged so as to be visible to the player, the visibility of the effect means is higher than the visibility of the electronic components, so that the electronic components are less noticeable, which increases the degree of freedom in design. be able to.

The gaming machine of the form 17 is the gaming machine according to the form 16.
The effect means (for example, the third effect unit 600) is provided on the player side (front side) of the electronic component (for example, the LED substrate 803) (see FIG. 10-22).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the visibility of the effect means can be easily enhanced.

The gaming machine of the 18th form is the gaming machine according to the 16th or 17th form.
The effect unit (for example, the light emitting effect unit 630) provided so as to be visible to the player in the effect means (for example, the third effect unit 600) is larger than the electronic component (for example, the LED substrate 803) (FIG. 10). -20)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the visibility of the effect means can be easily enhanced.

The gaming machine of the 19th form is the gaming machine according to any one of the 16th to 18th forms.
The effect unit (for example, the light emitting effect unit 630) provided so as to be visible to the player in the effect means (for example, the third effect unit 600) is more visible than the color of the electronic component (for example, the LED substrate 803). Is characterized by its high color.
According to this feature, the visibility of the effect means can be easily enhanced.

The gaming machine of the form 20 is the gaming machine according to any one of the forms 16 to 19.
The effect means (for example, the third effect unit 600) has light emitting means (for example, LEDs 604A and 604B for the third effect) capable of irradiating light toward the player side (see FIG. 10-21 (A)).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the visibility of the effect means can be easily enhanced.

The gaming machine of the 21st form is the gaming machine according to any one of the 1st to 20th forms.
A specific translucent member (for example, a cover plate 702A of the variable winning ball unit 700) which is a translucent member and is provided at a position different from the translucent member is further provided.
The transmission rate (for example, XA%, XB%) that transmits the light that has entered the translucent member (for example, the cover member 302) in a predetermined direction (for example, the T direction) has entered the specific translucent member. It is lower than the transmittance (for example, Y%) that transmits light in the predetermined direction (see FIG. 10-14).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, even if the electronic components are arranged so as to be visible to the player, the translucency of the translucent member is lower than the translucency of the specific translucent member, so that the electronic components are less noticeable. The degree of freedom can be increased.

The gaming machine of the form 22 is the gaming machine according to the embodiment 21.
The plate thickness of the translucent member (for example, the front-rear dimensions L1A and L1B of the cover member 302) is thicker than the plate thickness of the specific translucent member (for example, the front-rear dimension L2 of the cover plate 702A) (see FIG. 10-14). )
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the translucency of the translucent member is lowered, so that the electronic component becomes inconspicuous.

The gaming machine of the form 23 is the gaming machine according to any one of the forms 1 to 22.
The translucent member (for example, the cover member 302) is colored in a predetermined color.
The predetermined color is characterized in that it is a similar color to the electronic component (for example, LED substrate 303) and the specific member (for example, base member 301).
According to this feature, the translucent member is assimilated with the electronic component or the specific member, so that the electronic component becomes inconspicuous.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1 etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area.

A variable display (also referred to as a special figure game) of a special symbol (also referred to as a special figure) as a plurality of types of special identification information is performed at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the lower left of the game area). A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Fluctuations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. When the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later is changed, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbol described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. The variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinked and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be expressed as a variable display or a variable display.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effects images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is synchronized with the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Is variable display. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to as simply variable display.

On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display in which execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. Hold display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of stored items on hold. The number of reserved storage corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storage corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as a total reserved storage number.

Further, at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the lower left of the game area), a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit, and the second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms, for example, a first starting winning opening that is always maintained in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the first special figure game may be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, a starting winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 81, and when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the starting winning opening door is in the closed position, so that the second starting winning opening is used. It is in a closed state where the game ball does not enter (also referred to as the second start winning opening is in a closed state). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning opening because the starting winning opening door is in the open position when the solenoid 81 is in the on state (second). It is also said that the starting winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls can be paid out and the second special figure game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any as long as it changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to a device including an electric tulip-type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four locations on the lower left and right sides of the game area), general winning openings 10 are provided, which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and has a large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for special electric accessory) is off, the big winning door closes the big winning door and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball. When a game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the lower left of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of the ordinary symbol as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from the special symbol. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal figure game.

A passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the normal drawing game is executed.

Below the normal symbol display 20, a normal symbol hold display 25C is provided. The normal figure hold indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is held, by the number of LEDs lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the game machine frame 3, and game effect lamps 9 for game effects are further provided around the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 is configured to include an LED.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (not shown in FIG. 1), a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball striking operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch the game ball toward the game area by the striking ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, the gaming balls paid out as prize balls and the gaming balls rented by the predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to the hitting ball launching device. ) A hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) is provided, in which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be gripped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, stick controller 31A and push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the rotation operation of the pachinko game machine 1 by the player on the ball striking operation handle 30. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal drawing game is being executed (when the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 but the normal drawing game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The normal map game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal symbol (a common symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When it becomes "per normal drawing", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed or during the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (although the start prize has occurred). If the special figure game based on the start winning cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" and a jackpot symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes "small hit". Further, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state.

In the big hit game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined mode. The open state includes the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also hereinafter referred to as an open upper limit period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until the maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A jackpot type is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and opening upper limit period) of the big winning opening and game states after the big hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc., which will be described later) are prepared, and the big hit is made according to these. The type is set. As the jackpot type, a jackpot type in which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type in which few prize balls are obtained, or a jackpot type in which almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

In the small hit game state, the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as the big hit game state in some big hit types (the number of times the big winning opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same. Etc.), the big winning opening is opened. As with the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability change state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, control (time saving control) is executed in which the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shortened as compared with the normal state. In the time-saving state, the average fluctuation time of the normal map (the period during which the normal map is changed) is shortened from the normal state, and the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game is improved from the normal state. Controls (high opening control, high base control) that make it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening are also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

In the probability variation state (probability fluctuation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state that is more advantageous for the player because it is a state in which a “big hit” is likely to occur in addition to improving the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol.

The time saving state and the probability change state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number-cutting (time-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state, a time saving state, or a probability change state, which is advantageous for the player, and the display result in the normal drawing game is "normal drawing hit". The pachinko game machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit" returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on, such as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in the same controlled state as (when the process is not executed).

The state in which the probability change control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which the probability change control is not executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which the time saving control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time saving control is not executed is also called a low base state. By combining these, it is also called a low-accuracy high-base state in the time-saving state, a high-accuracy high-base state in the probabilistic state, and a low-accuracy low-base state in the normal state. The high-accuracy state and low-base state are also called the high-accuracy low-base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs. If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that there may be no "small hit" as the display result of the special figure game.

The game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probabilistic state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9 It may be turned on or off, the operation of the movable body 32, or an effect using an arbitrary effect device including a part or all of them.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display of a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is a mode in which is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative symbol. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher hit reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of a "probability change jackpot" that is controlled to a probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and displayed as a stop, and the probability change state is entered after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be aligned and displayed as a stop. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability pattern becomes the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability big hit" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", a fixed decorative symbol (for example, "for example," 1 3 5 ”etc.) Is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a“ small hit ”). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state), and when it becomes "small hit". , A common fixed decorative symbol may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "missing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the variable display result of the decorative symbol is a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach loss") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach loss"). If the display result is "missing", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination ("reach loss") that is not a jackpot combination. The fixed decorative symbol (also referred to as) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "reach loss").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution, and a pre-reading advance notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the pre-reading notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small hit game state, the small hit medium effect for notifying the small hit game state is executed. It should be noted that the big hit game during the small hit game state and in some big hit types (the big hit type in the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, the big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a highly accurate state). By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not know whether the player is currently in the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high accuracy state and the low accuracy state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a gaming state, a small hit gaming state, a gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if a part or all of the RAM 102 is stopped from supplying power to the pachinko gaming machine 1. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be one that is updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (one that is updated by software).

The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting (a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or is passed) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). It takes in a detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering and transmits it to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for a prize-winning door. To transmit.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) issues an effect control command (a command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a jackpot type)) and a variation pattern used when executing a special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of winning, the number of stored memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing the program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed). (Including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes the effect based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, so that the effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the output voice) to the voice control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or, a lamp signal (a signal for designating a lamp lighting / extinguishing mode) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes audio output, lamp lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.), and movable body 32 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used to execute various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. It is configured to include the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operations on the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on the power supply board, for example. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop processing, a processing of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up to the RAM 102, a data protection processing of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes addition of an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data for advancing the game (including various flags, various timer states, etc.), as well as the state of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (used by using an error detection code) and determines whether or not the data is normal (step). S5). In step S5, for example, the parity bit and the checksum are used to determine whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped. When it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the change of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing recovery from the power failure to the effect control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, an effect control command that specifies the game state before the power failure that is backed up, and an effect control that specifies the display result of the special figure game that is being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may want to send a command. For these commands, the same commands that are set to be transmitted in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command that specifies the time of recovery from the power failure, for example, the image display device 5 indicates that the image display device 5 has recovered from the power failure or is recovering from the power failure. , Display the screen for notification. The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

After the restoration process or the initialization process is completed and the effect control command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and interrupts are permitted (step S12). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to perform the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of times jackpots have occurred) and start information (starting) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information indicating the number of times of winning (information indicating the number of times of winning, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of probability change state, etc.) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the special symbol game, control the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control the game state, and the like (for details, refer to the details. See below).

Following the special symbol process processing, the normal symbol process processing is executed (step S26). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure hit". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of normal figure reservations is displayed by turning on the normal figure hold display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the number of hold memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the judgment result such as the occurrence of the start winning prize, the number of hold memories, the read-ahead judgment, etc. is set on the effect control board 12. Be told. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set to "big hit" or "small hit" based on the random value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when the display result is set to "big hit". Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a definite special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. The special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be memorized, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various determinations based on the random number values, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which the determination values to be compared with the random number values are assigned to the determination results) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this fluctuation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is set using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a preliminary determination result of whether or not the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The process of deciding on is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special symbol game (special symbol fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. It specifies the content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol change processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are set to change the special symbol, and the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol. It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. Contains the process of making settings for. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "missing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "loss", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot release preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening by starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the upper limit period for opening the big winning opening and the upper limit number of executions for the round are set according to which type of jackpot is used. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the big winning opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the device from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. End the processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-opening process of the jackpot, a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round that opens the jackpot has reached the set upper limit execution number, and a jackpot game state when the upper limit execution number is reached. It includes processing to make settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the post-launch processing is completed.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect action for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing to make various settings to start control and time reduction control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end processing ends.

The small hit release preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This small hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting the large winning opening to be open in the small hit game state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to measure the elapsed time from the opening state of the big winning opening and to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing to determine whether or not it is. When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing during the small hit opening process ends.

The small hit end process in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end process ends.

(Main operation of production control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. When the effect control board 12 receives the power supply voltage from the power source board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122, set various initial values, and press the effect control board 12. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process process or the like. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process process, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and a movable body 32. Controls are performed to operate various production devices such as the driving operation of the LED. Further, regarding the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process process in step S76, the effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the read-ahead notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, and setting for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command or the like for designating the start of the variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is to be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, their modes, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is completed. The display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , Driving the movable body 32, outputting voice and sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting the command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and commanding the lamp control board 14 (illumination signal). Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED according to the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is to be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol, which is the display result of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when receiving an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to "6". Update to. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. In addition, when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The small hit medium effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. In this small hit medium effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set content. .. Further, in the small hit middle effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the small hit game state is terminated, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. Update to a certain "5" and end the small hit medium production process.

The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

The jackpot effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the jackpot effect processing, for example, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the ending effect process "7" in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the jackpot game state. Update to "" and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process ends.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation is a pay-out type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the gaming media are enclosed and points are given based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko game machine 1 is shown as the game machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player When the symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, if the combination of the stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by the detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on the network connected via the communication line or the like by providing the communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the programs and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a percentage of "0%" and the other may have a percentage of "100%" or less than "100%".

(Explanation of the feature part regarding the set value)
Hereinafter, the feature portion related to the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

Although not shown, the main board 11 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state of being housed in a board case configured to be openable by the first member and the second member. ing. Further, although not shown, the main board 11 has a lock switch for switching the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to a changeable set value change state, and a jackpot which will be described later in the set value change state. A setting changeover switch that functions as a setting switch for changing a set value such as a winning probability (ball output rate) and an open sensor that detects the opening of a gaming machine frame are provided. The set value change state in the present embodiment is also a state in which the staff of the game hall or the like can confirm the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (set value confirmation state).

Operation units such as these lock switches and setting changeover switches that can be operated by the staff of the amusement park and the like are provided in the setting changeover main body unit and are housed in the board case together with the main board 11. The lock switch and the setting changeover switch are exposed to the back side through an opening formed in the back surface of the board case so that the lock switch and the setting changeover switch can be operated without opening the board case.

A board case containing a lock switch and a setting changeover switch is provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Therefore, the lock switch and the setting changeover switch are extremely difficult or impossible to operate when the gaming machine frame is closed, and can be operated by opening the gaming machine frame using a predetermined door key. .. Further, since the lock switch requires the operation of the setting key possessed by the staff of the game hall or the like, only the administrator who possesses the setting key can operate the lock switch. The lock switch is also a switch capable of performing an ON / OFF switching operation by a setting key. In the present embodiment, a mode in which the door key and the setting key are separate keys is illustrated, but these may be shared by one key.

A display monitor capable of displaying set values and base values is arranged on the board case. The display monitor is connected to the main board 11 and is arranged on the upper part of the board case. That is, the display monitor is arranged in front of the main board 11 in the board case when visually recognizing it. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the gaming machine frame is not opened, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized is the back surface side of the gaming board 2 when the gaming machine frame is opened. This is the front of the pachinko machine 1 and is different from the front of the pachinko machine 1. As described above, the display monitor is arranged in front of the gaming board 2 when the back surface side of the gaming machine 2 is visually recognized in the open state of the gaming machine frame. However, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

The display monitor includes a first display unit, a second display unit, a third display unit, and a fourth display unit. The first display unit to the fourth display unit of the display monitor are each composed of seven segments composed of seven segments drawing the character "8" and dots arranged at the lower right side of the seven segments. .. The first display unit to the fourth display unit of the display monitor can be lit or blinked in various colors such as red, blue, green, yellow, and white. It is also possible to display these colors in different colors or so-called rainbows while changing them in a very short cycle.

A game information display unit may be provided as a predetermined position of the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine 1, for example, at a lower left position of the game area. A round display, a right-handed lamp, a probability variation lamp, and a time saving lamp are collectively arranged in the game information display unit. The round display can display the number of rounds of the jackpot game and the jackpot type during the jackpot game. The right-handed lamp lights up in a game state in which the game ball is launched toward the right game area, such as a low-accuracy high-base state as a time-saving state or a big hit game state. The probabilistic lamp lights up when it is in the probabilistic state. The time saving lamp lights up when the time saving state is reached. The round display is composed of 5 segments (LEDs).

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured such that the winning probability (ball output rate) of a big hit changes according to a set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) is changed by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value. The set value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest payout rate, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is. Further, as for the set value, 6 which is the largest value is the most disadvantageous value for the amusement park side, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the more advantageous the value is for the amusement park side. If the ball output rate changes according to the set value, for example, the jackpot probability may change depending on the set value, and although the jackpot probability is constant, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state changes depending on the set value. May be good. As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured so that any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player can be set. The set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the side of the main board 11 to the side of the effect control board 12.

(Explanation of feature units 91AK and 92AK)
FIG. 8-1 shows a configuration example of various circuits mounted on the effect control board 12 with respect to the feature units 91AK and 92AK. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 8-1, various circuits such as the effect control microprocessor 91AK100, the input circuit 91AK121, the memory controller 91AK122, the effect data memory 91AK123, the ROM91AK124, the RAM91AK125, and the watchdog timer 91AK126 are mounted on the effect control board 12. ing. The effect control microprocessor 91AK100 includes a CPU 91AK131, a VDP91AK132, an audio processing circuit 91AK133, a lamp control circuit 91AK134, a motor control circuit 135, and a built-in memory 91AK136. The VDP91AK132 includes an instruction decoder 91AK141, a demultiplexer 91AK142, a video decoder 91AK143, a moving image renderer 91AK144, a character image renderer 91AK145, a text image renderer 91AK146, a VRAM91AK147, and a display drive circuit 91AK148. The voice processing circuit 91AK133 includes a voice decoder 91AK151.

The effect control microprocessor 91AK100 executes data processing and signal processing based on the effect control command received from the main board 11, thereby performing image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamp 9, and other decorations. An integrated processor in which a circuit capable of controlling the execution of an effect using a part or all of a plurality of effect devices such as an LED for effect and a movable member for effect such as a movable body 32 is integrated on one chip may be used. .. The effect control microprocessor 91AK100 includes a CPU 91AK131, VDP91AK132, and a built-in memory 91AK136, while a part or all of the sound processing circuit 91AK133, the lamp control circuit 91AK134, and the motor control circuit 91AK135 are the effect control microprocessors. It may be provided outside the 91AK100.

The input circuit 91AK121 may include a buffer circuit or the like. The buffer circuit of the input circuit 91AK121 is used to receive an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The memory controller 91AK122 executes various processes on the stored data of the effect data memory 91AK123 in response to the request signal supplied from the effect control microprocessor 91AK100. The effect data memory 91AK123 stores in advance the effect data that can be used to execute the effect using the effect device, such as various image data indicating the display image in the image display device 5. The image data stored in the effect data memory 91AK123 may include moving image data and still image data. As the still image data, character image data which is sprite image data which is a plurality of types of image element data corresponding to a plurality of types of effect images, such as a plurality of types of decorative patterns variably displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, is It suffices if it is prepared. The effect image corresponding to the decorative pattern may be included in the character image. In addition, arbitrary character images displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, specifically, an effect image showing a person, a figure, a symbol, or the like, and image data of a background image are stored in advance in the effect data memory 91AK123. I just need to be there. As the still image data, for example, text image data that enables characters to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 may be prepared. In addition to the image data, the effect data memory 91AK123 may store a part or all of the audio data used for the audio output by the speakers 8L and 8R. The effect data memory 91AK123 may store a part or all of the lamp drive data used for lighting the light emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED. The effect data memory 91AK123 may store a part or all of the motor drive data used for rotationally driving the drive motor that operates the movable member 32 and the like. The effect data memory 91AK123 may be a non-volatile semiconductor memory such as a NAND flash memory that can be electrically erased, written, or rewritten. However, the effect data memory 91AK123 is used as a read-only storage device in a normal use state in which the progress of the effect in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled.

The ROM 91AK 124 stores a computer program for effect control, fixed data, and the like. The RAM 91AK 125 provides a work area for the CPU 91AK 131 of the effect control microprocessor 91AK100. The watchdog timer 91AK126 has a counter circuit that counts up or down based on the setting of the built-in register, and when the measurement time elapses after the start time (timeout time) and a time-out occurs, a time-out that becomes a time-lapse signal Generate a signal. The time-out signal is input to the CPU 91AK131 of the effect control microprocessor 91AK100. When the timeout signal is generated, the CPU 91AK131 is reset, and the effect control microprocessor 91AK100 is restarted.

In addition to the effect control program, the ROM 91AK124 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the effect operation. For example, in the ROM 91AK 124, the CPU 91AK 131 of the effect control microprocessor 91AK100 configures a plurality of determination tables prepared for performing various determinations, determinations, and settings, table data constituting the determination table, and various effect control patterns. Pattern data etc. are stored. The effect control pattern includes, for example, effect control execution data (display control data, voice control data, lamp control data, motor control data, operation detection control data, etc.) and an end code associated with the effect control process timer determination value. It is composed of process data. A part or all of the effect control pattern and the effect control execution data may be configured as a display list. The display list is data of a group of instructions in which a series of transfer instructions to be executed by VDP91AK132 are described according to the order of image processing and the like. The display list may include a display control command group, a voice control command group, a lamp control command group, and a motor control command group in a mixed manner. By controlling the progress of the effect using such a display list, it is sufficient that the electric components for the effect can be controlled in cooperation with each other. The RAM 91AK 125 stores programs and various data used for controlling electrical components for production. The CPU 91AK131 may be able to read the program or data stored in the RAM 91AK 125 in a reading time shorter than the reading time of the program or data stored in the ROM 91AK 124.

The CPU 91AK131 executes control processing according to a computer program for effect control. At this time, the CPU 91AK 131 executes an effect control process for controlling the progress of the effect by the effect electric components according to the program read from the ROM 91AK 124. The effect control processing includes, for example, a fixed data reading process in which the CPU 91AK 131 reads fixed data from the ROM 91AK 124, a variable data writing process in which the CPU 91AK 131 writes various variable data to the RAM 91AK 125 and temporarily stores them, and various types in which the CPU 91AK 131 is temporarily stored in the RAM 91AK 125. Variable data read processing for reading the variable data of May be good.

The VDP91AK132 determines the control content of the image display in the image display device 5 based on the display control command from the CPU91AK131, the register setting, and the like. For example, the VDP91AK 132 controls for executing variable display of decorative patterns and various effect displays by determining the switching timing of the effect image to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. The VDP91AK132 is an image processor having image data processing functions such as a high-speed drawing function, a moving image data separation function, and a video decoding function. The VDP91AK132 may be a GPU (Graphics Processing Unit), a GCL (Graphics Controller LSI), or a microprocessor for image processing generally called a DSP (Digital Signal Processor).

The instruction decoder 91AK141 decodes the instruction unit (instruction code) included in the display control command from the CPU 91AK131, and instructs image processing or the like according to the decoding result. For example, the display control instruction group included in the decoding result is supplied to the internal circuit of the VDP91AK132. The instruction decoder 91AK141 may generate a control signal according to the decoding result and supply it to the internal circuit of the VDP 91AK132. The voice control instruction group included in the decoding result may be supplied to the voice processing circuit 91AK133. The instruction group for lamp control included in the decoding result may be supplied to the lamp control circuit 91AK134. The instruction group for motor control included in the decoding result may be supplied to the motor control circuit 91AK135.

The demultiplexer 91AK142 inputs the moving image data read from the effect data memory 91AK123 or the like, and outputs the video data and the audio data separately. The video data output from the demultiplexer 91AK142 is input to the video decoder 91AK143. The audio data output from the demultiplexer 91AK142 is input to the audio decoder 91AK151 of the audio processing circuit 91AK133. The video decoder 91AK143 decompresses and decodes the compressed and encoded video data and outputs the data. The video data output from the video decoder 91AK143 is supplied to the moving image renderer 91AK144. The video decoder 91AK143 may read compression-encoded character image data or text image data from the effect data memory 91AK123 or the like, decompress and decode the data, and then supply the character image renderer 91AK145 or the text image renderer 91AK146.

The moving image renderer 91AK144 writes and stores the video data supplied from the video decoder 91AK143 in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. The moving image renderer 91AK144 executes image processing capable of adjusting the hue, saturation, brightness, or a part or all of the hue, saturation, and brightness of the image shown in the image data, and temporarily stores the adjusted image data in the VRAM 91AK147. You may. The character image renderer 91AK145 is input with character image data read from the effect data memory 91AK123 and the like and character image data supplied from the video decoder 91AK143, and is written and stored in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. The character image renderer 91AK145 may convert the character image data in vector format into a bitmap format and temporarily store the character image data in VRAM 91AK147. Even if the character image renderer 91AK145 executes an image conversion process for displaying the character image specified by the character image designation information in a display mode including the display style and display layout set by the character display setting information. good. In the text image renderer 91AK146, text image data read from the effect data memory 91AK123 and the like and text image data supplied from the video decoder 91AK143 are input, and are written and stored in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. The text image renderer 91AK146 may convert the text image data in the vector format into a bitmap format and temporarily store the text image data in the VRAM 91AK147. Even if the text image renderer 91AK146 executes an image conversion process for displaying the text image specified by the text image designation information in a display mode including the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information. good.

The VRAM 91AK 147 temporarily stores image data and provides a work area for image data processing by the VDP 91AK 132. The VRAM 91AK147 may be provided with, for example, a palette area in which palette data is arranged, a character buffer in which character image data is stored, a text buffer in which text image data is stored, a CG buffer, and the like. The CG buffer temporarily stores palette data in which the display colors of characters and texts are defined when the drawing process by VDP91AK132 is executed, and temporarily stores the display data of the effect image created by the drawing process. It is used for storage. The display drive circuit 91AK148 is a circuit for outputting signals for displaying various images on the screen of the image display device 5. The display drive circuit 91AK148 outputs a predetermined clock signal (dot clock signal) and scanning signal (drive control signal) to the image display device 5 together with a color signal (gradation control signal) corresponding to the display data created in the VDP 91AK132. do it.

A frame buffer may be provided inside the VRAM 91AK 147 or in a memory module separate from the VRAM 91AK 147, such as the built-in memory 91AK 136. The frame buffer provides a virtual display area in which display data of the effect image created by the drawing process by VDP91AK132 is expanded and stored. The display data stored in the frame buffer is bitmap format image data (pixel data, raster) created by VDP91AK132 based on vector format image data (vector data, vector data) such as points, lines, and polygons. Data) etc. In the frame buffer, for example, an actual display area for storing display data of various images displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 and display data of various images not displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 are stored. The virtual display area to be used may be included. Alternatively, display data for displaying a screen having the same size as the display screen of the image display device 5 is created in the virtual display area of the frame buffer, and the display data in the virtual display area is supplied to the display drive circuit 91AK148. As a result, the data may be output to the image display device 5.

For example, an image display area and an image drawing area are allocated to the storage area of the frame buffer. In the image display area, display data for displaying the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 is stored. The display data of each effect image created by the drawing process is stored in the image drawing area. The image display area and the image drawing area may be switched to each other each time a V blank occurs. The V-blank occurs at a cycle of updating the image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. Each time the V-blank is started, a V-blank interrupt signal may be output from the VDP91AK132 to the CPU91AK131, and various interrupt signals may be output from the VDP91AK132 to the CPU91AK131. By switching between the image display area and the image drawing area each time a V-blank occurs, display data of each effect image is created in the storage area allocated as the image drawing area in a certain V-blank cycle (first drawing display period). The drawing process is performed, and in the next V blank period (second drawing display period), this storage area is switched to the image display area. Therefore, the display data created by the drawing process in the first drawing display period is output to the image display device 5 in the second drawing display period, and the image drawing area is allocated in the second drawing display period. In the storage area, the display data created by the drawing process is stored.

The audio processing circuit 91AK133 generates an audio signal that enables audio output using the speakers 8L and 8R based on instructions and register settings from the CPU 91AK131 and VDP91AK132. The audio data output from the demultiplexer 91AK142 of the VDP91AK132 is supplied to the audio decoder 91AK151 of the audio processing circuit 91AK133. The voice decoder 91AK151 decompresses and decodes the compressed and encoded voice data to generate a voice signal. Further, the audio processing circuit 91AK133 may include an audio data memory that can store audio data that is not included in the moving image data in advance. The audio data memory may be provided outside the audio processing circuit 91AK133 by being included in, for example, the effect data memory 91AK123 or ROM91AK124. The voice processing circuit 91AK133 may generate a voice signal by decompressing and decoding the voice data read from the voice data memory based on the instructions and register settings from the CPU 91AK131 and VDP91AK132.

The lamp control circuit 91AK134 controls a lighting mode (light emitting mode) such as lighting, extinguishing, and blinking of a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 or a decorative LED. The lamp control circuit 91AK134 generates lamp control data based on instructions and register settings from the CPU 91AK131 and VDP91AK132, and outputs the lamp control data to the lamp control board 14 and the lamp driver board. The motor control circuit 91AK135 controls operating states such as rotation, stop, rotation speed, and rotation angle (phase) of a drive motor that operably drives a movable member for production such as a movable body 32. The motor control circuit 91AK135 generates motor control data based on instructions and register settings from the CPU 91AK131 and VDP132, and outputs the motor control data to the motor driver board. The built-in memory 91AK136 is a memory circuit built in the effect control microprocessor 91AK100, and can store various data used for controlling the progress of the effect.

FIG. 8-2 shows a configuration example of the storage area for effect control according to the stored contents. In this embodiment, storage areas 91AKM01, 91AKM02, and 91AKM11 to 91AKM14 are provided as a plurality of storage areas. Each storage area may be provided so as to be included in, for example, the effect data memory 91AK123, ROM91AKM124, the built-in memory 91AK136, or a part or all of them. The plurality of storage areas include a storage area 91AKM11 for storing data related to moving images and a storage area 91AKM13 for storing data related to text images.

The storage area 91AKM01 stores the effect control program and the effect control management data, and functions as a management area for the effect control program and the like. For example, table data, which is configuration data of various tables prepared by the CPU 91AK131 of the microprocessor 91AK100 for effect control to perform various determinations, decisions, and settings, pattern data constituting the effect control pattern, and the like are stored as management data in a storage area. It suffices if it is stored in 91AKM01.

The storage area 91AKM02 stores display control programs and display control management data, and functions as a management area for display control programs and the like. For example, an image processing program prepared for the VDP91AK132 of the effect control microprocessor 91AK100 to perform various image processing, a display process table in which a procedure for displaying the effect image, etc. are defined are stored in the storage area 91AKM02. I just need to be there. The image processing program may include a program that converts image data in vector format into image data in bitmap format. The image processing program may include a program that generates a text image in a bitmap format based on the text described using the character code and the font data.

The storage area 91AKM11 stores moving image-related data including moving image data and related data. For the moving image data, image compression information including a reference image and a predicted image is generated by compression coding processing such as motion compensation prediction coding using a multi-frame image as an original image, and is multiplexed with audio data. Any multi-encoded stream may be used. The moving image-related data stored in the storage area 91AKM11 may include table data and data files constituting the moving image display process table. The moving image display process table is a display control process that can change the display content and display mode of the moving image to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 according to the elapsed time as the production of the pachinko gaming machine 1 progresses. Used. The display content of the moving image is the content of the moving image that is reproduced and displayed corresponding to the moving image data. The display mode of the moving image is a mode and a form when the moving image is reproduced and displayed, including the display style and the display layout of the moving image. The table data and data files constituting the moving image display process table may be stored in the storage area 91AKM02 as display control management data.

The storage area 91AKM12 stores character image-related data including character image data and its related data. The character image data may be any still image data in which an arbitrary character image showing a plurality of types of decorative patterns, people, figures, symbols, etc. is described in a vector format or a bitmap format. The character image-related data stored in the storage area 91AKM12 may include table data and a data file constituting the character display process table. The character display process table is used for display control processing in which the display content and display mode of the character image to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 can be changed according to the elapsed time as the effect of the pachinko gaming machine 1 progresses. Be done. The display content of the character image is the content of the character image displayed corresponding to the character image data. The display mode of the character image is a mode and form for displaying the character image, including the display style and display layout of the character image. The table data and data files constituting the character display process table may be stored in the storage area 91AKM02 as display control management data.

The storage area 91AKM13 stores text image-related data including text image data and its related data. The text image-related data may include outline font data. Outline font data is data that can be converted into the glyph of each character in bitmap format image data by specifying a combination of multiple vertex coordinates that connect contours for each character used to display a text image. be. The text image-related data may include vector font data or stroke font data in place of the outline font data or together with the outline font data. Vector font data and stroke font data are data that can be converted into glyphs of each character in bitmap format image data by specifying straight line and curve parameters for each character used to display a text image. .. Outline fonts and vector fonts are included in scalable fonts whose quality does not easily deteriorate even when the font is scaled up or down. The text image data indicates a text image that constitutes a character string that is a combination of a plurality of character images, and is an arbitrarily set word such as a sentence, a paragraph, a sentence, a phrase, a word, or a combination of a part or all of them. Any unit may be used as long as it can recognize the unit of. Further, the text image data may indicate a text image consisting of only a single character image. The text image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 using the text image data may indicate telop characters, subtitles, other information transmission characters, or the like. It may indicate decorative characters. Since the text image data is included in the effect data for displaying the text image, it may be stored in the effect data memory 91AK123. On the other hand, font data such as outline font data may be stored in either the ROM 91AK 124 or the built-in memory 91AK 136 because the VDP 91AK 132 is used when executing the image processing program. As described above, the storage area 91AKM13 may be provided in the effect data memory 91AK123 and the ROM 91AK124 or the built-in memory 91AK136. Similarly, other storage areas may be provided in a part or all of a plurality of memory devices such as the effect data memory 91AK123, ROM91AKM124, and built-in memory 91AK136.

The text image-related data stored in the storage area 91AKM 13 may include table data and a data file constituting the text display process table. The text display process table is used for display control processing in which the display content and display mode of the text image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 can be changed according to the elapsed time as the effect of the pachinko gaming machine 1 progresses. Be done. The display content of the text image is the content of the text image displayed corresponding to the text image data. The display mode of the text image is a mode and form when displaying the character image, including the display style and display layout of the text image. The table data and data files constituting the text display process table may be stored in the storage area 91AKM02 as display control management data.

The storage area 91AKM14 stores voice-related data including voice data and related data. The audio data stored in the storage area 91AKM14 can be reproduced and output as the pachinko game machine 1 progresses, unlike the audio that is reproduced and output in synchronization with the image in the effect of moving image display. Anything that does. The voice-related data stored in the storage area 91AKM14 may include table data and a data file constituting the voice output process table. The voice output process table is used for voice control processing in which the sound effects such as sound effects and music output from the speakers 8L and 8R can be changed according to the elapsed time as the production of the pachinko gaming machine 1 progresses. The table data and data files constituting the audio output process table may be stored in the storage area 91AKM01 as the effect control management data.

In the VDP91AK132 of the effect control microprocessor 91AK100, the moving image data read from the storage area 91AKM11 is input to the demultiplexer 91AK142 and separated into video data and audio data. The video data is input to the video decoder 91AK143, and the audio data is input to the audio decoder 91AK151 of the audio processing circuit 91AK133. The video decoder 91AK143 decompresses and decodes the compressed and encoded video data and supplies it to the moving image renderer 91AK144. The moving image renderer 91AK144 executes, for example, conversion processing of video data according to a display mode including a display style and a display layout of a moving image, and writes and stores the converted data in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. In this way, the display of the moving image is controlled by using the moving image data which is the stored data of the storage area 91AKM11.

In the VDP91AK132 of the effect control microprocessor 91AK100, the text image data read from the storage area 91AKM13 is input to the text image renderer 91AK146. When the text image data is compressed and encoded, it may be decompressed and decoded by the video decoder 91AK143 and then input to the text image renderer 91AK146. The text image renderer 91AK146 executes, for example, a conversion process of text image data according to a display mode including a display style and a display layout of a text image, and writes and stores the converted data in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. In this way, the display of the text image is controlled by using the text image data which is the storage data of the storage area 91AKM13.

FIG. 8-3 shows an example of determining the moving image data and the text display process table according to the content of the reach effect. In the reach effect of super reach such as SP reach A and SP reach B, it is possible to execute an effect by displaying a moving image using moving image data and an effect by displaying a text image using text image data. The period in which the effect of displaying the moving image is executed and the period in which the effect of displaying the text image is executed may be partly or wholly the same period or may include different periods. The text display process table is a table in which process data used for display control is set when displaying a text image in which a plurality of character images are combined, for example.

In the determination example shown in FIG. 8-3, the moving image data is determined to be one of 91AKD01, 91AKD02, 91AKD11, and 91AKD12 according to the reach effect content, and is determined to be one of the text display process tables 91AKT01, 91AKT02, 91AKT11, and 91AKT12. Will be done. Of these, the moving image data is determined in a one-to-one correspondence with the reach effect content. For example, when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)", the moving image data 91AKD01 is determined. When the reach effect content is "SP reach B (big hit)", the moving image data 91AKD02 is determined. When the reach effect content is "SP reach A (loss)", the moving image data 91AKD11 is determined. When the reach effect content is "SP reach B (loss)", the moving image data 91AKD12 is determined. On the other hand, in the text display process table, there are cases where it is possible to determine in common even with different reach effect contents, and there are cases where it cannot be determined. For example, when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT01 is 30/100, and the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT02 is 70/100. When the reach effect content is "SP reach B (big hit)", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT11 is 20/100, and the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT12 is 80/100. When the reach effect content is "SP reach A (loss)", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT01 is 80/100, and the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT02 is 20/100. When the reach effect content is "SP reach B (loss)", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT11 is 70/100, and the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT12 is 30/100.

The text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 can be determined when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)" or "SP reach A (loss)", and the reach effect content is "SP reach B (big hit)" or. In the case of "SP reach B (loss)", it cannot be determined. The text display process tables 91AKT11 and 91AKT12 can be determined when the reach effect content is "SP reach B (big hit)" or "SP reach B (loss)", and the reach effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)" or. In the case of "SP reach A (loss)", it cannot be determined. As described above, the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 are used to control the display of the text image when the reach effect of the SP reach A is executed. The text display process tables 91AKT11 and 91AKT12 are used to control the display of the text image when the reach effect of SP reach B is executed.

When the reach effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)", the effect by moving image display using the moving image data 91AKD01 is executed, and when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (loss)", the moving image is executed. An effect by displaying a moving image using the data 91AKD11 is executed. A text image using either the text display process table 91AKT01 or 91AKT02 is added to the moving image displayed using the moving image data 91AKD01 and the moving image displayed using the moving image data 91AKD11. It can be displayed. When the reach effect content is "SP reach B (big hit)", the effect by moving image display using the moving image data 91AKD02 is executed, and when the reach effect content is "SP reach B (loss)", the moving image is executed. An effect by displaying a moving image using the data 91AKD12 is executed. A text image using either the text display process table 91AKT11 or 91AKT12 is added to the moving image displayed using the moving image data 91AKD02 and the moving image displayed using the moving image data 91AKD12. It can be displayed. Therefore, it is possible to add and display a text image using a common text display process table to a plurality of moving images displayed using different moving image data.

FIG. 8-4 shows a configuration example of the text display process table. Of these, FIG. 8-4 (A1) shows a configuration example of the text display process table 91AKT01 that can be used corresponding to the reach effect of SP reach A, and FIG. 8-4 (A2) shows the reach of SP reach A. A configuration example of the text display process table 91AKT02 that can be used in response to the effect is shown. FIG. 8-4 (B) shows a configuration example of the text display process table 91AKT11 that can be used in response to the reach effect of SP reach B.

In each text display process table, text image designation information and text display setting information are set in association with each other in a plurality of text display periods. The text display process table may include a text image designation information and a text display setting information set in association with each other in a single text display period. For the text display period, a start time for starting the display and an end time for ending the display are specified for each text image to be displayed. The start time and end time in the text display period may be specified by using the elapsed time from the start of displaying the moving image in the reach effect, or by using the elapsed time from the start of the variable display. You may. However, if the display content of the text image is highly related to the display content of the moving image, the start time and end time in the text display period will be used using the elapsed time from the start of the display of the moving image. It is desirable to specify. Since the elapsed time from the start of the variable display includes, for example, the elapsed time before the variable display becomes the reach mode, the moving image even if it is a common reach effect due to the variable display effect before the variable display becomes the reach mode. The timing at which the display of is started may be different. Even in such a case, if the start time and end time in the text display period are specified by using the elapsed time from the start of displaying the moving image, the timing at which the specific image in the moving image is displayed and the timing. The timing at which a specific text image is displayed can be easily synchronized, and the interlocking between the display of the moving image and the display of the text image can be enhanced. The text image designation information specifies the text image data used for displaying the text image so as to be identifiable. For example, the text image designation information may be any information that specifies the storage address, read address, data size, etc. of the text image data in the storage area 91AKM13. Alternatively, the text image specification information uses an arbitrary character code such as ASCII code, UNICODE (UTF-16 or UTF-8, etc.), JIS code (Shift_JIS code, etc.), and the content of the text image to be displayed. May be the information that identifies. The text display setting information is information that specifies that the display mode of the text image can be set by the display style information, the display layout information, other metadata, and the like of the text image to be displayed. The text display process table may be described using a predetermined markup language such as TTML (Timed Text Markup Language). In addition, the text display process table may be set as long as the text image designation information and the text display setting information can be set in association with each other during the text display period by using arbitrary table data.

FIG. 8-5 shows an example of display control of a text image using a text display process table. Of these, FIG. 8-5 (A1) shows an example of display control in the case of the text display process table 91AKT01, and FIG. 8-5 (A2) shows an example of display control in the case of the text display process table 91AKT02. .. FIG. 8-5 (B) shows a display control example in the case of the text display process table 91AKT11. In these display control examples, when the reach effect of SP reach A is executed, the display of the moving image is started at the timing T00, and when the reach effect of SP reach B is executed, the timing T10 is used. At some point, the display of the moving image is started.

In the case of the text display process table 91AKT01 shown in FIG. 8-4 (A1), as shown in FIG. 8-5 (A1), the text image designation information 91AKA01 during the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05. Display the text image specified by. Further, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed in the text display period from the timing T02 to the timing T03, and the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA03 in the text display period from the timing T04 to the timing T05. Is displayed. The timings T02 to T04 are all included in the period from the timing T01 to the timing T05. After the timing T05 has elapsed, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA04 is displayed in the text display period from the timing T06 to the timing T08, and the text image designation information 91AKA05 is displayed in the text display period from the timing T07 to the timing T09. Display the text image specified by. The timing T08 is a timing that arrives after the timing T07.

In the case of the text display process table 91AKT02 shown in FIG. 8-4 (A2), as shown in FIG. 8-5 (A2), the text image designation information 91AKA01 during the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05. Display the text image specified by. Further, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed in the text display period from the timing T02 to the timing T03, and the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 in the text display period from the timing T04 to the timing T05. Is displayed. After the timing T05 has elapsed, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA14 is displayed in the text display period from the timing T06 to the timing T08, and the text image designation information 91AKA05 is displayed in the text display period from the timing T07 to the timing T09. Display the text image specified by.

In this way, the text image designated by the text image designation information can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 corresponding to the plurality of text display periods set by the text display process table. The first text display period included in the plurality of text display periods may include a second text display period different from the first text display period and a period partially or wholly in common. For example, in the text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02, in the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, the second text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, and the second text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. It is set to include 3 text display periods. In this case, a part of the first text display period is common to the second text display period, and a part of the other period is common to the third text display period. As described above, the first text display period includes a period partially common to the second text display period, and includes a period partially common to the third text display period. On the other hand, in the second text display period, the entire period is common to the first text display period, and in the third text display period, the entire period is common to the first text display period. As described above, the second text display period includes the entire period in the first text display period, and the third text display period includes the entire period in the first text display period. Further, the text display period from timing T06 to timing T08 and the text display period from timing T07 to timing T09 include a period in which a part is common to each other. As described above, the first text display period may include a part of the second text display period, and the second text display period may include a part of the first text display period. Alternatively, the first text display period may include the entire period in the second text display period, and the second text display period may include the entire period in the first text display period.

By setting in the text display process table, different text images specified by the text image designation information can be displayed according to a plurality of text display periods. This makes it possible to change the first component related to the display content of the text image among the plurality of components in the display of the text image during the display period of the text image added to the moving image according to the elapsed time. become. For example, according to the settings in the text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed in the first text display period from the timing T01 to the timing T05. As the second text display period included in the first text display period, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed in the text display period from the timing T02 to the timing T03. After the second text display period ends at the timing T03, as the third text display period included in the first text display period, in the text display period from the timing T04 to the timing T05, the text image designation information 91AKA03 or the text The text image designated by the image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed. With such a setting, only the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed in the period from timing T01 to timing T02 and the period from timing T03 to timing T04 in the first text display period. .. On the other hand, in the period from timing T02 to timing T03, which is common to the second text display period, in the first text display period, the text image is designated for the display of the first text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01. The display of the text image is changed so that the display of the second text image specified by the information 91AKA02 is added. On the other hand, in the period from the timing T04 to the timing T05, which is common to the third text display period, in the first text display period, the text image designation information is displayed on the display of the first text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01. The display of the text image is changed so that the display of the third text image designated by 91AKA03 or the display of the fourth text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 is added. In this case, the display of the text image added to the display of the first text image is such that either the third text image or the fourth text image is displayed depending on the determination result of the text display process table. It will be possible to change.

In the text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image specified by the common text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed in the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, and the text from timing T02 to timing T03 is displayed. The text image designated by the common text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed during the display period. On the other hand, in the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA03 is displayed in the case of the text display process table 91AKT01, and the text is displayed in the case of the text display process table 91AKT02. Image designation information 91 The text image designated by AKA13 is displayed. The text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02 can be determined corresponding to the common moving image data 91AKD01 and 91AKD11. Therefore, even when a moving image using common moving image data is displayed, the text image to be displayed is different in at least a part of a plurality of text display periods, so that the text image can be displayed. The components can be changed. When a moving image using common moving image data is displayed, the text image to be displayed may be different in the entire plurality of text display periods according to the determination result of the text display process table. good. When a moving image using common moving image data is displayed, if the start time, end time, and part or all of the period length are different for multiple text display periods, depending on the determination result of the text display process table. You may let me. In this way, a part or all of the display period for displaying the text image added to the moving image of 1 may be changed, or a part or all of the text image added to the moving image of 1 can be changed. May be.

In the case of the text display process table 91AKT11 shown in FIG. 8-4 (B), as shown in FIG. 8-5 (B), the text image designation information 91AKA21 is displayed during the text display period from timing T11 to timing T15. Display the text image specified by. Further, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA22 is displayed in the text display period from the timing T11 to the timing T12, and the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA23 in the text display period from the timing T13 to the timing T14. Is displayed. The timings T12 to T14 are all included in the period from the timing T11 to the timing T15. After the timing T15 has elapsed, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA24 is displayed in the text display period from the timing T16 to the timing T17, and the text image designation information 91AKA25 is displayed in the text display period from the timing T18 to the timing T19. Display the text image specified by.

FIG. 8-6 shows a specific example of the text display setting information. The text display setting information is configured to include data corresponding to a plurality of fields such as origin, fontFamily, fontSize, fontWeight, color, backgroundColor, fontStyle, textAlign, and textDecoration. The origin field can set the origin coordinates when displaying a text image. In the fontFamily field, the font family that is the font type can be set for the font of the characters included in the text image. In the fontSize field, you can set the font size that is the size to display the text image. The fontWeight field allows you to set the thickness of the characters contained in the text image. In the color field, the display color of the characters included in the text image can be set. The backgroundColor field can set the display color of the background in the text image. The fontStyle field allows you to set the style of characters in text images such as standard, italic, or italic. The textAlign field allows you to set the alignment of characters contained in a text image, such as right-justified, centered, and left-justified. The textDecoration field can be set to display decorations added to the text image, such as underlines, overlines, strikethroughs, and other effect images. In this way, the text display setting information makes it possible to set the display mode of the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image.

FIG. 8-6 (A) shows a configuration example of the text display setting information 91AKB01. FIG. 8-6 (B) shows a configuration example of the text display setting information 91AKB02. FIG. 8-6 (C1) shows a configuration example of the text display setting information 91AKB03. FIG. 8-6 (C2) shows a configuration example of the text display setting information 91AKB13. The text display setting information 91AKB01 is included in the text display process tables 91AKT01, 91AKT02, and 91AKT11. The text display setting information 91AKB02 is included in the text display process tables 91AKT01, 91AKT02, and 91AKT11. The text display setting information 91AKB03 is included in the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT11, but is not included in the text display process table 91AKT02. The text display setting information 91AKB13 is included in the text display process table 91AKT02, but is not included in the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT11.

In the plurality of text display periods set by the text display process table, the text image specified by the text image designation information is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 with the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information. Can be displayed on. This makes it possible to change the second component related to the display mode of the text image among the plurality of components in the display of the text image during the display period of the text image added to the moving image according to the elapsed time. become. For example, according to the settings in the text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 in the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05. It is displayed with the displayed display style and display layout. As the second text display period included in the first text display period, in the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA02 was set by the text display setting information 91AKAB02. It is displayed in the display style and display layout. After the second text display period ends at the timing T03, the text display period from the timing T04 to the timing T05 is designated by the text image designation information 91AKA03 as the third text display period included in the first text display period. When the text image is displayed with the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKA3, and when the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA13 is displayed with the text display setting information 91AKA13. Or may be displayed in the display layout. With such a setting, in the period from timing T01 to timing T02 and the period from timing T03 to timing T04 in the first text display period, only the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed as text. It is displayed in the display style and display layout set by the setting information 91AKB01. On the other hand, in the period from timing T02 to timing T03, which is common to the second text display period, in the first text display period, the text image is added to the display of the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA01. The display of the text image is changed so that the text image specified by the designated information 91AKA02 is displayed in the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKA02. On the other hand, in the period from timing T04 to timing T05, which is common to the third text display period, in the first text display period, the text image is designated by being added to the display of the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA01. When the text image specified by the information 91AKA03 is displayed in the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKA3, and the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA13 is displayed by the text display setting information 91AKAB13. The display of the text image is changed so that it may be displayed with the displayed display style and display layout.

In the second text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is different from the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKAB01, and the text display setting information 91AKAB02 It can be displayed with the display style and display layout set by. In the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA03 is different from the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKAB01, and the text display setting information 91AKAB03 It may be displayed with the display style and display layout set by. Alternatively, in the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA13 is set to display the text, unlike the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKAB01. It may be displayed in the display style and display layout set by the information 91AKB13. As described above, in the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, which is common to the second text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is used. In addition to displaying in one display mode, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 can be changed to a second display mode different from the first display mode and displayed. Of the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, in the period common to the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed in the first display mode. In addition to displaying, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA03 may be changed to a third display mode different from the first display mode and the second display mode and displayed. Alternatively, in the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, which is common to the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is first displayed. In addition to displaying in a mode, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 may be changed to a fourth display mode different from the first to third display modes and displayed. Therefore, during the display period of the text image added to the moving image, a part of the text image can be changed to a display mode different from that of the other text images and displayed. Further, after displaying the text image of the second display mode together with the text image of the first display mode, the text image of the second display mode is changed to the text image of the third display mode and displayed, and the second display. The display mode of the text image can be changed and displayed so that the text image of the mode may be changed to the text image of the fourth display mode and displayed.

In the text display process table 91AKT01 shown in FIG. 8-4 (A1) and the text display process table 91AKT02 shown in FIG. 8-4 (A2), a text image is displayed in the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05. The text image designated by the designated information 91AKA01 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKA01. Further, in the text display period from the timing T02 to the timing T03, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKA02. As a result, a common text image can be displayed in a common display mode. On the other hand, in the text display process table 91AKT01, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA03 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB03 in accordance with the text display period from the timing T04 to the timing T05. Display it. In the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB13 in accordance with the text display period from the timing T04 to the timing T05. Thereby, different text images can be displayed in different display modes. On the other hand, in the text display process table 91AKT11, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA21 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 in accordance with the text display period from the timing T11 to the timing T15. Display. Further, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA22 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKAB02 corresponding to the text display period from the timing T11 to the timing T12. In this case, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA21 can be displayed in the same display mode as the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01. Further, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA22 can be displayed in the same display mode as the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02. In this way, even different text images added to different moving images may be displayed in a common display mode according to the setting data based on the common text display setting information. Alternatively, in the text display process table 91AKT01, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA05 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB05 corresponding to the text display period from the timing T07 to the timing T09. Let me. In the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA05 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB15 corresponding to the text display period from the timing T07 to the timing T09. In this way, even a common text image may be displayed in a different display mode depending on the text display setting information.

In the text display process table, text image designation information and text display setting information are set in association with each other in a plurality of text display periods. Further, in a plurality of text display process tables, at least a part of the text image designation information and the text display setting information set in association with the plurality of text display periods can be set as common information. , Part or all of the information can be set as different information. With these settings, the first component and the second component related to the text image, such as the display content and display mode of the text image, can be individually changed and displayed.

In the text display setting information 91AKB01 shown in FIG. 8-6 (A), the display color of the text image is set to change stepwise from # FF0040 to # 4000FF by the color field. The text display process table 91AKT01 shown in FIG. 8-4 (A1) and the text display process table 91AKT02 shown in FIG. 8-4 (A2) display text in the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05. The text image of the display mode set by the setting information 91AKB01 is displayed. In the text display process table 91AKT11 shown in FIG. 8-4 (B), the text image of the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 is displayed in the text display period from the timing T11 to the timing T15. In these cases, when the text image of the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 is displayed as a text image corresponding to the display content that is the common first component in the corresponding text display period, The display mode, which is the second component of the text image, such as the display color of the text image, can be changed according to the elapsed time. For example, the display color of the text image set by the color field may be changed depending on the reach effect content or the like even when the same text image is specified by the text image designation information. .. In this case, whether or not to change the display color of the text image at a different rate depending on whether or not it is controlled in an advantageous state, for example, whether or not the display result of the variable display is a "big hit". It may be determined, or it may be determined to be one of a plurality of display colors. Further, for example, the display color of the text image set by the color field is changed according to the execution result of the effect control program by the CPU 91AK131 even when the same text image is specified by the text image designation information. It may be possible. In this case, the VDP91AK132 may change the display color of the text image set by the color field to a different display color based on the display control command from the CPU91AK131, the register setting, and the like. In this way, the display mode such as the display style of the text image can be changed by simply changing a part of the data related to the text image included in the text display process table, so that the increase in data capacity and the increase in processing load can be prevented. , Various text images can be displayed. When changing the display color of the text image, other display styles may be changed accordingly. For example, when the display color of the text image is white, the display of the text image is easy for the player to see, and when the display color of the text image is red, the display of the text image is difficult for the player to recognize. Tend. Therefore, when the display color of the text image is changed to red, the text image set by, for example, the fontSize field is displayed so that the font size is larger than that when the display color of the text image is white. The size may be changed. As a specific example, a text image displayed with a font size of 10.5px when the display color is white is displayed with a font size of 11px when the display color is changed to red. It would be nice if it could be changed to. This makes it possible to display a text image that is easy for the player to see while suppressing the player's discomfort in displaying the text image.

FIG. 8-7 shows an execution example of an effect in which a text image is displayed using the text display process table. In this execution example, the text image is displayed according to a plurality of text display periods in accordance with the moving image display when the reach effect of SP reach A is executed. In the reach effect of SP reach A, when the display result of the variable display is "big hit", the moving image is displayed using the moving image data 91AKD01, and when the display result of the variable display is "missing", the moving image is displayed. A moving image is displayed using the data 91AKD11. In the moving image display using the moving image data 91AKD01 and the moving image display using the moving image data 91AKD11, a production display that is a battle effect in which a common ally character and an enemy character compete with each other is performed. Until the timing of notification, the contents of the common effect display may be used. Further, when the display result of the variable display is "big hit", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT02 is high, and when the display result of the variable display is "missing", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT01 is high. Will be higher. Therefore, in the reach effect of SP Reach A, even during the moving image display period, which is the content of the common effect display, the jackpot expectation is different depending on the display content of the text image according to the text display process table. Can be done.

The effect execution example 91AKAD11 shown in FIG. 8-7 (A) is an effect content common to the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02, and corresponds to the text display period from the timing T01 to the timing T05, and the text image designation information 91AKA01. The text image specified by is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. In this case, the text image indicating the reach name "SP reach A" specified by the text image designation information 91AKA01 has, for example, the origin coordinates (300, 30) as the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKAB01. A typeface whose font family is classified as AA_gothic in Gothic typeface, font size is 48px, character thickness is bold corresponding to bold, and text image display color gradually changes from # FF0040 to # 4000FF. The components in the text image display are controlled so that the background display color is # CCF0F0, the font style is italic or italic corresponding to italic, the font alignment is centered, and the font decoration is unset. In the effect control microprocessor 91AK100, if the text image renderer 91AK146 of the VDP91AK132 executes an image conversion process for displaying a text image in a display mode including a display style and a display layout specified by the text display designation information. good.

Further, in the effect execution example 91AKD11 shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 corresponds to the text display period from the timing T02 to the timing T03, and the text image is the text display setting information 91AKAB02. It is displayed in the display mode set by. In this case, the text image indicating the line "If this character wins ..." specified by the text image designation information 91AKA02 has a display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKA02, for example, the origin coordinate is (250,600). ), Font family is BB_mincho, a typeface classified as Mincho typeface, font size is 36px, normal line width corresponding to normal character thickness, text image display color is #FFFFFF, background display color is # 220C0C , The components in the display of the text image are controlled so that the normal font corresponding to the normal character style, the character arrangement is left-justified, and the character decoration is not set.

The effect execution example 91AKD21 shown in FIG. 8-7 (B1) includes an effect content different from that of the text display process table 91AKT02 when the text display process table 91AKT01 is used, and during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. Correspondingly, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA03 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKA03. In this case, the text image indicating the line "chance !!" specified by the text image designation information 91AKA03 has, for example, the origin coordinate (250,600) and the font family as the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKAB03. Typeface classified into Gothic typeface called CC_gothic, font size is 60px, normal line width corresponding to normal character thickness, text image display color is # 000000, background display color is #FFFFFF, character style is normal The components in the text image are controlled so that the corresponding normal font, character placement is centered, and character decoration is unset. This text image has the same origin coordinates and character decoration as the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA02, and has a font family, font size, character thickness, text image display color, and background display. The color, character style, and character arrangement have been changed. In this way, when the text image specified by the text image designation information is displayed, a part of the data corresponding to the plurality of fields included in the text display setting information may be changed and displayed. ..

The effect execution example 91AKD22 shown in FIG. 8-7 (B2) includes an effect content different from that of the text display process table 91AKT01 when the text display process table 91AKT02 is used, and during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. Correspondingly, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKA13. In this case, the text image indicating the line "super hot" specified by the text image designation information 91AKA13 has, for example, the origin coordinate (250,600) and the font family DD_mincho as the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKAB13. Typeface classified as Mincho typeface, font size is 72px, character thickness is bold corresponding to bold, text image display color is gold corresponding to "gold", background display color is # 000000, The components in the text image are controlled so that the character style is the normal typeface corresponding to normal, the character arrangement is the center, and the character decoration is the effect display setting for golden display by effect_gold. Compared with the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA02, this text image has only the origin coordinates in common, and the font family, font size, character thickness, text image display color, background display color, etc. The character style, character arrangement, and character decoration have been changed. In this way, when displaying the text image specified by the text image specification information, the data to be changed and the data not to be changed are individually set among the data corresponding to the plurality of fields included in the text display setting information. It may be possible. When this text image is compared with the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01, all the settings including the origin coordinates have been changed. In this way, when displaying the text image designated by the text image designation information, all of the data corresponding to the plurality of fields included in the text display setting information may be changed and displayed. When displaying the text image specified by the text image specification information, if 1 data is changed and displayed among the data corresponding to a plurality of fields included in the text display setting information, 1 data is displayed. Other data associated in advance may also be modified and displayed. For example, when the display color of the text image is changed to the gold color corresponding to "gold" and displayed, it is sufficient that the character decoration can be changed to the effect display setting for the gold color display by effect_gold and displayed.

As for the display color and background display color of the text image, for each display color of R (red), G (green), and B (blue), for example, the brightness (gradation) is any one of "0" to "255". It can be set in 256 steps so that it becomes a level. In the text display setting information, the field data constituting the color field and the backgroundColor field has a data format common to the field data constituting the color field and the backgroundColor field in the character display setting information used for displaying the character image, for example. I just need to be there. Further, the origin coordinates when displaying a text image can be set by a combination of the x-coordinate in the horizontal direction and the y-coordinate in the vertical direction on the screen of the image display device 5. In the text display setting information, the field data constituting the origin field may have a data format common to the field data constituting the origin field in, for example, the character display setting information. In this way, some or all of the field data included in the text display setting information is common data with the field data included in the setting information used for displaying the effect image different from the text image, such as the character display setting information. It may have a format. With such text display setting information, it is sufficient that the second component related to the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image, can be changed by using the information common to the effect image different from the text image. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load of changing the second component related to the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image.

The font family that can be set when displaying a text image is not set when displaying a character image. In the text display setting information, the field data constituting the fontFamily field may be any unique field data not included in the character display setting information. Further, instead of the font size that can be set when displaying a text image, the character size may be set when displaying a character image. In the text display setting information, the field data constituting the fontSize field corresponds to the field data constituting the characterSize field in the character display setting information, but may have a unique field format. In this way, some or all of the field data included in the text display setting information is different from the field data included in the setting information used for displaying the effect image different from the text image, such as the character display setting information. It may have a data format. With such text display setting information, it is possible to change the second component related to the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image, by using unique information that is not used in the effect image different from the text image. May be good. As a result, it is possible to flexibly change the second component related to the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image, to display various text images.

When, for example, a gold color corresponding to "gold" is set as the display color of the text image, the character decoration becomes the effect display setting for the gold color display by effect_gold. When "gold" is set by the color field in the text display setting information, effect_gold is set by the textDecoration field to display a glossy text image and display gold around the text image. It is possible to add an effect image for display. In the effect execution example 91AKD22 shown in FIG. 8-7 (B2), when a specific text image indicating a line of "super hot" is specified by the text image designation information 91A13, the text display setting information 91AKB13 is used for gold display. By setting the display style of, a specific text image showing the line "super hot" is displayed with gloss, and an effect image for gold display is displayed around the specific text image. .. As a result, it is possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the impression of the player on the display of the text image and to improve the interest of the effect by the text image display.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the effect of the moving image display using the moving image data is executed, the player can easily recognize the effect content by adding the effect of the text image display using the text image data. As a result, it becomes easier to provide information that is different from the content of the production. In this case, in the data configuration in which the text image data is compressed, encoded, and multiplexed as the video data included in the moving image data, the outline is displayed in the text image display using the text image data that has been decompressed and decoded and reproduced. May cause problems such as blurring and deterioration of display quality. Further, when different moving image data are prepared according to the display content of the text image display added to the moving image display, the data capacity of the moving image data tends to increase, and the processing load of the image data also increases. It will be easier. When a special compression coding process or decompression decoding process is executed in order to prevent deterioration of the display quality in the text image display, the processing load of the image data may further increase.

In the feature units 91AK and 92AK, when the effect of moving image display using the moving image data read from the storage area 91AKM11 is executed, the effect of displaying the text image using the text image data read from the storage area 91AKM13 is added. By doing so, it becomes possible to easily display various text images and execute them with high quality, and it becomes easy for the player to recognize the contents of the production. In addition, since the effect of displaying the text image using the text image data stored separately from the moving image data is added, the data capacity of the moving image data increases and the processing load of the image data increases. , Appropriate display control that can be prevented as much as possible becomes possible.

The text image display added to the moving image display using the moving image data is controlled by using the text display process table. Similarly, the moving image display is controlled using the moving image display process table, the character image display is controlled using the character display process table, and the audio output is controlled using the audio output process data. In the text display process table, text image designation information and text display setting information are set in association with each other in a plurality of text display periods. The text image designation information specifies the display content of the text image according to the text image data as the first component related to the text image. The text display setting information sets the display mode of the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image, as the second component related to the text image. In the VDP91AK132 of the microprocessor 91AK100 for effect control, for example, the text image renderer 91AK146 displays the text image specified by the text image designation information in a display mode including the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information. It is possible to execute image conversion processing for this purpose. As a result, in the display period of the text image added to the moving image 1, the display content of the text image as the first component and the display mode of the text image as the second component are changed according to the elapsed time and the like. Make it changeable. By making it possible to change the first component and the second component related to the text image added to the moving image of 1, various text images can be displayed easily and with high quality, and the data capacity and processing load can be increased. Appropriate display control is possible so that growth is prevented.

When the reach effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)", one of the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 was used when the effect by moving image display using the moving image data 91AKD01 was executed. It is possible to add a text image and display it. When the reach effect content is "SP reach A (loss)", one of the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 is used when the effect by moving image display using the moving image data 91AKD11 is executed. It is possible to add a text image and display it. Further, when the reach effect content is "SP reach B (big hit)", one of the text display process tables 91AKT11 and 91AKT12 is displayed when the effect by moving image display using the moving image data 91AKD02 is executed. The used text image can be added and displayed. When the reach effect content is "SP reach B (loss)", one of the text display process tables 91AKT11 and 91AKT12 is used when the effect by moving image display using the moving image data 91AKD12 is executed. It is possible to add a text image and display it. In this way, it is possible to add and display a text image using data related to a common text image, such as a common text display process table, to a plurality of moving images that are different from each other. By adding a text image using common data to multiple moving images and making it possible to display, various text images can be displayed easily and with high quality, and the increase in data capacity and processing load is prevented. Appropriate display control becomes possible.

In the text display process table 91AKT02, a plurality of text images indicating the line "super hot" are provided by the text image designation information 91AKA13 and the text display setting information 91AKB13 set in association with the text display period from the timing T04 to the timing T05. The display style and the like may be changed and displayed at the timing of. A text image showing the line "super hot" corresponds to a specific first component group, for example, a text image whose display content suggests that the display result of the variable display has a high rate of becoming a "big hit". It may be a text image. In this way, when displaying the specific text image corresponding to the specific first component group, the second component such as the display mode related to the specific text image may be changed at a plurality of timings.

FIG. 8-8 shows an example of display control when the display style of the text image showing the line "super hot" can be changed at a plurality of timings. In this display control example, in the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the display color is black and the character decoration is not set in the text display period from timing T04 to timing T041, and the text from timing T041 to timing T042 is set. In the display period, the display color is gold and the character decoration is not set, and in the text display period from timing T042 to timing T05, the display color is gold and the character decoration is the effect display setting for gold display. As the display style of the text image common to the text display period up to timing T04 and timing T05, the font family is classified into the Mincho typeface of DD_mincho by the fontFamily field, and the font size is 72px by the fontSize field. It is set.

FIG. 8-8 (A) shows a case where a text image with a line of "super hot" is displayed in the text display period from timing T04 to timing T041. As the display style of the text image in this text display period, the display color of the text image is set to black corresponding to # 000000 by the color field, and the character decoration is set to no setting corresponding to none by the textDecoration field. As a result, the display mode including the display style of the text image showing the line "super hot" is controlled so that the display color is black and the character decoration is not set.

FIG. 8-8 (B) shows a case where a text image with a line of "super hot" is displayed in the text display period from timing T041 to timing T042. As the display style of the text image in this text display period, the display color of the text image is set to gold corresponding to "gold" by the color field, and the character decoration is set to no setting corresponding to none by the textDecoration field. As a result, the display mode including the display style of the text image showing the line "super hot" is controlled so that the display color is gold and the character decoration is not set. When the display color of the text image is set to gold, a glossy text image can be displayed by, for example, a gradation display of the text image. However, if the display of the text image is only glossy, it may be difficult for the player to recognize the golden display.

FIG. 8-8 (C) shows a case where a text image with a line of "super hot" is displayed in the text display period from timing T042 to timing T05. As the display style of the text image in this text display period, the color field sets the display color of the text image to gold corresponding to "gold", and the textDecoration field sets the effect display setting for gold display corresponding to effect_gold. Will be done. As a result, the display mode including the display style of the text image showing the line "super hot" is controlled so that the display color is gold and the character decoration is the effect display setting for gold display. In addition to setting the display color of the text image to gold, if the text decoration of the text image is set to the effect display setting for gold display, in addition to the gradation display of the text image, for example, the border of the outline in the text image It is possible to add an effect image around the text image and display it by displaying the display color of or shadow, the boundary display by bevel or embossing, the layer style that adds brilliance, or a combination of some or all of them. As a result, in addition to the display of the text image having glossiness, by adding an effect image around the text image and displaying it, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the golden display, and the game for displaying the text image. It is possible to enhance the impression of a person.

In the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02, a part of the text image is separated from the other part by the text image designation information 91AKA02 and the text display setting information 91AKB02 set in association with the text display period from the timing T02 to the timing T03. It may be displayed in a different display style. The text image designation information 91AKA02 designates a text image of the line "If this character wins ...". The text display setting information 91AKB02 displays a part of the text image "character" in the text information indicating the line "If this character wins ..." with a display color and background display of the text image different from the other parts. You can set the color and character style.

FIG. 8-9 shows a display example in which a part of the text image has a display style different from that of the other parts. In this display example, a part of the text image "Character" is displayed so that the display color is white, the background display color is black, and the character style is italic, and the other part of the text image is displayed in black. Display so that the background display color is white and the character style is normal. In the text display setting information 91AKB02, the display color of the text image corresponds to #FFFFFF by the color field, and the background display color corresponds to black by the backgroundColor field, corresponding to a part of the text image called "character". The fontStyle field sets the italics whose character style corresponds to italic. Further, the text display setting information 91AKB02 corresponds to the other part of the text image, the display color of the text image is black corresponding to # 000000 by the color field, the background display color is white corresponding to #FFFFFF, and the fontStyle field is used. Set the normal font whose character style corresponds to normal. As a result, the player's impression of the display of the text image can be enhanced by displaying a part of the text image in a display style different from that of the other parts.

In the display of a text image constituting a character string in which a plurality of character images are combined, a part to be displayed in a display style different from other parts may be changed according to the progress of the effect by the moving image display. For example, when a musical piece is played or a dialogue is played back along with a moving image display, a part of the text image corresponding to the progress is displayed in a display style different from other parts such as a specific color display or a highlight display. You may let me. The display style may be changed so that a part of the text image is faded in or faded out according to the situation in which the performance of the music or the voice reproduction of the dialogue progresses. A part of the text image to be displayed in a display style different from other parts is changed according to the elapsed time in arbitrary production execution, not limited to the situation where the performance of the music or the voice reproduction of the dialogue progresses with the moving image display. It may be possible. As a result, in the display of the text image, the part to be displayed in a display style different from the other parts is changed according to the progress of the effect, so that the player's impression of the display of the text image can be enhanced.

The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 does not have to have all the technical features shown in the above embodiment, and is shown in the above embodiment so as to solve at least one problem in the prior art. It may have a part of the configuration.

As a specific example, in the display period of the text image added to the moving image 1, the display content of the text image as the first component, the display mode of the text image as the second component, the elapsed time, etc. One of the display control that can be changed according to the display and the display control that can be displayed by adding a text image using data related to a common text image to a plurality of moving images is executed. And the other may not be executed. As the first component and the second component related to the text image, any component may be changed with respect to the display content and display mode of the text image, for example. It is possible to change any component related to the display of the text image in place of part or all of the display content and display mode of the text image, or in addition to part or all of the display content and display mode of the text image. You may. For example, the time interval and movement width for updating the display position when moving and displaying a text image, the enlargement and reduction ratios when displaying a text image in an enlarged or reduced manner, and these enlargement and reduction ratios according to the elapsed time. It suffices if any component that can be set with respect to the display of the text image, such as the time interval for updating the enlargement ratio and the reduction ratio and the amount of change, can be changed.

When displaying a text image corresponding to a common display content, the one that changes the display mode of the text image is the text image set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 shown in FIG. 8-6 (A). It is not limited to those that change the display color, and any display style, display layout, and other display modes may be changed. For example, in the corresponding text display period, the text image of the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 is replaced with the display color of the text image, or in addition to the display color of the text image, the origin coordinates, the font family, and the like. Any display mode such as font size, character thickness, background display color, character style, character arrangement, decorative display, and a combination of some or all of these may be changed. The text image of the display mode set by the text display setting information different from the text display setting information 91AKB01 may be capable of changing the display mode different from the text image of the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. ..

The text image data is not limited to the data stored in the storage area 91AKM13 as data different from the moving image data, and at least a part of the text image data may be included in the moving image data. For example, text image data for displaying highly designed characters such as grass type and writing style is multiplexed or compressed and encoded as a part of the moving image data, and the video data separated from the moving image data is decompressed. A text image of a specific aspect may be displayed by decoding or the like. In this case, the data relating to the text image of the specific aspect is included in the moving image data and stored in the storage area 91AKM11. As described above, the data related to the text image includes the specific text image-related data included in the moving image data and stored in the storage area 91AKM11 and the normal text image-related data stored in the storage area 91AKM13. You may.

The text display setting information included in the text display process table is composed of field data corresponding to a part of origin, fontFamily, fontSize, fontWeight, color, backgroundColor, fontStyle, textAlign, and textDecoration as data corresponding to multiple fields. It may be configured to include field data different from these. For example, when the storage address, read address, data size, etc. of the text image data in the storage area 91AKM13 are specified by the text image designation information, the text image data stored in the storage area 91AKM13 is read out without using the font data. , The corresponding text image can be displayed. In this case, since the text display setting information does not require the field data related to the font setting, it may be configured without including the field data related to the font setting such as fontFamily, fontSize, fontWeight, and fontStyle. On the other hand, in this case, in order to set the display size of the text image, the text display setting information may be configured to include separate field data related to the text display setting, for example, textSize.

As the scalable font data such as the outline font data and the vector font data stored in the storage area 91AKM13, only the data corresponding to the text image used in the display effect in the pachinko game machine 1 may be prepared, for example, general-purpose Japan. Data corresponding to a text image, such as word font data, which is not limited to the text image used in the display effect in the pachinko game machine 1 may be prepared. When only the font data corresponding to the text image used in the display effect is stored in the storage area 91AKM13, it is possible to prevent an increase in the data capacity when the amount of the text image used in the display effect is small. When general-purpose font data corresponding to a text image not limited to the text image used in the display effect is stored in the storage area 91AKM13, the font data can be easily reused. It is possible to reduce the burden, and it is possible to prevent an increase in the data capacity when a large amount of text images are used in the display effect.

As the second component of the text image, the specific text image whose display mode including the display style and display layout of the text image can be changed at multiple timings is not limited to the text image showing the line "super hot". , Any text image preset as a specific text image corresponding to the specific first component group may be used. For example, among a plurality of types of text images, a text image prepared in advance for displaying the lyrics of a musical piece or a text image prepared in advance for displaying subtitles of a moving image may be used as a specific text image. In this way, a plurality of second components such as a display mode are provided for a specific text image corresponding to an audio effect or a display effect in which the effect content changes according to the elapsed time, such as a reproduction output of a musical piece or a reproduction display of a moving image. It may be changeable at the timing. Alternatively, a text image for which a specific display mode is set, such as a text image for rainbow display in which the display color of the text image is rainbow, or a text image for motif display in which the pattern or character decoration of the text image is a cherry blossom pattern. May be used as a specific text image. Alternatively, the text image of the display content suggesting that the display result of the variable display is not limited to the text image of the display content suggesting that the ratio of "big hit" is high, and suggesting that the ratio of being controlled to an arbitrary advantageous state is high. May be used as a specific text image. The advantageous state is not limited to the jackpot game state, and may include a special game state such as a time saving state or a probability change state. In addition, the maximum number of round games that can be executed in the jackpot game state is the number of first rounds (for example, "15") that is larger than the number of second rounds (for example, "7"), and it can be executed in a time-saving state. The upper limit of the variable display is the first number (for example, "100"), which is larger than the second number (for example, "50"), and the jackpot probability in the probability variation state is higher than the second probability (for example, 1/50). The number of consecutive chans, which is one probability (for example, 1/20) and the number of times that the jackpot game state is repeatedly controlled without being controlled in the normal state, is larger than the number of consecutive chans (for example, "5"). It may include a more favorable gaming situation for the player, such as part or all of the number of consecutive chans (eg, "10").

The glossy text image is not limited to the case where the display color of the text image is set to gold corresponding to "gold", for example, silver, copper, other metallic colors, or any color different from metallic colors. It may include the case where the display color of is set. The display color of the text image is not limited, and when displaying a preset specific text image, the specific text image may be displayed in a glossy display mode. When displaying an arbitrary text image with glossiness, the textDecoration field in the text display setting information should be set so that an effect image can be added around the text image and displayed. Just do it.

When the text image is displayed in rainbow, a plurality of display colors may be sequentially changed and displayed within a predetermined range such as the coordinates in characters and the display time in the display of the text image. For example, if the display color of the text image is set to the rainbow color corresponding to "rainbow" by the color field in the text display setting information, a different display color can be changed for each in-character coordinate of the text image. , Rainbow display should be possible. For example, in the in-character coordinates of 1, the display color is changed from red to orange, then green, then light blue, then blue, and then blue-purple to magenta, depending on the elapsed time. In addition, a plurality of display colors may be changed in sequence. At this time, in consideration of the fact that red is a color that gives a strong impression to the human eye and that the change in blue becomes dark, the brightness corresponding to each display color in the rainbow display is adjusted for each. The display colors in the in-character coordinates may be changed in the order of red, orange, yellow, green, water, blue, bluish purple, and magenta. After reddish purple, it is sufficient to return to red and change the display color. As a result, the player can smoothly and clearly recognize the change in the display color. In this way, when a special element is set as a character image component, such as when the display color of the text image is set to the rainbow color corresponding to "rainbow" by the color field in the text display setting information, the text display process Even if it is possible to display a text image in which multiple display colors are sequentially changed within the range of the intra-character coordinates and display time of the text image specified by the text image specification information corresponding to the text display period included in the table. good. As a result, it is possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the impression of the player on the display of the text image and to improve the interest of the effect by the text image display. The display of the text image may be displayed as a rainbow as a whole by sequentially changing different display colors according to the coordinates within the characters of the text image. Alternatively, the display of the text image may be changed to a rainbow display according to the elapsed time by sequentially changing the common display color for all the in-character coordinates. In this way, a text image in which a plurality of display colors are sequentially changed may be displayed within a predetermined range of either the in-character coordinates or the display time.

The first component and the second component related to the text image may be changed to different components depending on whether or not a specific motion of the player is detected, or a plurality of components may be changed at different ratios. It may be changed to either. The player's specific operation that makes it possible to change the first component and the second component related to the text image is, for example, a push operation or a pull operation on the operation rod of the stick controller 31A which is a V controller, and other operation rods of the stick controller 31A. It may be an arbitrary operation of tilting the push button 31b, or an operation of pressing the push button 31b. The movement of the player is not limited to what can be detected, and is based on the detection result of any change or difference in the detection target, for example, the execution state of processing or control in the detection target, the shape, pattern, or color change of the detection target. Therefore, the first component and the second component related to the text image may be changed. A detection device capable of detecting an operation, change, difference, etc. in a detection target can mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically change the state of the detection target, such as an infrared sensor, an ultrasonic sensor, a CCD sensor, or a CMOS sensor. Any configuration that can be detected may be used. Alternatively, the state of the detection target may be detected by analyzing the result of photographing the detection target using a predetermined camera (video type motion capture). As an example of detecting the state of the detection target using a camera, the screen display state of the mobile terminal may be detected, and the display content and display mode of the text image may be changed based on the detection result.

In the effect of displaying a text image using text image data, a part or all of the effect may be executed as a setting suggestion effect that can suggest a set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)", the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 may be determined at different ratios depending on the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In such a case, the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT01 is 35/100 (= 35%) if the set value is 1, and 30/100 (= 30%) if the set value is 2. Yes, if the set value is 3, it is 25/100 (= 25%), if the set value is 4, it is 20/100 (= 20%), and if the set value is 5, it is 15/100 (=). 15%), and if the set value is 6, it may be set to be 10/100 (= 10%). Correspondingly, the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT02 is 65/100 (= 65%) when the set value is 1, and 70/100 (= 70%) when the set value is 2. Yes, if the set value is 3, it is 75/100 (= 75%), if the set value is 4, it is 80/100 (= 80%), and if the set value is 5, it is 85/100 (=). 85%), and if the set value is 6, it may be set to 90/100 (= 90%). According to the setting of such a determination ratio, when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)", the effect of displaying the text image according to any of the text display process patterns 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 is executed. Is different depending on the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the effect of displaying the text image according to the text display process table 91AKT01 is likely to be executed, and as the set value increases, the text corresponding to the text display process table 91AKT02 is executed. The ratio of image display effects is increased. Therefore, when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)" and the effect by displaying the text image according to the text display process table 91AKT02 is executed, the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is advantageous for the player. Expectation is high, which is a setting value.

In addition, it may be possible to execute an arbitrary setting suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, in the case of a specific setting value, the setting suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate than in the case of a setting value other than the specific setting value. In this case, in the range where the set value is other than the specific set value, there is a limit as a limit that the execution rate of the setting suggestion effect is lower than the range where the set value is the specific set value. If it is a specific set value, it can be executed at a predetermined ratio, and if it is a set value other than the specific set value, a setting suggestion effect that is not executed may be provided. As described above, in the range where the set value is the specific set value, the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a predetermined ratio. On the other hand, in the range where the set value is other than the specific set value, there is a limit as a limit that the setting suggestion effect is not executed.

It may be possible to execute an arbitrary setting suggestion effect at different ratios depending on whether or not it is a special period. For example, in the case of a special period, the setting suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate than in the case of a period other than the special period. In this case, in the range other than the special period, there is a limit as a limit that the execution rate of the setting suggestion effect is lower than in the range of the special period. If it is a special period, it can be executed at a predetermined ratio, and if it is a period other than the special period, a setting suggestion effect that is not executed may be provided. In this way, within the range of the special period, the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a predetermined ratio. On the other hand, in the range other than the special period, there is a limit as a limit that the setting suggestion effect is not executed.

It is not limited to whether or not it is a special period, and it may be possible to execute an arbitrary setting suggestion effect at a different ratio depending on whether or not an arbitrary special condition is satisfied. For example, when the special condition is satisfied, the setting suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate than when the special condition is not satisfied. In this case, in the range where the special condition is not satisfied, there is a limit as a limit that the execution rate of the setting suggestion effect is lower than the range where the special condition is satisfied. If the special condition is satisfied, it can be executed at a predetermined ratio, and if the special condition is not satisfied, a setting suggestion effect that is not executed may be provided. In this way, within the range where the special condition is satisfied, the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a predetermined ratio. On the other hand, in the range where the special condition is not satisfied, there is a limit as a limit that the setting suggestion effect is not executed. The special condition may be any condition that can be satisfied according to the progress or history of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 or the result of the determination or determination of the game, or the progress or history or the effect of the effect in the pachinko game machine 1. It may be an arbitrary condition that can be satisfied according to the judgment or determination of. The effect is not limited to the setting suggestion effect, and any effect may be executed at a different ratio depending on whether or not a preset condition is satisfied, and whether such a condition is satisfied. The production mode may be determined at a different rate depending on whether or not such a condition is satisfied, or the execution timing may be determined at a different rate depending on whether or not such a condition is satisfied. .. In addition, any effect may be limited as a limit that a specific effect is not executed in the range where the preset restriction condition is satisfied, or compared with the range where the restriction condition is not satisfied. There may be a limit as a limit that the execution rate is lowered and it is difficult to be executed.

(Problem-solving means and effects of feature 91AK)
A game machine capable of executing a game, for example, a pachinko game machine 1, capable of executing a specific effect of displaying a moving image to which a character image such as a reach effect of SP reach A or SP reach B is added. For example, an effect execution means such as the effect control microprocessor 91AK100, a first storage area for storing data related to a moving image such as a storage area 91AKM11, and a second storage area for storing data related to a character image such as a storage area 91AKM13. And, the display of the moving image is controlled by using the storage data of the first storage area, for example, the moving image control means such as the video decoder 91AK143 and the moving image renderer 91AK144, and the storage data of the second storage area of the character image. A character image control means for controlling display, such as a video decoder 91AK143 and a text image renderer 91AK146, is provided, and the stored data in the second storage area is a first component such as a text image designated by text image designation information. And, for example, data on a plurality of character image components including a second component such as a display style set by text display setting information is included, and the character image control means is a character image added to one moving image. During the display period, the first component and the second component can be changed, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-7. As a result, various character image displays can be easily and with high quality, and appropriate display control can be performed so as to prevent an increase in data capacity and processing load.

As shown in FIG. 8-8, for example, the character image control means can change the second component related to the character image when displaying the character image corresponding to the common first component during the display period. May be good. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so that various character image displays are executed.

The character image control means uses information common to a specific image different from the character image, such as field data constituting the color field, to change the second component related to the character image, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-6. It may be possible. This makes it possible to control the display appropriately so as to reduce the processing load.

The character image control means can display a specific character image corresponding to a specific first component group, such as a text image indicating "super hot", and is related to the specific character image, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-8. The second component may be changed at a plurality of timings. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so that various character image displays are executed.

As shown in FIG. 8-4, for example, the character image control means may be able to individually change and display the first component and the second component related to the character image. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so that various character image displays are executed.

The storage data in the second storage area may include outline data that can be used for displaying a character image, such as outline font data. As a result, various character image displays can be easily and with high quality, and appropriate display control can be performed so as to prevent an increase in data capacity and processing load.

When a specific element is set as the character image component, for example, when the color field is "gold", as shown in FIG. 8-8, for example, a glossy character image is displayed and the character image is displayed. It may be possible to add an effect image to the surroundings and display it. As a result, it is possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the character image display and improve the interest of the effect by the character image display.

When a special element such as when the color field is "rainbow" is set as the character image component, for example, in a predetermined range such as the intra-character coordinates or the display time range, for example, red, orange, yellow, green, It may be possible to display a character image in which a plurality of display colors are sequentially changed, such as changing in the order of water, blue, bluish purple, and reddish purple. As a result, it is possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the character image display and improve the interest of the effect by the character image display.

(Problem-solving means and effects of feature 92AK)
A game machine capable of executing a game, for example, a pachinko game machine 1, capable of executing a specific effect of displaying a moving image to which a character image such as a reach effect of SP reach A or SP reach B is added. For example, an effect execution means such as the effect control microprocessor 91AK100, a first storage area for storing data related to a moving image such as a storage area 91AKM11, and a second storage area for storing data related to a character image such as a storage area 91AKM13. And, the display of the moving image is controlled by using the storage data of the first storage area, for example, the moving image control means such as the video decoder 91AK143 and the moving image renderer 91AK144, and the storage data of the second storage area of the character image. A character image control means for controlling display, such as a video decoder 91AK143 and a text image renderer 91AK146, is provided, and the stored data in the second storage area is a first component such as a text image designated by text image designation information. And, for example, data on a plurality of character image components including a second component such as a display style set by text display setting information is included, and the character image control means is, for example, a moving image using moving image data 91AKD01. For the first moving image of the above and the second moving image such as a moving image using the moving image data 91AKD11, which is different from the first moving image, for example, a text image according to the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02, etc. , It is possible to add and display a character image using data related to a common character image. As a result, various character image displays can be easily and with high quality, and appropriate display control can be performed so as to prevent an increase in data capacity and processing load.

As shown in FIG. 8-8, for example, when the character image control means displays the character image corresponding to the common first component in the display period of the character image added to the moving image of 1, the character image is displayed. The second component with respect to may be modifiable. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so that various character image displays are executed.

The character image control means uses information common to a specific image different from the character image, such as field data constituting the color field, to change the second component related to the character image, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-6. It may be possible. This makes it possible to control the display appropriately so as to reduce the processing load.

The character image control means can display a specific character image corresponding to a specific first component group, such as a text image indicating "super hot", and is related to the specific character image, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-8. The second component may be changed at a plurality of timings. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so that various character image displays are executed.

As shown in FIG. 8-4, for example, the character image control means may be able to individually change and display the first component and the second component related to the character image. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so that various character image displays are executed.

The storage data in the second storage area may include outline data that can be used for displaying a character image, such as outline font data. As a result, various character image displays can be easily and with high quality, and appropriate display control can be performed so as to prevent an increase in data capacity and processing load.

When a specific element is set as the character image component, for example, when the color field is "gold", as shown in FIG. 8-8, for example, a glossy character image is displayed and the character image is displayed. It may be possible to add an effect image to the surroundings and display it. As a result, it is possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the character image display and improve the interest of the effect by the character image display.

When a special element such as when the color field is "rainbow" is set as the character image component, for example, in a predetermined range such as the intra-character coordinates or the display time range, for example, red, orange, yellow, green, It may be possible to display a character image in which a plurality of display colors are sequentially changed, such as changing in the order of water, blue, bluish purple, and reddish purple. As a result, it is possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the character image display and improve the interest of the effect by the character image display.

(Explanation related to the association of feature parts)
The configuration relating to the feature portions 91AK and 92AK may be appropriately combined with a part or all of the configuration relating to the feature portion 60AK and the like. For example, the operation effect to be executed after the elapse of a predetermined period can be executed as the setting suggestion effect which is the operation effect of the suggestion effect mode, and the first component is in the display period of the character image added to the moving image of 1. And the second component may be changed, and for the first moving image and the second moving image different from the first moving image, a character image using data related to a common character image is used. It may be additionally displayable.

(Explanation of feature parts 01AK and 02AK)
FIG. 9-1 shows a configuration example 01AKP0 of the screen display in the image display device 5 with respect to the feature units 01AK and 02AK. In the configuration example 01AKP0, an active display area 01AKA1, a first hold display area 01AKB1, a second hold display area 01AKB2, and a small symbol display area 01AKC1 are provided on the screen of the image display device 5.

In the active display area 01AKA1, active display is performed by displaying an effect image corresponding to the variable display during execution. In the first hold display area 01AKB1, hold display is performed by displaying an effect image corresponding to the variable display in which execution is held, according to the number of first hold storages. In the second hold display area 01AKB2, hold display is performed by displaying an effect image corresponding to the variable display in which execution is held, according to the number of second hold storages. As described above, in the active display area 01AKA1, the first hold display area 01AKAB1, and the second hold display area 01AKAB2, active display or hold display that becomes a specific display based on the information related to the variable display is possible. The hold display in the first hold display area 01AKB1 is also referred to as "first hold display", and the hold display in the second hold display area 01AKB2 is also referred to as "second hold display".

In the first hold display area 01AKB1, for example, hold display associated with hold numbers "1", "2", "3", and "4" can be performed in order from the right end, and the first hold display is right-justified. It suffices if the display area is configured to be done. In the second hold display area 01AKB2, for example, hold display associated with hold numbers "1", "2", "3", and "4" can be performed in order from the left end, and the second hold display is left-justified. It suffices if the display area is configured to be done. In the active display area 01AKA1, the active display corresponding to the first hold display erased (digested) in the first hold display area 01AKAB1 is started in response to the start of the first special figure game, and the second special figure game Corresponding to the start, the active display corresponding to the second hold display erased (digested) in the second hold display area 01AKB2 is started. The active display that can be displayed in the active display area 01AKA1 may have the same color and pattern as the first hold display and the second hold display. For example, the active display is the same as the first hold display and the second hold display. The effect image of may be displayed larger than each hold display. The display mode of the active display may change to a display mode different from that of the first hold display or the second hold display by executing the active display change effect. Further, in the active display area 01AKA1, for example, by displaying an effect image showing the pedestal below the active display, the active display may be recognized separately from the first hold display and the second hold display.

A small symbol display area 01AKC1 is arranged at a predetermined position on the screen of the image display device 5. The small symbol display area 01AKC1 is smaller than the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right", and is provided at a predetermined position such as the right end on the screen of the image display device 5. ing. In the small symbol display area 01AKC1, the variable display of the small symbol is executed corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol. The effect image showing the small pattern is smaller than the identification information image which is the effect image showing the decorative pattern, and the variable display can be executed in a manner in which a part or all of the identification information image showing the decorative pattern is common. Any reduced identification information image may be used. For example, when the identification information image showing the decorative symbol includes a part showing a number and a part showing a character, the effect image showing the small symbol corresponds to the same symbol number as the part showing the number included in the decorative symbol. Since it is an image showing the numbers and does not include a part showing a character, it suffices if a small symbol can be displayed in a simpler manner than an effect image showing a decorative symbol. By displaying the small symbols in a simple manner in the small symbol display area 01AKC1, it is sufficient to prevent the display contents and display results of the small symbols from being misidentified by the player. In the small symbol display area 01AKC1 provided on the screen of the image display device 5, the small symbol as the reduced identification information is variably displayed, and the confirmed small symbol as the display result is derived. The effect image showing the small pattern may be displayed at a position where it can be visually recognized at all times.

FIG. 9-2 shows a configuration example of a drawing command for an effect. In this embodiment, commands 01AKG01 to 01AKG06 are prepared in advance as drawing commands for a plurality of effects. Command 01AKG01 is a drawing command in which color blending for blurring by bilinear sampling is instructed. Command 01AKG02 is a drawing command in which a color blend that inverts color information is instructed. The command 01AKG03 is a drawing command in which a color blend for blurring by changing the magnification is instructed. The command 01AKG04 is a drawing command in which a color blend for monochrome conversion is instructed. The command 01AKG05 is a drawing command in which a color blend for blurring by rotation is instructed. Command 01AKG06 is a drawing command instructed to change the offset amount of the image position.

The drawing command for the effect may be prepared as one drawing command or may be prepared as a display list. The display list is a command group for performing drawing control, and can be created by the CPU 91AK 131 as a command sequence in which a plurality of commands for the VDP 91AK 132 are combined. In VDP91AK132, the drawing process can be executed in the order described in the display list. The drawing command for an effect may be composed of a combination of commands for setting a plurality of types of inter-pixel calculation. For example, in a drawing command in which color blending is instructed, it may be possible to function as a drawing command for each effect by setting parameters according to the effect to be applied. For example, in the internal register of VDP91AK132, control data for specifying the calculation target included in the display list, numerical data for specifying parameters, and other register values are stored, and register values corresponding to execution commands are stored. Drawing according to the display list starts.

When color blending for blurring by bilinear sampling is executed in response to the command 01AKG01, a reduced image is generated by, for example, texture mapping of a bilinear interpolation method for image data. When generating this reduced image, a plurality of reduced images with different sampling point groups may be generated. Using the plurality of reduced images generated in this way, a composite reduced image is generated by executing a compositing process by color blending, for example, alpha blending. After that, by executing the enlargement processing of the combined reduced image, it is possible to draw the generated image by changing the color information included in the image data so as to obtain the blurred image.

When executing a color blend that inverts the color information in response to the command 01AKG02, for example, the RGB value, which is the color information of each pixel (1 pixel) shown in the image data, is set to the maximum value (for example, 255). Executes the difference calculation process of. For example, when the R value corresponding to "red" is "80", the color information can be inverted by obtaining 255-80 = 175. For the G value corresponding to "green" and the B value corresponding to "blue", the color information included in the image data is included in the image data so that the image becomes an inverted image by executing the same difference calculation process. Can be changed to draw the generated image.

When executing a color blend for blurring by changing the magnification in response to the command 01AKG03, for example, a plurality of enlarged images or reduced images are generated by scaling processing on the image data. At this time, a plurality of enlarged images or reduced images having different magnifications such as an enlargement ratio and a reduction ratio of the image are generated. For example, for an image having a display magnification of 100%, two types of enlarged images such as an image having a display magnification of 102% and an image having a display magnification of 104% are generated. Blur processing is performed by performing a composition process by color blending, for example, alpha blending, using the plurality of enlarged or reduced images generated in this way and the image (original image) corresponding to the original image data. It is possible to draw the generated image by changing the color information included in the image data so as to obtain the resulting image.

When executing a color blend for monochrome conversion in response to the command 01AKG04, for example, the monochrome conversion calculation process is executed for each pixel for the RGB value which is the color information of each pixel (1 pixel) shown in the image data. do. In the monochrome conversion calculation process, the color information can be changed so that the image becomes monochrome by substituting the RGB value into the calculation formula for color tone conversion. By executing the monochrome conversion calculation process in this way, it is possible to draw the generated image by changing the color information included in the image data so that the image is monochrome-converted.

When executing color blending for blurring by rotation corresponding to the command 01AKG05, for example, a plurality of rotated images are generated by rotation calculation processing on the image data. At this time, a plurality of rotated images having different rotation angles of the images are generated. For example, for an image having a rotation angle of 0 °, two types of rotation images such as an image having a rotation angle of 2 ° and an image having a rotation angle of 4 ° are generated. An image that has been blurred by performing a color blending composition process such as alpha blending using the plurality of rotated images generated in this way and the image (original image) corresponding to the original image data. It is possible to draw the generated image by changing the color information included in the image data so as to be.

When changing the offset amount of the image position corresponding to the command 01AKG06, the position information of the image is changed by, for example, a coordinate value conversion process for the image data. In the coordinate value conversion process, the position information when drawing an image, such as a UV coordinate value, is changed according to the offset amount set as a parameter. The UV coordinate value is given as a texture coordinate attribute value when mapping a texture to an object. By executing the coordinate value conversion process, it is possible to draw the generated image by changing the position information corresponding to the image data so that the image has a different texture arrangement.

As described above, the effect drawing command may include a command such as commands 01AKG01 to 01AKG05 that can draw the generated image by changing the color information included in the image data. Further, the drawing command for the effect may include a command such as command 01AKG06 that makes it possible to draw the generated image by changing the position information corresponding to the image data. In addition, the drawing command for the effect may include a command that makes it possible to draw the generated image by changing arbitrary attribute information related to the image data.

Unlike these effect drawing commands, the CPU 91AK131 can also generate normal display drawing commands. The normal display drawing command executes a process of drawing an image corresponding to the image data without changing the color information included in the image data by not executing the composition process by color blending.

FIG. 9-3 shows a configuration example of a screen display including various effect images that can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. The plurality of effect images displayed on the image display device 5 are divided into a plurality of display layers and drawn. Different display priorities are set in advance for the plurality of display layers as the display layer of the effect image. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 9-3, layers 01AKL1 to 01AKL5 are provided as a plurality of display layers. Of these, layer 01AKL1 is a display layer having the highest display priority, and an effect image or the like showing a small symbol in the small symbol display area 01AKC1 is drawn so as to be displayable. The layer 01AKL2 is a display layer having a display priority next to that of the layer 01AKL1, and draws an effect image corresponding to the hold display or the active display so as to be displayable. Further, the layer 01AKL2 may draw an effect image showing the pedestal below the active display so as to be displayable. The layer 01AKL3 is a display layer having a display priority next to that of the layer 01AKL2, and draws an effect image or the like used for a chance-up effect during reach so that it can be displayed. Layer 01AKL4 is a display layer having the next highest display priority after layer 01AKL3, and displays an effect image showing decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Draw as much as possible. The layer 01AKL5 is a display layer having the lowest display priority, and draws an effect image or the like as a background image so that it can be displayed.

The display layer on which a plurality of effect images are arranged is specified by, for example, display priority information included in the display list. In the display list, the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL5 is designated as the first drawing target, and then the effect image arranged on each display layer is specified as the drawing target in the order of layers 01AKL4, 01AKL3, 01AKL2, 01AKL1. May be good. Further, for example, in the image data of the effect images drawn on each layer 01AKL1 to 01AKL5, a Z value which is a depth value used when each effect image is superimposed and drawn may be set. By setting the Z value in the Z value setting table, the Z value of the effect image drawn on each layer 01AKL1 to 01AKL5 may be different depending on the drawing destination layer. For example, a display layer to which a small value is assigned as a Z value is arranged on the front side (front side) in the Z-axis direction as compared with a display layer to which a large value is assigned as a Z value, and the display priority of an image is high. You can do it like this.

The VDP91AK132 may determine the display priority by performing a Z value comparison operation when writing the image data read from the effect data memory 91AK123 or the like to the frame buffer provided in the VRAM91AK147 or the like. At this time, for example, the image data of the effect image having a small Z value is written to the frame buffer with priority over the image data of the effect image having a large Z value. As a result, the effect image drawn on the display layer to which the small value as the Z value is assigned has a higher display priority than the effect image drawn on the display layer to which the large value as the Z value is assigned, and is seen by the player. It can be placed on the front side (front side). On the other hand, the effect image drawn on the display layer to which a large value as the Z value is assigned has a lower display priority than the effect image drawn on the display layer to which the small value is assigned as the Z value. It can be placed on the back side (rear side). The relationship between the Z value and the display priority may be the opposite, and the display layer to which a large value is assigned as the Z value is Z more than the display layer to which the small value is assigned as the Z value. It may be arranged on the front side (front side) in the axial direction so that the display priority of the image is high.

In this way, the drawing process of the effect image according to the display layer is executed, and the display image 01AKD1 including the plurality of effect images is generated. The display image 01AKD1 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 after the images drawn on the layers 01AKL1 to 01AKL5 are superposed and combined as a plurality of display layers having different display priorities.

Of the layers 01AKL1 to 01AKL5, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2 are special layers, and the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 are specific layers. In the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 included in the specific layer, the effect image can be drawn and displayed by a drawing process different from the effect images drawn on the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2 included in the special layer.

FIG. 9-4 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect drawing composition processing executed by the VDP91AK132. The effect drawing composition process is executed when, for example, the display list including the effect drawing command is transferred based on the decoding result of the instruction code by the instruction decoder 91AK141 of VDP91AK132. When the effect drawing / compositing process is started, the image data to be processed for the effect is read out (step 01AKS01). For example, in the VDP 91AK 132, the image data to be processed is read from the effect data memory 91AK123 or the like, stored in the work area of the VRAM 91AK147 or the like, and temporarily stored. The data transfer circuit of VDP91AK132 reads the image data to be processed from the buffer area of the effect data memory 91AK123 or VRAM91AK147 by accessing the address of the image data specified by the drawing command, and transfers the image data to the work area of VRAM91AK147. And memorize it. As the image data to be processed by the effect, image data indicating an image to be drawn on any of layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which is a specific layer, is specified by a drawing command among a plurality of display layers.

After that, the effect color blend is executed according to the drawing command (step 01AKS02). For example, VDP91AK132 may execute any of the commands 01AKG01 to 01AKG05 by executing the inter-pixel arithmetic processing specified by the drawing command by a part or all of the moving image renderer 91AK144, the character image renderer 91AK145, and the text image renderer 91AK146. Color blending may be performed according to the above. In the case of the command 01AKG06, the coordinate value conversion process for changing the offset amount of the image position in the texture mapping may be executed.

After step 01AKS02, the images are combined and drawn corresponding to the low priority display layer (step 01AKS03). At this time, the image obtained by performing the effect color blending in step 01AKS02 is drawn in the frame buffer for screen display of VRAM91AK147. For example, the VDP 91AK 132 is drawn on the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 by executing the inter-pixel arithmetic processing specified by the drawing command by a part or all of the moving image renderer 91AK144, the character image renderer 91AK145, and the text image renderer 91AK146. The images may be stored in the frame buffer for screen display while being combined according to the display priority. As a result, the image drawn on any of layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which is a specific layer, can be drawn for screen display after changing the color information of the image data by executing the effect color blend. can.

After step 01AKS03, images are combined and drawn corresponding to the high priority display layer (step 01AKS04). For example, in the VDP 91AK 132, the image data to be drawn is read from the effect data memory 91AK123 or the like and drawn in the frame buffer for screen display of the VRAM 91AK147. An image in the low priority display layer has already been drawn in this frame buffer by step 01AKS03. The data transfer circuit of the VDP91AK132 reads the image data to be drawn from the effect data memory 91AK123, the buffer area of the VRAM91AK147, etc. by accessing the address of the image data specified by the drawing command, and uses the VRAM91AK147 for screen display. It may be transferred to the frame buffer and stored. At this time, the moving image renderer 91AK144, the character image renderer 91AK145, and the text image renderer 91AK146 are drawn on the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2 by executing the inter-pixel arithmetic processing specified by the drawing command, respectively. The images may be stored in the frame buffer for screen display while being combined according to the display priority. As the image data to be drawn in step 01AKS04, image data indicating an image to be drawn on any of layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, is specified by a drawing command by a drawing command. As a result, the image drawn on either of the special layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2 is drawn for screen display without executing the effect color blending and without changing the color information of the image data. Can be done.

As described above, the VDP 91AK 132 can execute the drawing process for displaying various images on the screen of the image display device 5 by using the image data stored in the predetermined area of the effect data memory 91AK123 or the VRAM 91AK147. Further, by executing the effect drawing composition process, on the other hand, it is possible to change the color information included in the image data and draw the image drawn on any one of the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 which is a specific layer. On the other hand, the image drawn on any of the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, can be drawn corresponding to the image data.

When the display list including the normal display drawing command is transferred without including the effect drawing command, the VDP91AK132 can execute the normal drawing composition process different from the effect drawing composition process. In the normal drawing composition process, the data transfer circuit of the VDP91AK132 reads the image data to be drawn from the effect data memory 91AK123, the buffer area of the VRAM91AK147, etc. by accessing the address of the image data specified by the drawing command, and causes the VRAM91AK147 to read the image data to be drawn. Then, it may be transferred to a frame buffer for screen display and stored. At this time, the moving image renderer 91AK144, the character image renderer 91AK145, and the text image renderer 91AK146 are drawn on the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2 by executing the inter-pixel arithmetic processing specified by the drawing command, respectively. The images may be stored in the frame buffer for screen display while being combined according to the display priority. In this case, the color information of the image data and the like of the image drawn on any of the special layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2 and the specific layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 are changed without executing the effect color blend. It can be drawn for screen display without.

FIG. 9-5 shows an execution example of image processing by the effect drawing composition processing. In this case, in the display list including the drawing command for the effect, as the image data to be processed by the effect, the image data 01AKD03 and the layer of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL3 among the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 included in the specific layer. The image data 01AKD04 of the effect image arranged on the 01AKL4 and the image data 01AKD05 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL5 are designated, respectively. When the VDP91AK132 reads out these image data in step 91AKS01 of the effect drawing / compositing process, the VDP91AK132 stores the image data in the subframe buffer 01AKF01 provided in the work area of the VRAM91AK147 or the like and temporarily stores the image data. As a result, as shown in FIG. 9-5 (A1), the image data 01AKD03 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL3, the image data 01AKD04 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL4, and the effect arranged on the layer 01AKL5. The image data 01AKD05 of the image is stored in the subframe buffer 01AKF01.

Subsequently, the VDP91AK132 executes an effect color blend on the image data stored in the subframe buffer 01AKF01 in step 91AKS02 of the effect drawing / compositing process. For example, when a color blend to be converted to monochrome is specified by the command 01AKG04 as a drawing command for an effect, the color information included in the image data is changed by executing the monochrome conversion calculation process. As a result, the color information of the image data 01AKD03 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL3 is changed so as to be the monochrome-converted image data 01AKD13 as shown in FIG. 9-5 (A2). The color information of the image data 01AKD04 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL4 is changed so as to be the monochrome-converted image data 01AKD14 as shown in FIG. 9-5 (A2). The color information of the image data 01AKD05 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL5 is changed so as to be the monochrome-converted image data 01AKD15 as shown in FIG. 9-5 (A2).

After that, the VDP91AK132 synthesizes an image corresponding to the display layer having a low priority by step 91AKS03 of the effect drawing composition processing. For example, the image data read from the subframe buffer 01AKF01 is written to the mainframe buffer 01AKF02 and stored in order from the display layer having the lowest display priority. At this time, the image data may be overwritten or the hidden surface may be erased according to the display priority. Of the image data 01AKD13 to 01AKD15 stored in the subframe buffer 01AKF01 shown in FIG. 9-5 (A2), the image data 01AKD15 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL5 is read first and written to the main frame buffer 01AKF02. Remember with. The image data 01AKD14 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL4 is read second, superimposed on the image data 01AKD15 stored in the mainframe buffer 01AKF02, and written and synthesized. The image data 01AKD13 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL3 is read out third, superimposed on the image data 01AKD14 and 01AKD15 stored in the mainframe buffer 01AKF02, and written and synthesized.

Then, the VDP91AKD132 synthesizes an image corresponding to the display layer having a high priority by the effect drawing composition processing step 91AKS04. At this time, for example, by a drawing command included in the display list, the image data 01AKD02 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL2 is first designated as the image data to be drawn among the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2 included in the special layer. , The image data 01AKD01 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL1 is designated next. Each time the VDP91AK132 reads out these image data, the VDP91AK132 writes and stores the image data in the mainframe buffer 01AKF02. That is, among the image data 01AKD01 and 01AKD02 to be drawn, the image data 01AKD02 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL2 is read first and superimposed on the image data 01AKD13 to 01AKD15 stored in the main frame buffer 01AKF02. Write and synthesize. The image data 01AKD01 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL1 is finally read out, superimposed on the image data 01AKD02 and 01AKD13 to 01AKD15 stored in the mainframe buffer 01AKF02, and written and synthesized.

In this way, the image data 01AKD03 to 01AKD05 temporarily stored in the subframe buffer 01AKF01 is converted into image data 01AKD13 to 01AKD15 whose color information is changed by the effect color blend, and the converted image data 01AKD13 to 01AKD15 has priority for display. The data is written to the main frame buffer 01AKF02 in the order according to the degree. After that, the image data 01AKD01 and 01AKD02 are written to the mainframe buffer 01AKF02 in the order according to the display priority without changing the color information by not executing the effect color blend. Therefore, in 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, various production images such as a background image, a production image showing a decorative pattern, and a production image for increasing the chance during reach are displayed by drawing by a specific drawing process such as an effect color blend. It is possible. On the other hand, in 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, drawing is performed by a normal drawing process that does not perform color blending for effects, and the effect image showing a hold display or an active display, an effect image showing a small pattern, and the like can be used for the progress of the game. It is possible to display a related predetermined image.

FIG. 9-6 shows an image display example by executing the effect drawing composition processing. The VDP91AK132 can display an effect image drawn by changing the color information included in the image data by executing the effect drawing composition process when the display list including the effect drawing command is transferred. ..

FIG. 9-6 (A) shows an image display example 01AKM01 in the case of monochrome conversion. When the display list including the command 01AKG04 is transferred as the effect drawing command, the effect image drawn by the monochrome conversion calculation process among the effect color blends is displayed on the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 which are the specific layers. It is possible. The monochrome conversion calculation process is a process for drawing with a smaller number of colors than the color information included in the image data. As a result, in the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are the specific layers of the image display example 01AKM01, the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 are drawn by a monochrome conversion calculation process or the like in which the number of colors is smaller than the color information included in the image data as the specific drawing process. It is possible to display a production image. In the image display example 01AKM01, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, can draw a predetermined image related to the progress of the game by drawing without changing the color information included in the image data by the normal drawing process.

FIG. 9-6 (B) shows an image display example 01AKM02 in the case of color information inversion. When the display list including the command 01AKG02 is transferred as the effect drawing command, the effect image drawn by the difference calculation process among the effect color blends can be displayed on the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 which are the specific layers. Is. The difference calculation process is a process for converting and drawing a value of color information included in image data so as to be inverted by the difference from the maximum value. As a result, in the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are the specific layers of the image display example 01AKM02, as the specific drawing process, the value of the color information included in the image data is converted and drawn by the difference calculation process or the like to draw the image for production. Can be displayed. In the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers of the image display example 01AKM02, a predetermined image relating to the progress of the game can be displayed by drawing without converting the value of the color information included in the image data by the normal drawing process.

In addition, when the display list including the command 01AKG01 is transferred as the drawing command for the effect, the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are the specific layers, are subjected to the compositing process of performing color blending for blurring by bilinear sampling as the specific drawing process. It is possible to display an effect image drawn by changing the color information included in the image data. In this case, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, may be drawn without changing the color information and the like included in the image data by the normal drawing process, and may be able to display a predetermined image relating to the progress of the game.

When the display list including the command 01AKG03 is transferred as the drawing command for the effect, the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are the specific layers, perform the image data by the compositing process of performing the color blending for blurring by changing the magnification as the specific drawing process. It is possible to display an effect image drawn by changing the color information included in. In this case, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, may be drawn without changing the color information and the like included in the image data by the normal drawing process, and may be able to display a predetermined image relating to the progress of the game.

When the display list including the command 01AKG05 is transferred as the drawing command for the effect, the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are the specific layers, are converted into the image data by the compositing process of performing the color blending for blurring by rotation as the specific drawing process. It is possible to display an effect image drawn by changing the included color information. In this case, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, may be drawn without changing the color information and the like included in the image data by the normal drawing process, and may be able to display a predetermined image relating to the progress of the game.

When the display list including the command 01AKG06 is transferred as the drawing command for the effect, the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are the specific layers, perform the image data by the coordinate value conversion process for changing the offset amount of the image position as the specific drawing process. It is possible to display an effect image drawn by changing the position information corresponding to. In this case, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, may be drawn without changing the position information corresponding to the image data by the normal drawing process, and may be able to display a predetermined image relating to the progress of the game.

By using these drawing commands for effects, the effect image drawn by changing the color information included in the image data and the effect image drawn by changing the position information corresponding to the image data can be displayed on a specific layer. Can be displayed. As a result, even if the production image is drawn using common image data, different image processing can be executed according to the effect drawing command, so that the color information or the position information is changed and drawn. Therefore, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game by executing various display effects while preventing the amount of image data from increasing.

FIG. 9-7 (A) shows an example of setting the jackpot reliability according to the reach effect content. The jackpot reliability for each reach effect is the ratio of the case where the variable display result becomes "big hit" and is controlled to the jackpot game state in the case where each reach effect is executed. In this setting example, the jackpot reliability is set to be different depending on the reach effects of a plurality of types of super reach such as SP reach A1 to A3 or SP reach B. For example, in the variable display pattern determination table, the rate at which the variable display result becomes a "big hit" is set to be different according to a plurality of types of reach effects by assigning a determination value to be compared with a random value for determining the variable display pattern. I just need to be there.

SP reach A1 to A3 are reach productions of super reach having a lower jackpot reliability than SP reach B, and are also called "weak SP reach". SP reach B is a reach production of super reach with higher jackpot reliability than SP reach A1 to A3, and is also called "strong SP reach". For example, the jackpot reliability of SP reach A1 is 20%, the jackpot reliability of SP reach A2 is 25%, the jackpot reliability of SP reach A3 is 30%, and the jackpot reliability of SP reach B is 80%. Is. Therefore, when the reach effect of SP reach A1 is executed, the variable display result becomes a "big hit" only once in five times. On the other hand, when the reach effect of SP reach B is executed, the variable display result becomes a "big hit" about 4 times out of 5 times. In the case of SP reach A1 to A3, the reach effect content may include an effect mode in which a part of the reach can recognize the commonality. For example, in the SP reach A1 to A3, moving images common to each other may be reproduced and displayed as background images. Alternatively, in SP reach A1 to A3, a common character image may be displayed as an animation. The reach effect content may include an effect mode in which the difference between the SP reach B and the SP reach A1 to A3 can be recognized. For example, in SP reach B, a moving image different from SP reach A1 to A3 may be reproduced and displayed as a background image. Alternatively, in SP reach B, a character image different from SP reach A1 to A3 may be displayed as an animation. The reach effect content may include an effect mode in which the difference from the other cases can be recognized in any one of the SP reach A1 to A3. For example, in the SP reach A1 to A3, moving images different from each other may be reproduced and displayed as background images. Alternatively, the SP reach A1 to A3 may display character images different from each other in animation. In addition, the effect mode in which the difference can be recognized is an arbitrary display on the screen of the image display device 5, an arbitrary sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and an arbitrary light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED. It may be the light emission of the above, an arbitrary operation using the movable member for effect, or a combination of a part or all of them.

When a reach effect that becomes a super reach such as SP reach A1 to A3 is executed, a drawing effect by displaying an image drawn in response to an effect drawing command is included. As the drawing effect, one of a plurality of types of display effects capable of displaying an image drawn by different drawing processes according to the effect drawing command may be selected and executed. As a drawing effect, the image drawn according to the effect drawing command is not displayed, but even if it is possible to execute a display effect that can display the image drawn according to a drawing command different from the effect drawing command. good. When a reach effect that becomes a super reach is executed, even if a case is included in which an effect by displaying an image drawn according to only a normal display drawing command is executed without executing a specific drawing effect. good.

FIG. 9-7 (B) shows a setting example of the drawing effect content according to the drawing effect pattern. In this setting example, as a plurality of drawing effect patterns, drawing effect patterns 02AKA01, 02AKA02, 02AKAB01, 02AKB02, 02AKB11, 02AKB12 are prepared in advance. A part or all of the drawing effect contents is different depending on the plurality of drawing effect patterns. The contents of the drawing effect include the presence / absence and type of the drawing effect by the effect display and the presence / absence of the drawing effect by the strobe display. A drawing effect that does not include an effect display or strobe display is also called a normal drawing effect. Drawing effects by effect display and strobe display are also called specific drawing effects.

The effect display is an effect display in which the color information included in the image data is changed and drawn when the drawing command for the effect is generated and transferred. The types of effect display include monochrome conversion effect and color information inversion effect. The monochrome conversion effect uses the command 01AKG04 among the drawing commands for the effect to draw and display the effect image subjected to the monochrome conversion. The color information inversion effect uses command 02 among the effect drawing commands to draw and display an effect image in which the color information is inverted. As described above, the effect display may be any effect as long as it can display the effect image drawn by changing the color information included in the image data. As for the effect display, for example, the effect image drawn by changing the position information corresponding to the image data may be displayed by using the command 01AKG06 among the drawing commands for the effect.

The strobe display is an effect display in which an image drawn using image data and a single color (for example, black or white) image with settings different from the image data are alternately and repeatedly displayed for each predetermined number of frames. Is. The strobe display may be executed for an image drawn on layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, when a drawing command different from the effect drawing command is generated and transferred. On the other hand, the strobe display may not be executed for the images drawn on the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2 which are special layers. As described above, while the strobe display can be executed in the range of the image drawn on the specific layer, there may be a limitation as a limit that the strobe display is not executed in the range of the image drawn on the special layer. In addition to the strobe display, a pause display may be displayed. The pause display is an effect display that gives the impression that the progress of the effect by displaying the image is paused by continuously displaying the same image over a predetermined number of consecutive frames. In addition, when the strobe display is not executed, the pause display may be performed.

FIG. 9-8 shows an example of determining a drawing effect pattern. For example, in the effect control process process of step S76, when the variable display start setting process is executed in step S171, a plurality of drawings are drawn at a ratio corresponding to the variable display result and the reach effect content as shown in FIG. 9-8. It suffices if one of the production patterns can be determined. When a variable display pattern corresponding to the reach effect of the super reach is specified, the CPU 91AK131 extracts a random number value for determining the drawing effect pattern, and based on the random number value, according to the variable display result and the reach effect content, The drawing effect pattern may be determined by referring to the drawing effect pattern determination table.

In the determination example shown in FIG. 9-8, when the variable display result is "missing" and the reach effect content is any of SP reach A1 to A3, the drawing is performed at a ratio of 60% (= 60/100). The effect pattern 02AKA01 is determined, the drawing effect pattern 02AKA02 is determined at a rate of 10% (= 10/100), and the drawing effect pattern 02AKAB01 is determined at a rate of 10% (= 10/100), and 5% (= 5). The drawing effect pattern 02AKB02 is determined at the ratio of / 100), the drawing effect pattern 02AKB11 is determined at the ratio of 10% (= 10/100), and the drawing effect pattern 02AKB12 is determined at the ratio of 5% = (5/100). Will be done. On the other hand, when the variable display result is "big hit" and the reach effect content is any of SP reach A1 to A3, the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is determined at a rate of 5% (= 5/100). The drawing effect pattern 02AKA02 is determined at a rate of 10% (= 10/100), the drawing effect pattern 02AKA2 is determined at a rate of 15% (= 15/100), and the drawing effect pattern 02AKA02 is determined at a rate of 20% (= 20/100). The drawing effect pattern 02AKB02 is determined, the drawing effect pattern 02AKB11 is determined at a rate of 20% (= 20/100), and the drawing effect pattern 02AKB12 is determined at a rate of 30% (= 30/100). Due to such a determination ratio, the variable display result becomes a "big hit" between the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 and the drawing effect pattern other than the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01, and the ratio controlled to the big hit game state is different.

The drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is a pattern that does not execute a specific drawing effect, which is a drawing effect by effect display or strobe display. On the other hand, the drawing effect patterns 02AKA02, 02AKAB01, 02AKB02, 02AKB11, 02AKB12 are patterns for executing a specific drawing effect by one or both of the effect display and the strobe display. Then, among the cases where the reach effect content is any of SP reach A1 to A3, when the variable display result is "big hit", the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is higher than when the variable display result is "miss". The ratio of drawing effect patterns other than the above is increased. Therefore, when the reach effect content is any of SP reach A1 to A3, when the specific drawing effect which is the drawing effect by the effect display or the strobe display is executed, the specific drawing effect is not executed as compared with the case where the specific drawing effect is not executed. , The variable display result becomes "big hit", and the ratio of being controlled to the big hit game state increases. Further, in the drawing effect patterns other than the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01, the determination ratio is set according to the variable display result so that the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state is higher than that of the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01.

When the reach effect content is SP reach B, it is possible to determine only the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01, and a restriction is provided so that it is not determined other than the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01. When the reach effect content is SP reach B, the reach effect of the super reach, which is a "strong SP reach" with higher jackpot reliability than the case of SP reach A1 to A3, is executed. In such a case, if a specific drawing effect by effect display or strobe display is executed, it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the reach effect of the super reach with high jackpot reliability, which may reduce the game interest. be. Therefore, in the range where the reach effect content is SP reach B, there is a limit as a limit that the specific drawing effect by the effect display or the strobe display is not executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's attention from being hindered by the reach production of the super reach having high jackpot reliability, and to appropriately improve the game entertainment.

When the reach effect content is any of SP reach A1 to A3, it can be determined to be one of the drawing effect patterns 02AKA01, 02AKA02, 02AKB01, 02AKAB02, 02AKB11, 02AKB12 at different ratios according to the variable display result. .. When the reach effect content is any of SP reach A1 to A3, the reach effect of super reach, which is a "weak SP reach" with a lower jackpot reliability than the case of SP reach B, is executed. In such a case, when a specific drawing effect by effect display or strobe display is executed, the variable display result becomes "big hit" and the ratio of being controlled to the big hit game state increases. In this way, when the reach effect content is any of SP reach A1 to A3, the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state is increased by executing the specific drawing effect, so that the jackpot reliability is low. Even in the case of the reach effect of, the player's expectation can be raised by executing the specific drawing effect, and the game entertainment can be appropriately improved.

Even when the reach effect content is SP reach B, it may be possible to determine the drawing effect pattern other than the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 at a predetermined ratio. However, when the reach effect content is SP reach B, it may be possible to determine the drawing effect pattern other than the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 at a lower rate than when the reach effect content is SP reach A1 to A3. In this way, in the range where the reach effect content is SP reach B, there is a limit that the specific drawing effect by the effect display or strobe display can be executed at a lower rate than the range where the reach effect content is SP reach A1 to A3. May be limited as.

FIG. 9-9 (A) shows the effect execution period in the variable display of the super reach. When the variable display of the super reach is executed, the period from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable display can be divided into a plurality of effect execution periods such as the effect execution periods D0 to D4. The effect execution period D0 is a period from the start of the variable display to the start of the execution of the reach effect after the reach is established. The effect execution period D1 is a period from the start of the reach effect execution period in which the reach effect that becomes the super reach is executed to the start of the chance up effect execution period in which the chance up effect can be executed. The effect execution period D2 is a period from the start of the chance-up effect execution period to the start of the result notification effect execution period in which the result notification effect can be executed after the chance-up effect execution period ends. The result notification effect may be an effect that notifies the effect result corresponding to the display result of the variable display in the reach effect that becomes the super reach. The effect execution period D3 is a period from the start to the end of the result notification effect execution period. The effect execution period D4 is a period from the end of the result notification effect execution period to the end of the variable display.

FIG. 9-9 (B) shows an effect control example 02AKC01 in each effect execution period. Of the plurality of effect execution periods D0 to D4, in the effect execution period D2 from the start of the chance-up effect execution period to the start of the result notification effect execution period, when the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is other than the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01, the specific drawing effect SPE is performed. Become feasible. In the case of the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01, since the specific drawing effect SPE is not executed, the specific drawing effect SPE is not executed even during the effect execution period D2, and the normal drawing effect NOR can be executed.

Of the plurality of effect execution periods D0 to D4, in the effect execution period D0 from the start of the variable display to the start of the reach effect of the super reach, regardless of whether the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 or other than the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01. , The specific drawing effect SPE is not executed, and the normal drawing effect NOR can be executed. For example, in the effect execution period D0, if it is possible to execute a light emission effect using the game effect lamp 9 or other decorative LEDs in response to BGM and sound effect output when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. good. Further, in the effect execution period D0, when the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R of "left" and "right", or "left", "middle", and "right". When the decorative symbols that make up the pseudo-continuous chance eyes are stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the game effect lamp 9 and other decorative LEDs are used in response to BGM and sound effect output. It may be possible to carry out a light emitting effect using. In addition, during the entire effect execution period D0, the normal drawing effect NOR is executed, and in response to the BGM and sound effect output during the execution of the variable display, the game effect lamp 9 and other decorative LEDs are used to emit light. The effect may be executable.

Among the effect execution periods D1 to D4 in which the reach effect of super reach is executed during the execution of the variable display, the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 or other than the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 in the effect execution period D1 following the effect execution period D0. Regardless of whether or not, the specific drawing effect SPE is not executed and the normal drawing effect NOR can be executed. In the effect execution period D2 after the effect execution period D1, the normal drawing effect NOR can be executed when the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is used, and the specific drawing effect SPE can be executed when the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is not used. be. In the normal drawing effect NOR by the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01, the image drawn by the normal drawing process can be displayed. In the specific drawing effect SPE other than the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01, for example, the image drawn by the specific drawing process can be displayed on 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 which are the specific layers. Even when the specific drawing effect SPE other than the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is executed, for example, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, may display an image drawn by the normal drawing process.

In the effect execution period D3 and the effect execution period D4 after the effect execution period D2, the specific drawing effect SPE is not executed and the normal drawing effect NOR is not executed regardless of whether the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 or other than the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01. Becomes executable. In the effect execution period D3, similarly to the effect execution period D2, the normal drawing effect NOR can be executed when the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is used, and the specific drawing effect SPE can be executed when the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is not used. It may be. When the specific drawing effect SPE can be executed in the effect execution period D3, the execution of the specific drawing effect SPE is normally drawn in the effect execution period D4 for confirming and notifying the fixed decorative symbol that is the variable display result. It suffices to return to the execution of the production NOR. Further, the specific drawing effect SPE may be executed in all of the plurality of effect execution periods D1 to D4. Prior to the variable display in which the reach effect of the super reach is executed, the execution of the specific drawing effect SPE can be started based on the judgment result that the reach effect of the super reach is executed as the judgment result at the time of starting winning. You may do so. Even when the specific drawing effect SPE can be executed in a period other than the effect execution period D2, for example, in 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 which are specific layers, as in the case of executing the specific drawing effect SPE in the effect execution period D2. An image drawn by a specific drawing process can be displayed. For example, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, may display an image drawn by a normal drawing process.

When the normal drawing effect NOR is executed even in a period other than the effect execution period D0 among the plurality of effect execution periods D0 to D4, a light emitting effect using a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 or other decorative LEDs is performed. It is feasible. On the other hand, when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed during the effect execution period D2 or the like, it is controlled so that the light emission effect is not executed. For example, when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the light emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 and other decorative LEDs may be turned off so that the light emitting effect is not executed. As described above, when the normal drawing effect NOR capable of displaying the image drawn by the normal drawing process is executed, the light emitting effect by the light emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 can be executed. On the other hand, when the specific drawing effect SPE capable of displaying the image drawn by the specific drawing process is executed, the light emitting effect by the light emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 is not executed. Therefore, within the range of the effect execution period in which the normal drawing effect NOR capable of displaying the image drawn by the normal drawing process is executed, the light emission effect by the light emission of the light emitting member can be executed, while the image drawn by the specific drawing process is executed. Within the range of the effect execution period in which the specific drawing effect SPE capable of displaying the image is executed, there is a limit as a limit that the light emission effect by the light emission of the light emitting member is not executed. When the specific drawing effect SPE by effect display or strobe display is executed, the player can easily recognize the image drawn by the specific drawing process by not executing the light emission effect. The display can improve the game entertainment.

When the specific drawing effect SPE is executed during the effect execution period D2 or the like, it is not limited to the one provided with the restriction that the light emitting effect by the light emission of the light emitting member is not executed, and for example, the normal drawing effect NOR is executed. There may be restrictions on the mode of effect of the light emission effect, such as reducing the amount of effect of the light emission effect. When the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the amount of light emitted (luminance) of the light emitting member in the light emitting effect is reduced as compared with the case where the normal drawing effect NOR is executed, so that the amount of effect is reduced. It may be provided. Alternatively, when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the amount of effect is limited to be reduced by reducing the number of light emitting members capable of emitting light in the light emitting effect as compared with the case where the normal drawing effect NOR is executed. May be provided. Alternatively, when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the amount of effect is reduced by reducing the emission color used in the light emission effect (for example, single color emission) as compared with the case where the normal drawing process NOR is executed. Such restrictions may be provided.

9-10 to 9-13 show execution examples of reach effect and drawing effect. FIG. 9-10 shows an example of effect execution when the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is determined among the cases where the reach effect that becomes the super reach is executed. FIG. 9-11 shows an example of effect execution in the effect execution period D2 when the drawing effect pattern 02AKA02 is determined. FIG. 9-12 shows an example of effect execution in the effect execution period D2 when the drawing effect pattern 02AKB02 is determined. FIG. 9-13 shows an example of effect execution in the effect execution period D2 when the drawing effect pattern 02AKB12 is determined.

FIG. 9-10 (A) shows an effect execution example 02AKM01 in the case where the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is the reach mode and the reach is established. At this time, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R of "left" and "right", the common decorative symbols corresponding to the numbers "7" are aligned and stopped and displayed (temporary stop display), and the reach is established. , The reach production of normal reach is executed. In the case of the effect execution example 02AKM01, the normal drawing effect NOR accompanied by the light emission effect can be appropriately executed corresponding to the effect execution period D0. For example, it suffices if it is possible to perform a light emitting effect using a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 or other decorative LEDs in response to BGM and sound effect output from the establishment of reach to the development of super reach.

FIG. 9-10 (B) shows an effect execution example 02 AKM02 in the case where the reach effect of the normal reach shifts to the reach effect of the super reach in response to the start of the effect execution period D1. 9-10 (C) and 9-10 (D) show the effect execution examples 02AKM03 and 02AKM04 when the reach effect of the super reach progresses in the effect execution period D1. In the case of the effect execution example 02AKM02 to 02AKM04, the normal drawing effect NOR accompanied by the light emission effect can be executed regardless of the determination result of the drawing effect pattern, corresponding to the effect execution period D1, and the specific drawing effect can be executed. Do not run SPE.

FIG. 9-10 (E) shows an effect execution example 02 AKM05 when the chance-up effect during reach is executed in the effect execution period D2. FIG. 9-10 (F) shows an effect execution example 02AKM06 in the case where the reach effect after the chance-up effect is executed in the effect execution period D2. In the case of the effect execution example 02AKAM05 and 02AKAM06, the normal drawing effect NOR accompanied by the light emission effect by the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is executed corresponding to the effect execution period D2. At this time, since the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01, the specific drawing effect SPE by the effect display or the strobe display is not executed.

FIG. 9-10 (G) shows an effect execution example 02AKM07 when the result notification effect is executed in the effect execution period D3. At this time, as the reach effect of the super reach, a reach effect in which the effect content differs depending on the variable display result is executed, and the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right" are displayed. Then, the fixed decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed by shaking display or the like. In the case of the effect execution example 02AKM07, the normal drawing effect NOR accompanied by the light emission effect can be executed regardless of the determination result of the drawing effect pattern, corresponding to the effect execution period D3, and the specific drawing effect SPE can be executed. Do not execute.

FIG. 9-10 (H) shows an effect execution example 02AKM08 when the final notification of the variable display result is executed in the effect execution period D4. At this time, with the end of the reach effect of Super Reach, the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed by the complete stop display. In the case of the effect execution example 02AKM08, the normal drawing effect NOR accompanied by the light emission effect can be executed regardless of the determination result of the drawing effect pattern, corresponding to the effect execution period D4, and the specific drawing effect SPE can be executed. Do not execute.

FIG. 9-11 (A) shows an effect execution example 02 AKM 11 when the chance-up effect during reach is executed corresponding to the start of the effect execution period D2. The effect display at this time may be the same as the effect display in the effect execution example 02 AKM05. However, the pause display may be started in response to the drawing effect pattern 02AKA02. For example, the image drawn on the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are the specific layers, may be copied to the copy area provided in the VRAM 91AK147 and stored in a reusable manner. In addition, it is controlled not to execute the light emission effect in response to the execution of the specific drawing effect SPE by the strobe display.

FIG. 9-11 (B) shows the effect execution example 02 AKM 12 when the strobe display is executed following the effect execution example 02 AKM 11. In the case of the effect execution example 02AKM12, an image that is entirely black is drawn and displayed as a single-color image on the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 that are specific layers. At this time, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, may display an image drawn by the normal drawing process.

FIG. 9-11 (C) shows an effect execution example 02 AKM 13 in the case of executing an effect display which is a pause display during the strobe display, following the effect execution example 02 AKM 12. In the case of the effect execution example 02AKM13, it is sufficient that the pause display can be executed during the strobe display by repeating the pause display started in the effect execution example 02AKM11. For example, in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, by drawing an image read from the copy area of VRAM91AK147, the same image pause as in the effect execution example 02AKM11 may be paused and displayed repeatedly.

FIG. 9-11 (D) shows an effect execution example 02 AKM 14 that repeatedly displays an image similar to the effect execution example 02 AKM 12 following the effect execution example 02 AKM 13. FIG. 9-11 (E) shows an effect execution example 02AKM15 that repeatedly displays the same images as the effect execution examples 02AKM11 and 02AKM13, following the effect execution example 02AKM14. FIG. 9-11 (F) shows an effect execution example 02 AKM 16 in which the same images as the effect execution examples 02 AKM 12 and 02 AKM 14 are repeatedly displayed following the effect execution example 02 AKM 15. FIG. 9-11 (G) shows an effect execution example 02AKM17 in which the same images as those of the effect execution examples 02AKM11, 02AKM13, and 02AKM15 are repeatedly displayed following the effect execution example 02AKM16. FIG. 9-11 (H) shows an effect execution example 02AKM18 that repeatedly displays the same images as the effect execution examples 02AKM12, 02AKM14, and 02AKM16, following the effect execution example 02AKM17. In this way, by alternately and repeatedly switching and displaying the image drawn using the image data and the image of a single color having a setting different from the image data, the strobe display and the pause display can be performed. .. After the strobe display of the effect execution example 02 AKM18 is completed, the normal drawing effect NOR is returned to the execution, and the light emission effect is controlled to be executed.

Such a strobe display can be executed without using dedicated image data by using an image with settings different from the image data according to the drawing command transferred from the CPU 91AK131 to the VDP91AK132. As a result, even if the effect image is drawn using common image data, the specific drawing effect SPE by strobe display can be executed according to the drawing command, so that the normal drawing effect NOR can be used by the player. Since different impressions can be given, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game by executing various display effects while preventing the amount of image data from increasing.

In FIG. 9-12 (A), when the chance-up effect during reach is executed in response to the start of the effect execution period D2, the specific drawing effect SPE by the monochrome conversion effect corresponding to the drawing effect pattern 02AKB02 is executed. The production execution example 02 AKM21 is shown. The effect display at this time is different from the effect display in the effect execution example 02AKM05 in that the images drawn by the monochrome conversion calculation process or the like, which is the specific drawing process, are displayed in the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are the specific layers. doing.

FIG. 9-12 (B) shows the effect execution example 02 AKM 22 when the strobe display is executed following the effect execution example 02 AKM 21. In the case of the effect execution example 02AKM22, similarly to the effect execution example 02AKM12 and the like, the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, draw and display an image of black as a whole as a single color image. At this time, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, may display an image drawn by the normal drawing process.

FIG. 9-12 (C) shows an effect execution example 02AKM23 in which, following the effect execution example 02AKM22, a specific drawing effect SPE by a monochrome conversion effect corresponding to the drawing effect pattern 02AKB02 is executed during the execution of the chance-up effect during reach. Is shown. In the case of the effect execution example 02 AKM23, it suffices if the chance-up effect during reach started in the effect execution example 02 AKM 21 can be continuously executed. It should be noted that the pause display may be executed as a chance-up effect during the strobe display. Alternatively, in the specific drawing effect SPE by the monochrome conversion effect, even when the strobe display is executed, the image drawn using the image data read according to the elapsed time is displayed as in the case of the effect execution example 02AKM05. The pause display of the chance-up effect may not be executed.

FIG. 9-12 (D) shows an effect execution example 02 AKM 24 that repeatedly displays an image similar to the effect execution example 02 AKM 22 following the effect execution example 02 AKM 23. FIG. 9-12 (E) shows an effect execution example 02 AKM 25 in the case where the reach effect after the chance-up effect in the effect execution period D2 is executed following the effect execution example 02 AKM 24. The effect display at this time is different from the effect display in the effect execution example 02AKM06 in that the images drawn by the monochrome conversion calculation process, which is the specific drawing process, are displayed in the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are the specific layers. doing.

FIG. 9-12 (F) shows an effect execution example 02AKM26 that repeatedly displays the same images as the effect execution examples 02AKM22 and 02AKM24, following the effect execution example 02AKM25. FIG. 9-12 (G) shows the effect execution example 02 AKM 27 when the reach effect after the effect execution example 02 AKM 25 in the effect execution period D2 is executed following the effect execution example 02 AKM 26. In the case of the effect execution example 02AKM27, it is sufficient that the reach effect executed in the effect execution example 02AKM25 can be continuously executed. It should be noted that the pause display may be executed as the reach effect during the strobe display, or the pause display may not be executed as the specific drawing effect SPE by the color information conversion effect. FIG. 9-12 (H) shows an effect execution example 02 AKM 28 that repeatedly displays the same images as the effect execution examples 02 AKM 22, 02 AKM 24, and 02 AKM 26, following the effect execution example 02 AKM 27. In this way, the image by monochrome conversion drawn by reducing the number of colors of the color information by the monochrome conversion calculation processing using the image data and the image of a single color by the setting different from the image data are alternately and repeatedly switched. By displaying the image, the specific drawing effect SPE by the monochrome conversion effect can be executed together with the strobe display.

The effect display, which is a monochrome conversion effect, is a dedicated image using an image drawn with a smaller number of colors than the color information included in the image data according to the drawing command for the effect transferred from the CPU 91AK131 to the VDP91AK132. It can be executed regardless of the data. As a result, even if the effect image is drawn using common image data, the specific drawing effect SPE by the monochrome conversion effect can be executed according to the effect drawing command. Since the impression given to the player can be made different, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game by executing various display effects while preventing the amount of image data from increasing. In addition, by combining the effect display, which is a monochrome conversion effect, with the strobe display, the player can easily recognize the color change of the displayed image, and the display effect is prevented while preventing the amount of image data from increasing. It is possible to enhance the impression of the game and improve the game entertainment.

In FIG. 9-13 (A), when the chance-up effect during reach is executed in response to the start of the effect execution period D2, the specific drawing effect SPE by the color information inversion effect corresponding to the drawing effect pattern 02AKB12 is executed. The production execution example 02AKM31 to be performed is shown. The effect display at this time is an image drawn by converting the value of the color information by the differential calculation process or the like, which is the specific drawing process, in the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are the specific layers, as compared with the effect display in the effect execution example 02AKM05. Is different in that is displayed.

FIG. 9-13 (B) shows the effect execution example 02 AKM 32 when the strobe display is executed following the effect execution example 02 AKM 31. In the case of the effect execution example 02AKM32, similarly to the effect execution examples 02AKM12, 02AKM22, etc., an image that is entirely black is drawn and displayed as a single color image on the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 that are specific layers. At this time, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, may display an image drawn by the normal drawing process.

FIG. 9-13 (C) shows an effect execution example in which, following the effect execution example 02AKM32, a specific drawing effect SPE by the color information inversion effect corresponding to the drawing effect pattern 02AKB12 is executed during the execution of the chance-up effect during reach. It shows 02AKM33. In the case of the effect execution example 02AKM33, it suffices if the chance-up effect during reach started in the effect execution example 02AKM31 can be continuously executed. It should be noted that the pause display may be executed as a chance-up effect during the strobe display. Alternatively, in the specific drawing effect SPE by the color information inversion effect, even when the strobe display is executed, the image drawn using the image data read according to the elapsed time is displayed as in the case of the effect execution example 02AKM05. , The pause display of the chance-up effect may not be executed.

FIG. 9-13 (D) shows an effect execution example 02 AKM 34 that repeatedly displays an image similar to the effect execution example 02 AKM 32, following the effect execution example 02 AKM 33. FIG. 9-13 (E) shows an effect execution example 02 AKM 35 in the case where the reach effect after the chance-up effect in the effect execution period D2 is executed following the effect execution example 02 AKM 34. The effect display at this time is an image drawn by converting the value of the color information by the differential calculation process or the like, which is the specific drawing process, in the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are the specific layers, as compared with the effect display in the effect execution example 02AKM06. Is different in that is displayed.

FIG. 9-13 (F) shows an effect execution example 02AKM36 that repeatedly displays the same images as the effect execution examples 02AKM32 and 02AKM034, following the effect execution example 02AKM35. FIG. 9-13 (G) shows an effect execution example 02 AKM 37 when a reach effect after the effect execution example 02 AKM 35 in the effect execution period D2 is executed following the effect execution example 02 AKM 36. In the case of the effect execution example 02AKM37, it is sufficient that the reach effect executed in the effect execution example 02AKM35 can be continuously executed. It should be noted that the pause display may be executed as the reach effect during the strobe display, or the pause display may not be executed as the specific drawing effect SPE by the color information conversion effect. FIG. 9-13 (H) shows an effect execution example 02AKM38 that repeatedly displays the same images as the effect execution examples 02AKM32, 02AKM34, and 02AKM36, following the effect execution example 02AKM37. In this way, the image by color information inversion drawn by converting the color information value by the difference calculation process using the image data and the single color image by the setting different from the image data are alternately and repeatedly switched. By displaying the image, it is possible to execute the specific drawing effect SPE by the color information inversion effect together with the strobe display.

The effect display, which is the color information inversion effect, is dedicated image data using an image drawn by converting the value of the color information included in the image data according to the drawing command for the effect transferred from the CPU 91AK131 to the VDP91AK132. It is feasible regardless. As a result, even if the effect image is drawn using common image data, the specific drawing effect SPE by the color information inversion effect can be executed according to the effect drawing command, so that the normal drawing effect NOR can be executed. Since it is possible to give different impressions to the player, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game by executing various display effects while preventing the amount of image data from increasing. In addition, by combining the effect display, which is a color information inversion effect, and the strobe display, the player can easily recognize the color change of the displayed image, and the display is displayed while preventing the amount of image data from increasing. It is possible to enhance the impression of the production and improve the entertainment of the game.

By executing the specific drawing effect SPE by the effect display or the strobe display, it is possible to give the player a sense of discomfort in the display effect that is not found in the normal drawing effect NOR. When the reach effect content is any of SP reach A1 to A3, the reach effect of super reach, which is a "weak SP reach" with a lower jackpot reliability than the case of SP reach B, is executed, while the reach effect is executed. It is possible to execute a specific drawing effect SPE that gives a sense of discomfort in the display effect that is not found in the normal drawing effect NOR. Then, when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the ratio of being controlled to the big hit game state becomes high, so that the player's expectation can be raised and the game entertainment can be appropriately improved.

The invention relating to the feature portions 01AK and 02AK is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 does not have to have all the technical features related to the feature units 01AK and 02AK, and has the configuration shown in the above embodiment so as to solve at least one problem in the prior art. It may be provided with a part.

The strobe display has been described as being executed by alternately and repeatedly switching and displaying an image drawn using image data and a single-color image having a setting different from the image data. In such a strobe display, a part or all of a single color image may be replaced with a specific image prepared in advance and displayed. For example, when an effect image to be a character image is inserted and displayed as a specific image, the display result of the variable display becomes a "big hit" and is controlled to a big hit game state, as compared with the case where a single color image is repeatedly displayed. The drawing effect content and the determination ratio of the drawing effect pattern may be set so that the ratio becomes high.

It has been described that when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the light emitting effect using the light emitting member is not executed. The light emitting effect using such a light emitting member may include a light emitting display effect by causing the display unit of the light guide plate to emit light. For example, a light guide plate as a transparent light guide member having light transmission is provided on the front side (front side) of a part or all of the display screen of the image display device 5. Further, a light emitting member such as a light guide plate LED is provided in the vicinity of the light guide plate, and light from the light emitting member is introduced through the end face of the light guide plate and reflected by a reflection portion formed in advance inside the light guide plate. Therefore, a light emitting display effect for displaying a predetermined pattern or the like may be executed. Then, in the effect execution period in which the normal drawing effect NOR is executed in response to the drawing effect pattern or the like, it is sufficient that the light emission display effect can be executed based on the determination result of the light emission display effect pattern or the like. On the other hand, in the effect execution period in which the specific drawing effect SPE is executed corresponding to the drawing effect pattern or the like, it is sufficient to control so that the light emission display effect is not executed.

Further, the light emitting effect using such a light emitting member may include a button light emitting effect by causing the button light emitting unit mounted inside the push button 31B to emit light. In this case, it is sufficient that the button light emission effect can be executed based on the determination result of the button light emission effect pattern or the like during the effect execution period in which the normal drawing effect NOR is executed corresponding to the drawing effect pattern or the like. On the other hand, it is sufficient to control so that the button light emission effect is not executed during the effect execution period in which the specific drawing effect SPE is executed in accordance with the drawing effect pattern or the like.

When a plurality of display layers are provided, the setting of whether each display layer is a special layer or a specific layer can be arbitrarily changed based on the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the like. For example, the layer 01AKL2 that draws the effect image corresponding to the hold display or the active display so as to be displayable may be included in a specific layer instead of the special layer. In the setting where the layer 01AKL2 is included in the specific layer, when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the effect image corresponding to the hold display or the active display is drawn and displayed by the specific drawing process, so that color information or the like can be obtained. May be changed. Then, when the specific drawing effect SPE by the monochrome conversion effect is executed, the effect image corresponding to the hold display or the active display may be changed to a monochrome image having a small number of colors and displayed. While enabling monochrome display of such hold display and active display, when it is possible to execute a change effect that changes the display color of the specific display related to variable display such as hold display and active display, the specific drawing effect SPE If the change effect is executed during the execution of, the execution of the specific drawing effect SPE may be terminated when the display color of the specific display is changed, and the execution of the normal drawing effect NOR may be started or restarted. The display color of the specific display may be different depending on the degree of expectation controlled by the jackpot game state. When the change effect includes a success pattern that changes the display color of the specific display and a failure pattern that does not change the display color of the specific display, the change effect of the success pattern is executed during the execution of the specific drawing effect SPE. When the display color of the specific display changes to the specific color, the execution of the specific drawing effect SPE may be terminated and the execution of the normal drawing effect NOR may be started or restarted. Execution of the specific drawing effect SPE is started at the timing when the hold display is displayed, and after the variable display and active display corresponding to the hold display are performed, the change effect of the success pattern is executed and the display color of the active display is changed. When the color changes to a specific color, the execution of the specific drawing effect SPE may be terminated, and the execution of the normal drawing effect NOR may be started or restarted.

As the display layer included in the special layer, a direction display layer for drawing an effect image showing the launch direction of the game ball so as to be displayable may be included. For example, in the direction display layer, as an operation promotion effect that is a left-handed effect or a right-handed effect, when a launch promotion effect is executed, an effect image that encourages the game ball to be fired toward the left game area or the right game area is displayed. It suffices if it can be drawn and displayed. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a game can be played by firing a game ball as a game medium, and a first path and a second path are provided as movement paths through which the game ball can flow down. The first route may be a right-handed route which is a right-handed game area in the game area, and the second route may be a left-handed area which is a left-handed game area in the game area. Then, when it is the first state in which it is advantageous to let the game ball flow down to the first path, the first promotion image for prompting the launch of the game medium toward the first path can be drawn and displayed on the direction display layer. It should be. In addition, when the second state is in which it is advantageous to let the game ball flow down to the second path, a second promotion image for prompting the launch of the game medium toward the second path based on the establishment of a predetermined condition is displayed. It may be possible to draw and display on the direction display layer. In this way, by including the direction display layer in the special layer, the image drawn by the specific drawing process can be displayed in the specific layer during the effect execution period in which the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, whereas the direction is displayed. In the display layer, it suffices if the image drawn by the normal drawing process can be displayed. Therefore, the effect image prompting the game ball to be launched toward the left game area or the right game area may be drawn and displayed in a special layer by a normal drawing process as a predetermined image related to the game. By being able to draw and display the image that encourages the launch of the game medium by the normal drawing process instead of the specific drawing process, various display effects are executed while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image that encourages the launch of the game medium. Then, the game entertainment can be improved.

As the operation promotion effect, an effect image indicating that the effect output amount can be changed, such as volume, screen brightness, and a part or all of the light emission amount, may be drawn and displayed. As the display layer included in the special layer, an operation display layer for drawing an effect image or the like in such an operation promotion effect so as to be displayable may be included.

As the display layer included in the special layer, a warning display layer for drawing a warning image or the like for notifying the occurrence of an abnormality in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be included. For example, in the warning display layer, detection by various sensors such as a magnetic sensor, a radio wave sensor, a vibration sensor, a door opening sensor, a grand prize opening door sensor, a full tank sensor, and a ball burnout sensor connected to the main board 11 in the pachinko gaming machine 1 When it is determined that various errors have occurred based on the state, the state of the payout board, the detection state of the game ball by the start port switch, the count switch, etc., a warning image corresponding to the generated error is drawn and displayed. If possible. The warning display layer may be set to the display layer having the highest display priority among the plurality of display layers. In this way, by including the warning display layer in the special layer, the image drawn by the specific drawing process can be displayed in the specific layer during the effect execution period in which the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, whereas the warning is displayed. In the display layer, it suffices if the image drawn by the normal drawing process can be displayed. Therefore, the warning image for notifying the occurrence of an abnormality may be drawn and displayed on a special layer by a normal drawing process as a predetermined image related to the game. By being able to draw and display a warning image that notifies the occurrence of an abnormality by normal drawing processing instead of specific drawing processing, various display effects can be achieved while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image that notifies the occurrence of an abnormality. It can be executed to improve the game entertainment. In the case of notifying the occurrence of an abnormality, even during the execution of the specific drawing effect SPE in which the light emission effect is not executed, the light emission notification at the time of abnormality may be executed by causing the light emitting member to emit light. In this way, the notification regarding the occurrence of the abnormality may be executed with a higher priority than other effects.

As the display layer included in the special layer, a suggestion display layer for drawing the effect image in the setting suggestion effect so as to be displayable may be included. For example, in the suggestion display layer, it is sufficient that the setting suggestion images determined at different ratios can be drawn and displayed according to the setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is possible to set one of a plurality of set values having different advantages for the player, and as a suggestion regarding the setting of the set value, whether or not to execute the pachinko game machine and the effect mode are set according to the set value. It suffices if the setting suggestion effect having a different determination ratio can be executed. For example, one of a plurality of setting suggestion images may be selected at a different ratio depending on the setting value, and the selected setting suggestion image may be drawn and displayed on the suggestion display layer. In this way, by including the suggestion display layer in the special layer, the image drawn by the specific drawing process can be displayed in the specific layer during the effect execution period in which the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, whereas the suggestion is suggested. In the display layer, it suffices if the image drawn by the normal drawing process can be displayed. An image suggesting a setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be drawn and displayed on a special layer by a normal drawing process instead of a specific drawing process, so that an image suggesting a setting value having a different advantage for the player can be displayed. It is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game by executing various display effects while appropriately ensuring visibility. Alternatively, the suggestion display layer may be included in a specific layer instead of a special layer. In this way, by including the suggestion display layer in the specific layer, the image drawn by the normal drawing process can be displayed in the special layer during the effect execution period in which the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, whereas the suggestion is suggested. The display layer may display an image drawn by a specific drawing process. By making it possible to draw and display an image suggesting a setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 on a specific layer by a specific drawing process, the display of an image suggesting a setting value having a different advantage for the player is diversified. , The game entertainment can be improved.

At least some of the features of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be applied not only to the pachinko gaming machine 1 but also to slot machines and the like. As an example of applying to this slot machine, when it is possible to control the assist time (also referred to as AT) which is the notification period in which the navigation notification for notifying the stop order which is advantageous for the player according to the internal lottery result can be executed. , As the navigation notification, an effect image for notifying the stop order in an identifiable manner may be displayed on the screen of the image display device. In this case, as the display layer included in the special layer, a notification display layer that draws an effect image used for navigation notification so as to be displayable may be included. For example, in the notification display layer, when the order of stopping the variable display by each of the left, middle, and right reels is notified, if the stop order image showing the order of the stop operation by the stop switch can be drawn and displayed on the notification display layer. good. In this way, by including the notification display layer in the special layer, the image drawn by the specific drawing process can be displayed in the specific layer during the effect execution period in which the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, whereas the notification is displayed. In the display layer, it suffices if the image drawn by the normal drawing process can be displayed. The visibility of the image that notifies the operation mode can be displayed by drawing the image that notifies the operation mode when the variable display in the slot machine is stopped in a special layer by the normal drawing process instead of the specific drawing process. It is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game by executing various display effects while appropriately securing the above.

(Problem-solving means and effects of feature 01AK)
The present embodiment includes the following inventions. That is, in a gaming machine capable of performing a game such as a pachinko gaming machine, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-171129, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, an effect image is produced according to an instruction of a display list. A technique for tilting and deforming a pachinko machine to display a slingshot image, or a pachinko / pachislot machine for drawing a processed image in which a plurality of deformed images generated by using an inverted image are arranged, such as those described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-29947. Was also proposed. In the gaming machine described in the above patent gazette, the visibility of an important image may be lowered because the entire image is changed. Therefore, with the aim of providing a gaming machine that improves the enjoyment of gaming while appropriately ensuring the visibility of images.
The game machine related to the feature unit 01AK is a game machine capable of executing a game, for example, a pachinko game machine 1, and uses a storage means for storing image data such as an effect data memory 91AK123 and VRAM91AK147, and image data. An image processing means such as VDP91AK132 capable of executing drawing processing is provided, and the image processing means draws in response to image data, for example, normal drawing processing such as drawing processing according to a drawing command for normal display, and normal drawing processing. It is possible to execute drawing by changing at least the color information included in the image data, for example, a specific drawing process such as a drawing process according to a drawing command for an effect. For example, a plurality of layers 01AKL1 to 01AKL5 having different priorities. An image in each of the layers can be displayed, and the plurality of layers include, for example, a specific layer such as layers AKL03 to AKL05 and a special layer having a higher priority than the specific layer, such as layers AKL01 and AKL02. According to steps 01AKS01 to 01AKS03, the specific layer can be drawn by the specific drawing process and the effect image can be displayed. For example, according to step 01AKS04, the special layer is drawn by the normal drawing process and is related to the progress of the game. A predetermined image can be displayed. As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in the data capacity, appropriately secure the visibility of the image, enable the execution of various display effects, and improve the enjoyment of the game.

The specific drawing process may draw with a smaller number of colors than the color information included in the image data (for example, monochrome conversion), for example, monochrome conversion. As a result, while preventing an increase in the data capacity, it is possible to execute an effect with various displays, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the specific drawing process, the value of the color information included in the image data may be converted and drawn (for example, color information inversion), for example, such as color information inversion. As a result, while preventing an increase in the data capacity, it is possible to execute an effect with various displays, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

For example, as in the effect control example 02AKC01, for example, a first period (for example, the effect execution period D1) in which the specific drawing process such as the effect execution period D1 is not executed, and a second period in which the specific drawing process such as the effect execution period D2 is executed. Of a plurality of periods including a period (for example, the effect execution period D2), the light emitting means can be made to emit light in the first period, and the light emitting means may not be made to emit light in the second period. As a result, it is possible to improve the game entertainment while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

Alternatively, for example, a first period in which the specific drawing process such as the effect execution period D1 is not executed (for example, the effect execution period D1) and a second period in which the specific drawing process such as the effect execution period D2 is executed (for example, the effect execution period D2). Of the plurality of periods including (such as), the light emitting means can be made to emit light in the normal mode in the first period, and the light emission of the light emitting means may be restricted more than in the normal mode in the second period. As a result, it is possible to improve the game entertainment while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

A setting value change process S6A that has different advantages for the player and can be set to any setting value (for example, a value from 1 to 6) among a plurality of setting values such as a value from 1 to 6. A setting means such as a CPU 103 to be executed (for example, a CPU 103 for executing the setting value change process S6A) is provided, and suggestions regarding the setting of the setting means are given by displaying a specific mode. Suggestion effects (for example, effects by effect execution examples 60AKD8 to 60AKD12) can be executed, and the image drawn by the specific drawing process may not be displayed as the image displayed by the setting suggestion effect. As a result, it is possible to improve the game entertainment while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

A setting value change process S6A that has different advantages for the player and can be set to any setting value (for example, a value from 1 to 6) among a plurality of setting values such as a value from 1 to 6. A setting means such as a CPU 103 to be executed (for example, a CPU 103 that executes the setting value change process S6A) is provided, and suggestions regarding the setting of the setting means are given by displaying a specific mode. The effect (for example, the effect by the effect execution examples 60AKD8 to 60AKD12) can be executed, and the image drawn by the specific drawing process may be displayed as the image displayed by the setting suggestion effect. As a result, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game by making it possible to perform various display effects while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

For example, a specific effect of pausing and displaying an image (for example, a specific drawing effect by the drawing effect pattern 02AKA02) such as a specific drawing effect by the drawing effect pattern 02AKA02 may be executed. As a result, while preventing an increase in the data capacity, it is possible to execute an effect with various displays, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

For example, as in the production execution example 02AKM21 to 02AKM28, the image drawn using the image data and the monochromatic image may be alternately displayed on the specific layer (see, for example, the production execution example 02AKM21 to 02AKM28). As a result, while preventing an increase in the data capacity, it is possible to execute an effect with various displays, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

For example, variable display of decorative symbols in "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, Variable display of the identification information image, such as variable display of the decorative symbol in 5R), and reduction in a mode smaller than the identification information image, such as variable display of the small symbol in the small symbol display area 01AKC1. Variable display of the identification information image (for example, variable display of the small symbol in the small symbol display area 01AKC1) can be executed. For example, as shown in FIG. 9-5, the identification information image is drawn and displayed by a specific drawing process. It is possible, and the reduced identification information image may be drawn and displayed by a normal drawing process. As a result, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game by making it possible to perform various display effects while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

(Problem-solving means and effects of feature unit 02AK)
The game machine related to the feature unit 02AK is a game machine capable of executing a game, for example, a pachinko game machine 1, and uses a storage means for storing image data such as an effect data memory 91AK123 and VRAM91AK147, and image data. It is provided with an image processing means such as VDP91AK132 capable of executing drawing processing, and suggests that it is controlled to an advantageous state advantageous for the player such as a big hit game state, for example, a specific effect such as a reach effect of super reach. Can be executed during the variable display, and the effect pattern of the specific effect is different in the ratio controlled to the advantageous state, for example, the first pattern such as the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 and the second pattern such as the drawing effect pattern 02AKA02. Of the effect period in which the specific effect is executed, at least in the first period such as the effect execution period D1, regardless of whether it is the first pattern or the second pattern, for example, during the normal drawing effect. It is possible to display an image drawn by a normal drawing process such as a drawing process according to the drawing command of, and among the effect periods in which a specific effect is executed, a second period after the first period, for example, an effect execution period D2. In the two periods, it is possible to display the image drawn by the normal drawing process in the case of the first pattern, and in the case of the second pattern, for example, a specific drawing process such as a drawing process according to a drawing command at the time of a specific drawing effect. It is possible to display the image drawn by. As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in the data capacity and appropriately raise the expectation of the player while making it possible to execute the production by various displays, and improve the game entertainment.

The specific drawing process may draw with a smaller number of colors than the color information included in the image data, such as monochrome conversion. As a result, while preventing an increase in the data capacity, it is possible to execute an effect with various displays, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the specific drawing process, the value of the color information included in the image data may be converted and drawn, for example, color information inversion. As a result, while preventing an increase in the data capacity, it is possible to execute an effect with various displays, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

For example, as in the effect control example 02AKC01, it is possible to execute a light emitting effect by the light emitting means in response to the display of the image drawn by the normal drawing process in the specific effect, and to display the image drawn by the specific drawing process in the specific effect. Correspondingly, the light emission effect may not be executed. As a result, it is possible to improve the game entertainment while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

Alternatively, the light emitting effect by the light emitting means can be executed in the normal mode in response to the display of the image drawn by the normal drawing process in the specific effect, and the image drawn by the specific drawing process in the specific effect can be displayed. The light emission effect may be limited more than in the normal mode. As a result, it is possible to improve the game entertainment while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

It is provided with a setting means such as a CPU 103 that executes a setting value change process S6A, which can be set to any of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player, for example, a value from 1 to 6. It is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect such as an effect by the effect execution examples 60AKD8 to 60AKD12, for which a suggestion regarding the setting of the setting means is given by displaying a specific mode, and the image displayed by the setting suggestion effect is drawn by the specific drawing process. The image may not be displayed. As a result, it is possible to improve the game entertainment while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

It is provided with a setting means such as a CPU 103 that executes a setting value change process S6A and can be set to any of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player, for example, a value from 1 to 6. It is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect such as an effect by the effect execution examples 60AKD8 to 60AKD12, in which the suggestion regarding the setting of the means is given by displaying a specific mode, and the image displayed by the setting suggestion effect is drawn by the specific drawing process. The image may be displayable. As a result, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game by making it possible to perform various display effects while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

In the second period, it may be possible to execute an effect of pausing and displaying an image in the case of the second pattern, such as a specific drawing effect by the drawing effect pattern 02AKA02. As a result, while preventing an increase in the data capacity, it is possible to execute an effect with various displays, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the second period, an image drawn using the image data and a monochromatic image may be alternately displayed in the case of the second pattern, for example, as in the production execution example 02AKM21 to 02AKM28. As a result, while preventing an increase in the data capacity, it is possible to execute an effect with various displays, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

For example, variable display of identification information images such as variable display of decorative symbols in "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and small symbols in small symbol display area 01AKC1, for example. It is possible to perform variable display of the reduced identification information image in a mode smaller than that of the identification information image, such as variable display of the identification information image. For example, as shown in FIG. 9-5, the identification information image is subjected to a specific drawing process. It can be drawn and displayed, and the reduced identification information image may be drawn and displayed by a normal drawing process. As a result, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game by making it possible to perform various display effects while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

The configurations relating to the feature portions 01AK and 02AK may be appropriately combined with some or all of the configurations relating to the feature portions 91AK and 92AK and the configurations relating to the feature portion 60AK. For example, in the configuration in which the operation effect to be executed after the elapse of a predetermined period can be executed as the setting suggestion effect which is the operation effect of the suggestion effect mode, the first component in the display period of the character image added to the moving image of 1. And the second component can be changed, or a character image using data related to a common character image is added to the first moving image and the second moving image different from the first moving image. In the configuration that can be displayed, the specific layer can be drawn by the specific drawing process and the effect image can be displayed, and the special layer having a higher priority than the specific layer is drawn by the normal drawing process. A predetermined image related to the progress of the game may be displayed, and in the second period after the first period, the image drawn by the normal drawing process can be displayed in the case of the first pattern. When the second pattern is different from the first pattern in the ratio controlled in an advantageous state, the image drawn by the specific drawing process may be displayed.

(Explanation of feature 75SG)
Next, the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001 of the feature portion 75SG in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-1 to 10-26. FIG. 10-1 is a front view showing a pachinko gaming machine as the feature portion 75SG. FIG. 10-2 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards mounted on the pachinko gaming machine as the feature portion 75SG. FIG. 10-3 is a front view showing a gaming board of a pachinko gaming machine as a feature portion 75SG. FIG. 10-4 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 10-3. In the following description, the direction in which the player is located is the front of the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001, and the opposite direction is the rear. Further, the description will be described with reference to the up, down, left, and right directions as viewed from the player located in front of the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001. Further, the same parts as those in the above embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 10-1 to 10-4, the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001 includes a gaming board 2 (also referred to as a gauge board 2) constituting the game board surface and a gaming machine frame 3 (also referred to as a gauge board 2) for supporting and fixing the game board 2. It is also called the underframe 3). A game area Y is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device and hit into the game area Y. Further, the game machine frame 3 is provided with a glass door frame 50 having a glass window 50a so as to be rotatable around the left side, and the game area Y can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 50. When the glass door frame 50 is closed, the game area Y can be seen through the glass window 50a.

The game board 2 is made of a translucent (transparent) synthetic resin material such as an acrylic resin, a polycarbonate resin, or a methacrylic resin, and is formed in a substantially square shape in front view. , The board surface plate 200 provided with the guide rail 211, the outer rail decoration 212, and the like, and the spacer member 201 integrally attached to the back surface side of the board surface plate 200. The game board 2 is formed of a non-transmissive member such as a veneer board in a substantially square shape in front view, and is provided on a board surface board provided with obstacle nails (not shown), guide rails 211, etc. on the front game board surface. May be configured.

An opening 2c is formed in the board surface plate 200 and the spacer member 201 of the game board 2, and the display area of the image display device 5 provided at a position away from the game board 2 on the back side is passed through the opening 2c on the player side. It can be visually recognized from (front side). Further, in the display area of the image display device 5, the area overlapping the board surface plate 200 is visible through the board surface plate 200.

Further, a center decorative frame 51 is attached to the opening 2c of the board surface plate 200, and the area surrounded by the center decorative frame 51, the guide rail 211, and the outer rail decoration 212 is the flow-down area of the game ball in the game area Y. Has been done. Further, a light guide plate device 500, which will be described later, is provided at a position corresponding to the opening 2c surrounded by the center decorative frame 51.

The first effect unit 300 is provided at the lower position on the back side of the board plate 200, that is, at the lower position of the image display device 5. The second effect unit 400 is provided on the right side of the area surrounded by the center decorative frame 51, that is, at a position corresponding to the right side of the display area of the image display device 5. A third effect unit 600 is provided at a position corresponding to the upper part of the area surrounded by the center decorative frame 51, that is, the upper part of the display area of the image display device 5. The fourth effect unit 800 is provided at the upper left position on the back side of the board plate 200, that is, at the position on the upper left side of the image display device 5. Further, at the lower right position of the board surface plate 200, a variable winning ball unit 700 capable of winning a game ball flowing down the game area Y is provided.

Since the first effect unit 300 and the fourth effect unit 800 are provided on the back side of the board surface plate 200, they can be seen through the board surface plate 200 from the player side (front side of the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001). ing. On the other hand, the second effect unit 400 and the third effect unit 600 are located at least in front of the game board surface whose front surface is the front surface of the board surface plate 200, and are arranged in the opening 2c, so that the light guide plate device device. It is visible from the player side through the light guide plate 501 of 500.

(Light guide plate device 500)
Next, the light guide plate device 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-5 and 10-6. FIG. 10-5 is a front view showing the light guide plate device. 10-6 is an enlarged front view showing a main part of the light guide plate device, (B) is a sectional view taken along line BB of (A), and (C) is an enlarged view showing a main part of (B). Is. Here, in order to help understanding, the light emitting region 506 is indicated by dots (halftone dots), and the non-light emitting region 507 without dots (halftone dots) is indicated by white.

As shown in FIGS. 10-5 and 10-6, the light guide plate device 500 includes a light guide plate 501 provided so as to close the area surrounded by the center decorative frame 51 except for the right side and the lower area. A collection of LED substrates 503 on which a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 502 for incident light on the right end surface 501a of the light guide plate 501 and light from the light guide plate LED 502 are collected toward the right end surface 501a of the light guide plate 501. It mainly has an optical lens 504. The light guide plate device 500 is supported by a base member (not shown) fixed to the back surface of the game board 2 or the center decorative frame 51.

The light guide plate 501 is a plate member formed of a transparent synthetic resin material such as acrylic or polycarbonate having a predetermined front-rear width dimension (plate thickness = about 5 mm), and as shown in FIG. 10-4, the light guide plate 501 is a plate member. It is arranged in front of the third effect unit 600 and close to the glass window 50a.

Further, the light guide plate 501 is a light emitting region 506 as a first region forming a predetermined light guide pattern that reflects light from the light guide plate LED 502 incident on the inside from the right end surface 501a forward and emits it from the front surface, that is, , A light emitting region (see the net point region in FIGS. 10-5 and 10-6 (A)) that emits light due to light incident on the inside from the right end surface 501a of the light guide plate 501, and the inside from the right end surface 501a. The non-light emitting region 507 as a second region that does not form a predetermined light guide pattern that reflects the light from the light guide plate LED 502 forward and emits it from the front, that is, does not emit light due to the light incident inside the light guide plate 501. It has a non-light emitting region (see the white region in FIGS. 10-5 and 10-6 (A)).

The light emitting region 506 is formed so that a graphic whose peripheral edge is radial appears at a substantially central position of the light guide plate 501, and when light is incident inside the light guide plate 501, the light emitting region 506 reflects the light and moves forward. By emitting light, a predetermined image is emitted and displayed on the light guide plate 501.

As shown in FIGS. 10-6 (B) and 10-6 (C), the light emitting region 506 is in a fine uneven state so as to guide the incident light from the light guide plate LED 502 incident on the inside from the right end surface 501a and emit it from the front surface. It is formed on the back side (rough surface). Specifically, the light emitting region 506 is formed in an uneven state (rough surface) having a substantially semicircular shape with a constant pitch in a cross-sectional view when the traveling direction of light is viewed from the side. In FIG. 10-6 (C), the uneven state (rough surface) is enlarged to help understanding, but the actual light emitting region 506 is a fine particle having a size that is difficult to see with the naked eye. It is in an uneven state.

When light is incident inside from the right end surface 501a of the light guide plate 501, a predetermined image (still image) is displayed on the light guide plate 501 by a dot pattern composed of a plurality of recesses 510 formed in the light emitting region 506 (FIG. See the halftone dot region at 10-5). That is, the light emitting region 506 as the first region forming a predetermined light guide pattern that reflects the light from the light guide plate LED 502 incident on the inside from the right end surface 501a forward and emits it from the front surface is formed from the plurality of recesses 510. This is a region in which a dot pattern is formed, and is not a second region that does not form a predetermined light guide pattern that reflects light from the light guide plate LED 502 incident on the inside from the right end surface 501a forward and emits light from the front surface. The light emitting region 507 is a region in which a dot pattern composed of a plurality of recesses 510 is not formed. Further, in the feature portion 75SG, a predetermined image (graphic) is exemplified as display information that can be displayed by the light guide plate 501, but in addition to these, decorations such as a pattern, a character, a symbol, a pattern, or a pattern are also included. Other display information including may be displayable.

In the light guide plate 501, when no light is incident from the right end surface 501a, the entire light guide plate 501 including the light emitting region 506 is colorless and transparent, and the display image of the rear image display device 5 and the first The 2 effect unit 400 and the 3rd effect unit 600 can be visually recognized (perspective) from the front of the light guide plate 501. Further, in the state where the light is incident from the right end surface 501a, the portion of the light emitting region 506 emits light, but the portion other than the light emitting region 506 is maintained in a colorless and transparent state.

In the feature portion 75SG, the light emitting region 506 is formed in a concavo-convex state forming a substantially semicircular shape, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured by a molding method in which an uneven portion is provided on the back surface (rear surface) of 501. In addition, the reflective part is configured by a silk printing method in which reflective dots are printed on an acrylic plate with white ink, a sticking dot method in which the acrylic plate and the reflector are attached with a dot-shaped adhesive material, a grooving method, and the like. You may.

In the feature portion 75SG, the shape of each unevenness of the light emitting region 506 on the back surface (rear surface) of the light guide plate 501 is substantially a semicircular shape in a cross-sectional view, but the present invention is not limited to this. The cross-sectional shape of each unevenness of the light emitting region 506 can be variously deformed as long as it constitutes a reflecting surface capable of reflecting light toward the front (front surface), such as a substantially triangular shape.

The condenser lens 504 is formed in the shape of a long plate extending in the vertical direction by a translucent member such as acrylic or polycarbonate. On the surface of the condenser lens 504 on the light guide plate 501 side, a plurality of semicircular convex portions 504A that bulge toward the light guide plate 501 side when viewed from the front are continuously formed in the vertical direction. The condenser lens 504 is composed of a single member in which a plurality of convex portions 504A are integrally provided. Each convex portion 504A is formed one by one corresponding to each of the light guide plate LED 502.

The convex portion 504A is not limited to one-to-one correspondence with the light guide plate LED 502, and for example, one convex portion 504A may correspond to two or more light guide plate LEDs 502. Further, the condenser lens 504 is not limited to being composed of a single member in which a plurality of convex portions 504A are integrally provided, and a plurality of condenser lenses separately formed corresponding to the light guide plate LED 502. You may use it.

As shown in FIG. 10-6 (C), the front-rear width of the condenser lens 504 on the light guide plate 501 side is smaller than the front-rear width of the condenser lens 504 on the light guide plate LED 502 side. Further, since the front-rear width of the light guide plate 501 side of the condenser lens 504 is substantially the same as the front-rear width of the light receiving surface of the light guide plate 501, the light emitted from the condenser lens 504 is diffused in the front-rear direction. It is incident on the light guide plate 501 without any light leakage.

The front surface of the condenser lens 504 is a flat inclined surface that gradually inclines backward from the light guide plate LED 502 side toward the light guide plate 501 side, and the rear surface of the condenser lens 504 is a light guide plate from the light guide plate LED 502 side. It is a flat inclined surface that gradually inclines toward the front side toward the 501 side. That is, the condenser lens 504 is formed in a tapered shape in which the plate thickness gradually decreases from the light guide plate LED 502 side toward the light guide plate 501 side.

Further, a slight gap is provided between the condenser lens 504 and the light guide plate 501. For example, the gap between the gaps is such that the condenser lens 504 and the light guide plate 501 do not come into contact with each other even when vibration occurs during transportation or use of the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001. As a result, it is possible to prevent the condenser lens 504 and the light guide plate 501 from being scratched by the vibration generated during the transportation and use of the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001.

Next, the light guide state of the light emitted from the light guide plate LED 502 will be described. The emitted light emitted from each light guide plate LED 502 is incident on the condenser lens 504. Here, since the incident surface of the condenser lens 504 is formed in a curved shape so as to form a lens surface, the incident surface is incident on the condenser lens 504 even when the directivity of the light emitted from the light guide plate LED 502 is high. The light is diffused radially in the condensing lens 504 in the left-right direction. Then, the light incident on the condenser lens 504 is refracted to the right and emitted when passing through the inner curved lens surface.

As a result, even when the directivity of the light emitted from the light guide plate LED 502 is high, the light emitted from the light guide plate LED 502 can be diffused radially to some extent by the condenser lens 504, and the light emitting region in the light guide plate 501 Can be expanded. Further, since the light emitted from the condenser lens 504 is guided in the horizontal direction (because the radial spread is suppressed), only the portion corresponding to each light guide plate LED 502 can be emitted. Further, the light incident on the light guide plate LED 502 from the light guide plate LED 502 is collected toward a substantially central position in the front-rear direction while repeating total internal reflection in the front-rear direction, and finally the light guide plate of the light guide plate 504 of the light guide plate 504. It is emitted from the end face on the 501 side (the portion having the smallest front-rear width).

With such a configuration, the light from the light guide plate LED 502 can be collected and guided to the light guide plate 501 without being diffused in the front-rear direction. In particular, even when the front-rear width of the light emitting surface of the light guide plate LED 502 is larger than the front-rear width of the light guide plate LED 502 side of the condenser lens 504, the light from the light guide plate LED 502 is not diffused in the front-rear direction. Since it can be guided to 501, it is possible to prevent the light from the light guide plate LED 502 from being diffused to the surroundings.

When the light from the condenser lens 504 is guided into the light guide plate 501 and reaches the light emitting region 506, the light is reflected in the light emitting region 506 toward the front side (player's side). As a result, from the player's point of view, the light emitting region 506 of the light guide plate 501 emits light by reflected light, so that the region represented by halftone dots in FIG. 10-5 emits surface light on the front surface of the light guide plate 501. The figure will be displayed with.

As shown in FIG. 10-4, the image display device 5 is arranged in the back and the light guide plate device 500 is arranged in the front when viewed from the player (in the front-rear direction). From the player's point of view, the image display device 5 has a horizontally long rectangular shape. For example, the image display device 5 uses a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal panel. The image display device 5 is not limited to the liquid crystal display device, and an EL display device such as an organic EL display device or an inorganic EL display device may be used.

(1st production unit 300)
Next, the first effect unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-7 to 10-12. 10-7 is a front view showing the first effect unit, and (B) is a rear view. FIG. 10-8 is an exploded perspective view showing a state in which the configuration of the first effect unit is viewed diagonally from the front. 10-9 is a sectional view taken along the line CC of FIG. 10-7 (A), FIG. 10-9 is a sectional view taken along the line DD of FIG. 10-7 (A), and FIG. It is a cross-sectional view of EE of (A). 10-10 is a front view showing a base member, FIG. 10-10 is a front view showing an LED substrate, and FIG. 10C is a front view showing a cover member. 10-11 is a front view showing the first effect unit with the cover member removed, and FIG. 10-11 is a front view showing the first effect unit with the cover member attached. FIG. 10-12 is an enlarged view showing a main part of FIG. 10-11 (B).

As shown in FIGS. 10-7 to 10-9, the first effect unit 300 is arranged so as to cover the base member 301 and the front surface side of the base member 301, and is attached to the base member 301 by a plurality of screws N1. Mainly composed of a cover member 302 to be mounted and an LED substrate 303 attached to the front surface of the base member 301 by a plurality of screws N2, from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001, that is, from the player side facing the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001. It is provided so as to be visible through the glass window 50a and the board plate 200.

The base member 301 is formed of a non-transmissive synthetic resin material in a horizontally long shape when viewed from the front, and its surfaces (front-rear surface and peripheral surface) are black. The front surface of the base member 301 includes a flat portion 311 made of a flat surface, a horizontally long rectangular concave portion 312 formed in the lower part of the flat portion 311 and a rear wall portion 313A to be located slightly behind the flat portion 311. It has 313D and.

A plurality of trapezoidal convex portions 314A to 314E forming a part of the decorative pattern 331, which will be described later, are formed in the upper portion of the flat portion 311 in the longitudinal direction, and a rear wall is formed between the convex portions 314A to 314E. The parts 313A to 313D can be visually recognized. The rear wall portions 313A to 313D are formed so as to be inclined rearward toward the upper side (see FIG. 10-9 (B)). Further, a predetermined decorative pattern 341 is engraved on the front surface of the rear wall portions 313A to 313D.

As shown in FIG. 10-9, the recess 312 has a horizontally long rectangular shape in the front view, has a depth capable of accommodating the LED substrate 303, and is formed so as to be surrounded by the flat portion 311 in the front view. ing. Then, in the state where the LED board 303 is attached, the front surface of the LED board 303 and the flat portion 311 are substantially flush with each other, and only the first effect LED 304, which will be described later, is located in front of the flat portion 311. There is. Further, the recess 312 is formed with a plurality of vertically elongated heat dissipation holes 315 and an opening 316 for routing a cable (not shown) connected to the LED substrate 303 to the back side.

As shown in FIGS. 10-8 to 10-9, a plurality of first effect LEDs 304 and other electronic components (not shown) capable of irradiating light toward the front are mounted on the front surface of the LED substrate 303. A plurality of printed wirings 320 are formed (see the enlarged view of FIG. 10-10 (B)). On the other hand, on the back surface of the LED board 303, a board-side connector CN and electronic components (not shown) for connecting a cable (not shown) to the LED board 303 are mounted. Further, the surface of the LED substrate 303 (insulating portion on the front surface and the back surface excluding the printed wiring 320) is black.

The cover member 302 is formed of a translucent (transparent) synthetic resin material in a horizontally long shape in front view, and has a first translucent portion 321 corresponding to a part of a flat portion 311 and a recess 312 of the base member 301. It mainly has second translucent portions 322A and 322B corresponding to the first effect LED 304. Further, at positions corresponding to the convex portions 314A to 314E of the base member 301, a plurality of trapezoidal convex portions 324A to 324E are formed in the longitudinal direction.

As shown in FIG. 10-9, the front surface of the second translucent portions 322A and 322B protrudes forward from the front surface of the first translucent portion 321, and the concave portion 322D is formed on the back surface. The LED 304 for the first effect can be accommodated. Further, a light diffusing portion 322C composed of fine uneven portions is formed on the back surface of the second translucent portions 322A and 322B, so that the light from the rear first effect LED 304 can be diffused and emitted forward. ing. The uneven portion may be formed by, for example, sandblasting or diamond cutting, and the forming method, shape, and the like can be variously changed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (C), the first translucent portion 321 is provided with a plurality of decorative patterns 331 having a hexagonal front view. Specifically, one decorative pattern 331 forms a horizontally long rectangular shape in front view with a decorative portion 331A composed of a plurality of horizontal lines extending in the left-right direction and decorative portions 331B and 331C composed of inclined lines extending in the diagonally left and diagonally right directions. A plurality of decorative patterns 331 are continuously provided by having a decorative portion 331D and a decorative portion 331E having a triangular shape in a front view, and by sharing the decorative portions 331A to 331C with adjacent decorative patterns 331. ..

Further, in each of these decorative portions 331A to 331E, for example, the back surface (or front surface) of the cover member 302 may be sandblasted to form fine uneven portions, or a translucent sticker or the like may be attached. As a result, each of the decorative portions 331A to 331E looks milky white or translucent when visually recognized from the player side.

As shown in FIG. 10-11 (A), the LED substrate 303 as an electronic component having the first effect LED 304 is arranged on the front side of the base member 301, and the front side thereof is covered with the cover member 302. ing. However, since the cover member 302 is made of a translucent synthetic resin material, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the front surface of the base member 301 and the LED substrate 303 through the cover member 302. be.

Here, by arranging the same black base member 301 around (periphery) the black LED substrate 303, the LED substrate 303 is assimilated with the surrounding base member 301, and the LED substrate 303 and the cover member 302 are assimilated. The boundary part BD with is difficult to understand. That is, it becomes difficult to understand that the LED substrate 303 is provided on a part of the front surface of the base member 301, so that the LED substrate 303, which is an electronic component, becomes inconspicuous.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (B), when the cover member 302 is attached to the front side of the base member 301 with the LED substrate 303 arranged in the recess 312 of the base member 301, the base member 301 and the LED substrate are attached. The cover member 302 is positioned high so as to cover the front surface of the 303, and while it is easy for the player to visually recognize the front surface of the base member 301 and the LED substrate 303 through the first translucent portion 321. It is difficult for the player to visually recognize the first effect LED 304 through the second translucent portions 322A and 322B. Further, by arranging the milky white or translucent decorative portions 331A to 331E applied to the cover member 302 on the front side of the base member 301 and the LED substrate 303, the milky white or translucent on the front side of the black background. The decorative pattern 331 can be visually recognized.

As shown in FIG. 10-12, in a state where the cover member 302 is arranged on the front surface side of the base member 301, a predetermined decorative pattern 331 of the plurality of decorative patterns 331 (for example, the decorative patterns 331J to 331M in FIG. 10-12) Etc.) are formed (provided) so as to straddle the LED substrate 303 and the cover member 302 when visually recognized from the player side. Specifically, the decorative portions 331B and 331C composed of inclined lines are arranged so as to intersect the boundary portion BD between the LED substrate 303 and the cover member 302 facing in the left-right direction, and one decorative pattern 331 is two members (LEDs). Since it is provided so as to straddle the substrate 303 and the cover member 302), it looks as if one decorative pattern 331 is provided on one member. Therefore, the LED substrate 303 and the cover member 302 on the back side thereof It becomes difficult to recognize that is a separate member.

Further, since a part of the boundary portion BD between the LED substrate 303 and the cover member 302 is difficult to see from the player side due to the decorative portions 331B and 331C overlapping on the front side, the LED substrate 303 becomes inconspicuous. Since the decorative portions 331B and 331C are linear, even if they are arranged so as to overlap the front surface side of the boundary portion BD, the area overlapping with the boundary portion BD is small, but the decorative pattern 331 covers the LED substrate 303. Since it is formed over almost the entire front surface of the member 302, it becomes difficult to recognize that the LED substrate 303 and the cover member 302 are separate members.

Further, since the decorative portion 331A of each decorative pattern 331 is arranged substantially parallel to the boundary portion BD, the mode is similar to that of the boundary portion BD, so that it is difficult to distinguish the decorative portion 331A, and the decorative portion 331A is arranged on the front side of the boundary portion BD. In addition, in the case of milky white, which has a higher brightness than black, it is conspicuous, so that the LED substrate 303 is less conspicuous. By arranging the decorative portion 331A so as to overlap along the boundary portion BD, a part of the boundary portion BD may be difficult to see from the player side by the decorative portion 331A.

Further, these decorative portions 331A to 331C are formed in a linear shape like the printed wiring 320 provided on the LED substrate 303, and are arranged substantially parallel to a part of the printed wiring 320, whereby the printed wiring is printed. Since the wiring pattern and the mode of the 320 are similar (or common), it is difficult to distinguish them, so that the LED substrate 303 is not conspicuous.

Further, the decorative portions 331D and 331E are different in mode from the printed wiring 320 and the boundary portion BD, but are more conspicuous than the printed wiring 320 and the boundary portion BD because they are thicker and have a larger area than the printed wiring 320 and the boundary portion BD. Further, since a part of the printed wiring 320 is overlapped on the front side of the printed wiring 320, the printed wiring 320 becomes difficult to see, so that the LED substrate 303 becomes inconspicuous.

Further, on the front surface of each of the rear wall portions 313A to 313D of the base member 301, a decorative pattern 341 composed of vertically flattened hexagonal linear convex portions is provided so as to be visible from the player side. The decorative pattern 341 is similar (or common) to the wiring pattern of the printed wiring 320, so that the mode is similar to the wiring pattern of the printed wiring 320 even in the region of the base member 301 not covered by the cover member 302. Since the decorative pattern 341 can be formed, the LED substrate 303 becomes inconspicuous.

Further, the base member 301 has rear wall portions 313A to 313D as a predetermined region that can be visually recognized from the player side without passing through the cover member 302, and the rear wall portions 313A to 313D are provided on the cover member 302. Since the decorative pattern 341 as a predetermined decorative pattern having the same or similar aspect as the decorative pattern 331 is provided, it becomes difficult to understand that the base member 301 and the cover member 302 are different members, and thus the LED substrate. The 303 becomes less noticeable.

Further, since the LED substrate 303 is arranged in the recess 312 formed in the lower part of the base member 301, the LED substrate 303 is located below the upper region of the recess 312 in the base member 301, that is, at a position separated from the image display device 5. Since it is provided, it is located at a position away from the image display device 5 that the player pays attention to, so that it is less noticeable.

As described above, the predetermined decorative pattern 331 (for example, the decorative patterns 331J to 331M in FIG. 10-12) among the plurality of decorative patterns 331 is attached to the LED substrate 303 and the cover member 302 when visually recognized from the player side. By being provided so as to straddle the LED substrate 303, which is an electronic component, the LED substrate 303 becomes inconspicuous. Therefore, even electronic components such as the LED substrate 303, which should not be shown to the player from the viewpoint of appearance and design, can be provided on the front side which can be seen from the player side, so that the degree of freedom in design is high. Can be enhanced.

(Variable winning ball unit 700)
Next, the variable winning ball unit 700 will be briefly described with reference to FIGS. 10-13. 10-13 are a front view showing a variable winning ball unit in FIG. 10-13, and a cross-sectional view taken along the line FF in FIG. 10B.

As shown in FIG. 10-13, the variable winning ball unit 700 has a base member 701 attached to the board surface plate 200 from the front side and a cover member 702 provided on the front side of the base member 701, and the variable winning ball unit 700. The device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7 are integrally provided as a unit.

A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided in the upper right of the variable winning ball unit 700, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided in the lower left. Between, the game ball path 705A in which the game ball (game ball P) can enter the large winning opening of the special variable winning ball device 7, and the game ball (game ball) in the second starting winning opening of the variable winning ball device 6B. A game ball path 705B through which P) can enter is provided. Further, below the special variable winning ball device 7, an LED substrate 703 provided with a plurality of effect LEDs 704 capable of irradiating light toward the front is provided.

The base member 701 and the cover member 702 are made of a translucent synthetic resin material. Therefore, it is possible to visually recognize the game ball passing through the game ball paths 705A and 705B through the cover plate 702A from the player side.

(1st production unit 300 and variable winning ball unit 700)
Next, the first effect unit 300 and the variable winning ball unit 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-14 to 10-16. 10-14 are cross-sectional views showing the main parts of the first effect unit, and (C) and (D) are cross-sectional views showing the main parts of the variable winning ball unit. FIG. 10-15 is a diagram for comparing the first effect unit and the variable winning ball unit. FIG. 10-16 is a diagram for explaining similar colors.

First, as shown in FIG. 10-3, the first effect unit 300 and the variable winning ball unit 700 are arranged side by side at the lower position of the image display device 5, and when visually recognized from the player side, the first effect unit 300 and the variable winning ball unit 700 are arranged side by side. 1 The right end of the effect unit 300 is provided so as to overlap or be close to the left end of the variable winning ball unit 700. Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-4 and 10-13 (B), the front portion of the variable winning ball unit 700 is arranged on the front side of the board surface plate 200, while the first effect unit 300 is the board surface plate 200. It is located on the back side of.

As shown in FIGS. 10-14 (A) and 10-14 (B), the front-rear dimension L1A, which is the plate thickness dimension of the cover member 302 in the first translucent portion 321 of the first effect unit 300, is the second translucent portion 322A, 322B. It is longer than the front-rear dimension L1B, which is the plate thickness dimension of the cover member 302 in (L1A> L1B).

In the first translucent portion 321 of the cover member 302, among the light entering from the front in the direction (T direction) orthogonal to the front surface of the first transmissive portion 321, the transmittance of the light transmitted in the T direction is XA. %. Further, in the second translucent portions 322A and 322B of the cover member 302, among the light entering from the front in the direction (T direction) orthogonal to the front surface of the second transmissive portions 322A and 322B, the light is transmitted in the T direction. The light transmittance is XB%. That is, not all (100%) of the light that has entered the first translucent portion 321 and the second transmissive portions 322A and 322B from the front is transmitted in the T direction, and some of the light is reflected in the front surface. , It is emitted in a direction different from the T direction (so as to spread around) at the rear. In particular, the second translucent portions 322A and 322B have a light diffusing portion 322C formed of an uneven portion formed on the back surface, so that light is more easily transmitted in a direction different from the T direction than the first transmissive portion 321. , The transmittance of light in the T direction is lower than the transmittance of the first translucent portion 321 (transparency is low. XA%> XB%).

As shown in FIGS. 10-14 (C) and 10-14 (D), in the cover plate 702A, among the light entering from the front in the direction orthogonal to the front surface (T direction), the transmittance of the light transmitted in the T direction is Y. %. Here, the front-rear dimension L2 of the cover plate 702A is shorter than the front-rear dimensions L1A and L1B of the first translucent portion 321 and the second translucent portions 322A and 322B of the cover member 302 (L2 <L1A, L2 <L1B), the light incident from the front is guided in the T direction inside and is hard to be diffused to the surroundings until it is emitted from the back, and there is no light diffusing part like the second transmissive parts 322A and 322B. Since it is a flat plate, the light transmittance of the cover plate 702A in the T direction is higher than the light transmittance of the cover member 302 in the T direction (Y%> XA%, Y%> XB%).

In other words, since the translucency of the cover member 302 is lower than the translucency of the cover plate 702A, a predetermined portion (for example, a game) on the back surface side of the cover plate 702A is passed through the cover plate 702A from the player side. Rather than visually recognizing the ball P), the case where the player sees through the cover member 302 and visually recognizes a predetermined portion (for example, the first effect LED 304 or the LED substrate 303) on the back surface side of the cover member 302. However, since the visibility is low, the LED substrate 303 including the first effect LED 304, which is an electronic component, becomes inconspicuous.

As shown in FIG. 10-15, in the first effect unit 300, the LED substrate 303 including the first effect LED 304, which is an electronic component, and the base member 301 arranged around the LED substrate 303 have the same color (black). , The LED substrate 303 is less noticeable. Further, the front-rear dimensions L1A and L1B of the cover member 302 of the first production unit 300 are longer than the front-rear dimensions L2 of the cover plate 702A of the variable winning ball unit 700 (L1A, L1B> L2), and the first production unit. The light transmittance (XA%, XA%) of the cover member 302 of the 300 in the T direction is lower than the light transmittance (Y%) of the cover member 702 of the variable winning ball unit 700 in the T direction. (Y%> XA%, Y%> XB%), the LED substrate 303 is less noticeable.

Therefore, when the first effect unit 300 and the variable winning ball unit 700 provided at a position (right side) different from the first effect unit 300 are visually recognized from the player side, the cover member 702 is transparent. Since the visibility when the LED substrate 303 is visually recognized through the cover member 302 is lower than the visibility when the game ball P is visually recognized, the variable winning ball unit 700 located in the vicinity of the first effect unit 300. The LED substrate 303 arranged on the back side of the cover member 302, which is a translucent member, becomes more difficult to see. Further, the cover member 302 is arranged on the back side of the cover plate 702A, and the base member 301 and the LED substrate 303 are dark black, so that the LED substrate 303 becomes less noticeable.

Further, in the feature portion 75SG of the present embodiment, an embodiment in which the LED substrate 303, which is an electronic component, and the base member 301, which is a specific member arranged around the LED substrate 303, are of the same color (black) is illustrated, but the present invention illustrates the embodiment. The color is not limited to this, and the electronic component and the specific member may not be the same color, and may be, for example, similar colors or similar colors.

Color has three attributes: hue (hue), lightness (brightness), and saturation (vividness). 2. A combination of colors (adjacent colors) that have the same tone (hue group with the same brightness (brightness) and saturation (vividness)) but are adjacent to each other on the hue. 2. A combination of different tones but the same hue. Includes color combinations that differ only in lightness or saturation.

Here, an example of the above "1. Combination of colors having the same tone (hue group having the same brightness (brightness) and saturation (vividness)) but adjacent colors on the hue (adjacent colors)" is shown in FIG. 10-16. To explain based on this, when cyan (C), magenta (M), and yellow (Y), which are the three primary colors of the colorants, are arranged at an angle interval of 120 degrees in a predetermined number of hue circles (24 colors in this case). Each of the three colors is non-similar to each other. Colors having a hue difference in the range of 30 to 60 degrees in the angle of the color wheel are “similar colors” and are not limited to combinations of adjacent colors adjacent to each other on the color wheel.

For example, when cyan (C) is used as a reference color, colors belonging to the range of 30 degrees on the magenta (M) side and 30 degrees on the yellow (Y) side (60 degrees in total) are similar to cyan (C). When magenta (M) is used as the reference color, colors belonging to the range of 30 degrees on the cyan (C) side and 30 degrees on the yellow (Y) side (60 degrees in total) become similar colors to magenta (M), and yellow (M). When Y) is used as the reference color, the color belonging to the range of 30 degrees on the cyan (C) side and 30 degrees on the magenta (M) side (60 degrees in total) is a similar color of yellow (Y). Therefore, even when the number of colors in the color wheel is less than 24 colors or 24 colors or more, a combination of colors having a hue difference in the range of 30 to 60 degrees in terms of the angle of the color wheel may be referred to as "similar colors".

In addition, similar colors include warm colors such as red and yellow, which are chromatic colors that make you feel warm, and cool colors such as blue and purple, which are chromatic colors that make you feel cold. It is preferable to include a color combination contained in a neutral color which is a chromatic color located between a warm color and a cold color.

(2nd production unit 400)
Next, the second effect unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-17 to 10-19. 10-17 is a front view showing the second effect unit in FIG. 10-17, and FIG. 10-17 is a front view showing the second effect unit in a state where the cover member is removed. 10-18 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line GG of FIG. 10-17 (A), and FIG. 10B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line HH of FIG. 10-17 (A). 10-19 is a diagram for explaining the boundary between the base member and the LED substrate, and FIG. 10-19 is a diagram showing the configuration of the second effect unit.

As shown in FIGS. 10-17 and 10-18, the second effect unit 400 includes a base member 401, a cover member 402 arranged so as to cover the front surface side of the base member 401, and the front surface of the base member 401. It is mainly composed of an LED board 403 attached to the LED board 403 and an inner lens 405 arranged on the front side of the LED board 403. It is provided so as to be visible through the glass window 50a and the light guide plate 501 from the front of the pachinko machine, that is, from the player side facing the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001.

The base member 401 is formed of a non-transmissive synthetic resin material in a substantially half-moon shape when viewed from the front, and its surfaces (front-rear surface and peripheral surface) are white.

The LED substrate 403 has a substantially quadrangular shape in front view, and is attached to the front end of a boss projecting from the front surface of the base member 401. A plurality of second effect LEDs 404A and 404B and other electronic components (not shown) are mounted on the front surface of the LED substrate 403. Further, on the back surface of the LED substrate 403, a plurality of second effect LEDs 404C capable of irradiating light upward, a plurality of second effect LED 404D capable of irradiating light downward, and other electronic components (illustrated). (Omitted) is installed. The second effect LEDs 404A to 404D are angle-type LEDs capable of irradiating light in parallel or substantially parallel to the mounting surface of the LED substrate 403. Further, the surface of the LED substrate 403 (insulating portion excluding the printed wiring on the front surface and the back surface) is white.

The inner lens 405 is made of a translucent synthetic resin material, is formed in substantially the same shape as the LED substrate 403, and is arranged along the upper side of the front surface of the LED substrate 403 with a plurality of second effect LEDs 404A. It is arranged between a plurality of second effect LEDs 404B arranged along the lower side of the front surface of the LED substrate 403, and light from the second effect LED 404A is incident on the front end surface, and the light from the second effect LED 404B is incident on the front end surface. Light is incident on the rear end face.

As shown in FIG. 10-18 (A), on the back surface of the inner lens 405, the light incident from the second effect LEDs 404A and 404B is reflected forward by the reflecting portion 406 for reflecting the light incident forward. Then, the light is emitted forward substantially evenly from the entire front surface of the inner lens 405. Since the front surface of the inner lens 405 is a flat surface, it emits surface light like a light guide plate.

The reflecting portion 406 is formed in a concavo-convex state (rough surface) in which the cross-sectional view of the light guided through the inside of the inner lens 405 in the traveling direction forms a substantially triangular wave shape with a constant pitch. Specifically, it is configured by a molding method in which an uneven portion is formed on the back surface of the inner lens 405 by a stamper or injection. For example, a silk printing method in which reflective dots are printed on an acrylic plate with white ink, or an acrylic plate and reflection. The reflective portion may be formed by a sticking dot method in which a plate is attached with a dot-shaped adhesive material, a grooving method, or the like.

The cover member 402 has a box shape with a back opening made of a translucent (transparent) synthetic resin material, and is formed so as to cover the front side of the base member 401 and the LED substrate 403. At a position on the front surface of the cover member 402 corresponding to the LED substrate 403, a convex portion 410 having a slightly enlarged shape of the LED substrate 403 when viewed from the front is projected forward.

On the front surface of the convex portion 410, the decorative portion 420 composed of the letter "V" (logotype) is printed with a colored paint having translucency or a translucent sheet on which the letters are printed is attached. As a result, it is provided so that light can be transmitted. Further, a light diffusing portion 402A formed of a concavo-convex portion is formed on the back surface of the convex portion 410 so that the light from the inner lens 405 can be diffused and emitted forward.

In the upper region of the convex portion 410 on the back surface of the cover member 402, a plurality of convex strip portions 421A projecting to the back surface side are extended in the vertical direction at positions corresponding to the respective second effect LEDs 404C. Further, in the lower region of the convex portion 410 on the back surface of the cover member 402, a plurality of convex strip portions 421B projecting to the back surface side are extended in the vertical direction at positions corresponding to the respective second effect LEDs 404D. It should be noted that a light diffusing portion made of uneven portions may also be formed on the back surface of the cover member 402 where the convex portions 421A and 421B are not formed. Further, the cover member 402 is formed so as to incline rearward from the convex portion 410 toward the upper side and the lower side.

In the plurality of convex portions 421A and 421B, uneven portions are continuously formed on the rear end surfaces, and step portions 421C are formed at intermediate positions in the longitudinal direction, so that the convex portions 410 are directed upward and downward. By extending the light so as to incline to the rear side, the light emitted upward and downward from the second effect LEDs 404C and 404D can be received from these uneven portions and the stepped portion 421C, and also enters. The emitted light is diffused by the uneven portion and emitted forward.

In this way, in the second effect unit 400, when the second effect LEDs 404A and 404B emit light, the light from the second effect LEDs 404A and 404B is emitted forward by the inner lens 405 and the light emitted forward by the inner lens 405 is convex on the cover member 402. By being incident on the region corresponding to the portion 410, the entire front surface of the convex portion 410 including the decorative portion 420 emits surface light.

As shown in FIG. 10-19 (A), the LED substrate 403 as an electronic component having the second effect LEDs 404A to 404D is arranged on the front side of the base member 401, and the front side thereof is formed by the cover member 402. It is covered. However, since the cover member 402 is made of a translucent synthetic resin material, it is assumed that the light diffusing portion is formed on the cover member 402 in a portion other than the convex portions 421A and 421B from the player side. However, it is possible to visually recognize the front surface of the base member 401 and the LED substrate 403 through the portions other than the convex portions 421A and 421B.

Here, as shown in FIG. 10-19 (B), by arranging the same white base member 401 around (periphery) the white LED substrate 403, the LED substrate 403 and the surrounding base member 401 Assimilated, the boundary portion BD between the LED substrate 403 and the cover member 402 becomes difficult to understand. That is, it becomes difficult to understand that the LED substrate 403 is provided on a part of the front surface of the base member 401, so that the LED substrate 403, which is an electronic component, becomes inconspicuous.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-19 (A), the decorative portion 420 provided on the front surface of the convex portion 410 is a boundary between the LED substrate 403, which is an electronic component, and the base member 401 when visually recognized from the player side. It is provided at a position corresponding to a part of the upper side and the lower side in the portion BD. That is, since a part of the decorative portion 420 is arranged so as to hang (overlap) a part of the boundary portion BD on the front side of the boundary portion BD, a part of the boundary portion BD is arranged by the decorative portion 420. By making it difficult to see, the LED substrate 403 becomes inconspicuous. Therefore, even electronic components such as the LED board 403, which should not be shown to the player from the viewpoint of appearance and design, can be provided on the front side which can be seen from the player side, so that the degree of freedom in design is high. Can be enhanced.

Further, the decorative portion 420 is provided so that the area covering (overlapping) the front surface side of the boundary portion BD is larger than that of the above-mentioned decorative pattern 331, and the boundary portion BD is made difficult to see, so that the LED substrate 403 Is obscured.

In the present embodiment, the decorative portion 420 partially hangs (overlaps) at a position corresponding to a part of the upper side and the lower side of the boundary portion BD when visually recognized from the player side. The present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative portion 420 may be arranged at a position corresponding to all the portions of the boundary portion BD. It is preferable that the boundary portion BD is provided so as to overlap about 1/3 or more of the boundary portion BD.

Further, since the letter "V" is displayed as the logotype on the decorative portion 420, it becomes difficult for the player to pay attention to the logotype and be aware of the boundary portion BD between the LED substrate 403 and the base member 401. Therefore, the LED substrate 403 becomes inconspicuous.

In the present embodiment, a form in which the letter "V" indicating a big hit is applied as a logotype is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and "big hit", "BONUS", and "RUSH" are used. , Etc., characters indicating a variable display result, characters suggesting a big hit such as "heat", "extreme heat", "!!", and characters such as the model name, title, and the name of the character appearing in the game machine may be used. Further, not only characters but also decorations such as characters, symbols, patterns, patterns, and patterns may be displayed as decorations.

Further, the LED substrate 403 has a second effect LED 404A as a light emitting means capable of causing the decorative portion 420 to emit light, so that the decorative portion 420 stands out due to the light emission, so that the player can make the LED substrate 403 and the base member 401 emit light. Since it becomes difficult to be aware of the boundary portion BD with the LED substrate 403, the LED substrate 403 becomes inconspicuous.

Further, in the second effect LED 404A, the decorative portion 420 is provided so that the decorative portion 420 can emit surface light through the inner lens 405, so that the decorative portion 420 stands out due to the surface emission, so that the player can make the LED substrate 403. Since it becomes difficult to be aware of the boundary portion BD between the base member 401 and the base member 401, the LED substrate 403 becomes inconspicuous.

Further, in the present embodiment, an embodiment in which the decorative portion 420 is a single decorative portion composed of the letter "V" is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the convex portion 410 of the cover member 402 is not limited to this. When a plurality of decorative portions 420 are provided in the area of the cover member 402 and a plurality of predetermined decorative portions (for example, a pattern) having a mode different from that of the decorative portion 420 are provided in an area other than the convex portion 410 of the cover member 402, the plurality of decorations are provided. It is preferable that the number of portions is larger than that of a plurality of predetermined decorative portions. By doing so, the boundary portion BD between the LED substrate 403 and the base member 401 becomes difficult to see due to the plurality of decorative portions, and the number of the boundary portion BD becomes more conspicuous than the plurality of predetermined decorative portions provided in other areas. Therefore, the LED substrate 403 becomes inconspicuous.

In this case, it is sufficient that the plurality of decorative portions and the plurality of predetermined decorative portions have different modes. For example, the predetermined decorative portion may be an enlarged or reduced mode of the decorative portion, and the outer shape, form, and the like. Any one of the color, size, and the like may be different.

Further, the cover member 402 has a convex portion 410 which is a boundary corresponding region corresponding to the boundary portion BD between the LED substrate 403 and the base member 401, and a convex portion 410 which does not correspond to the boundary portion BD between the LED substrate 403 and the base member 401. It has a region other than the convex portion 410, and the translucency of the convex portion 410 may be lower than the translucency of the region other than the convex portion 410. By doing so, it becomes difficult for the player to see the boundary portion BD between the LED substrate 403 and the base member 401 through the convex portion 410, so that the LED substrate 403 becomes inconspicuous.

(3rd production unit 600 and 4th production unit 800)
Next, the third effect unit 600 and the fourth effect unit 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-20 to 10-26. 10-20 is a front view showing a third effect unit and a fourth effect unit in FIG. 10-20. 10-21 is a sectional view taken along line I-I of FIG. 10-20, and FIG. 10-B is a sectional view taken along line JJ of FIG. 10-20. 10-22 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line KK of FIG. 10-20. FIG. 10-23 is an explanatory diagram showing a visual state of the third effect unit and the fourth effect unit. FIG. 10-24 is a diagram showing the configurations of the third effect unit and the fourth effect unit. FIG. 10-25 is a diagram showing an effect mode when the third effect unit and the fourth effect unit emit light. 10-26 are schematic front views showing a state in which the third effect unit is located at the origin position, and FIG. 10-26 is a schematic front view showing a state in which the third effect unit is located at the effect position.

(Third production unit 600)
As shown in FIGS. 10-20, 10-21 (A) and 10-26, the third effect unit 600 is a cover member arranged so as to cover the base member 601 and the front surface side of the base member 601. FIG. 10-26 (A) shows a light emitting effect unit 630 and a light emitting effect unit 630 including an LED substrate 603 attached to the front surface of the base member 601 and an inner lens 605 arranged on the front surface side of the LED substrate 603. ) And the effect position shown in FIG. 10-26 (B), the effect motor 631 (see FIG. 10-2), which is a drive source capable of moving in the vertical direction, and the effect motor 631. It has a power transmission member 632 for transmitting power to the light emitting effect unit 630, and as shown in FIG. 10-20, in the upper part of the area surrounded by the center decorative frame 51, in front of the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001. That is, it is provided so as to be visible through the glass window 50a and the light guide plate 501 from the player side facing the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001.

The base member 601 is formed of a non-translucent synthetic resin material in a substantially trapezoidal shape in front view, and its surfaces (front-rear surface and peripheral surface) are white.

The LED substrate 603 has a substantially trapezoidal shape in front view, and is attached to the front end of a vertical wall projecting from the front peripheral edge of the base member 601. A plurality of third effect LEDs 604A, 604B and other electronic components (not shown) are mounted on the front surface of the LED substrate 603. The third effect LEDs 604A and 604B can irradiate light toward the front. Further, the surface of the LED substrate 603 (insulating portion excluding the printed wiring on the front surface and the back surface) is white. The cable C connecting the LED board 603 and the effect control board 12 is wired along the power transmission member 632 (see FIGS. 10-26).

The inner lens 605 is made of a translucent synthetic resin material, is formed in substantially the same shape as the LED substrate 603, and has a plurality of third effect LEDs 604A and 604B arranged on the front surface of the LED substrate 603 from the front side. Arranged to cover.

As shown in FIG. 10-21 (A), on the front and back surfaces of the inner lens 605, the light from the third effect LEDs 604A and 604B arranged on the back side is diffused and emitted toward the front. A light diffusing portion 605A composed of an uneven portion is provided so as to emit light from the surface.

The cover member 602 has a box shape with a back opening made of a translucent (transparent) synthetic resin material, and is formed so as to cover the front side of the base member 601 and the LED substrate 603.

On the front surface of the cover member 602, a decorative portion 620 composed of the characters (logotype) of "XXX" is printed with a colored paint having a translucent color or a translucent sheet on which the characters are printed is attached. As a result, it is provided so that light can be transmitted. Further, a light diffusing portion 602A formed of an uneven portion is formed on the back surface of the cover member 602 so that the light from the inner lens 605 can be diffused and emitted forward.

In the present embodiment, a form in which the character "XXX" indicating a big hit is applied as a logotype is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the model name, title, and appearance of the gaming machine appear. Characters such as a character's name, characters indicating a variable display result such as "big hit", "BONUS", and "RUSH", and characters suggesting a big hit such as "heat", "super heat", and "!!" may be used. Further, not only characters but also decorations such as characters, symbols, patterns, patterns, and patterns may be displayed as decorations.

In this way, in the third effect unit 600, when the third effect LEDs 604A and 604B emit light, the light emitted forward from the third effect LEDs 604A and 604B through the inner lens 605 is further covered with the cover member 602. The entire front surface of the cover member 602 including the decorative portion 620 emits light by being diffused through and emitted forward.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-20, the plurality of third effect LEDs 604A are arranged along the peripheral edge of the character "XXX" constituting the decorative portion 620, and the plurality of third effect LEDs 604B are decorative. It is arranged at a position that does not correspond to the portion 620. By arranging the plurality of third effect LEDs 604A along the periphery of the characters "XXX" constituting the decorative portion 620 in this way, when the third effect LED 604A emits light, the "XXX" Since the peripheral edge of the character is lit, the shape of the decorative portion 620 can be easily recognized.

Further, the power transmission member 632, which forms a part of the power transmission member that transmits power to the light emitting effect unit 630, is rotatably supported by a rotation axis having one end facing the front-rear direction, and emits light at the other end. Although it is an arm member provided with the effect unit 630, the power transmission member can be changed in various ways, and if the power can be transmitted so that the light emission effect unit 630 can be moved in the vertical direction, a rack gear, a pinion gear, or the like can be used. There may be.

(4th production unit 800)
As shown in FIGS. 10-20 and 10-21 (B), the fourth effect unit 800 includes a base member 801 and a cover member 802 arranged so as to cover the front surface side of the base member 801 and a base member. It is mainly composed of an LED substrate 803 attached to the front surface of the 801 and an inner lens 805 arranged on the front surface side of the LED substrate 803, and as shown in FIG. 10-20, the area surrounded by the guide rails 211. In the upper left, the front of the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001, that is, the player side facing the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001 is provided so as to be visible through the glass window 50a and the board plate 200.

The base member 801 is formed of a non-translucent synthetic resin material in a box shape having a front opening, and a part of the peripheral edge thereof is formed in an arc shape along the guide rail 211. The surfaces (front and rear surfaces and peripheral surfaces) are white.

The LED substrate 803 is formed so as to have a smaller front view shape than the base member 801 and is attached to the front end of a boss (not shown) erected on the front surface of the base member 801. A plurality of fourth effect LEDs 804 and other electronic components (not shown) are mounted on the front surface of the LED substrate 803. The fourth effect LED 804 is an angle type LED capable of irradiating light in parallel or substantially parallel to the mounting surface of the LED substrate 803, and a plurality of the fourth effect LED 804 are arranged along the peripheral edge portion on the front surface of the LED substrate 803. Further, the surface of the LED substrate 803 (insulating portion excluding the printed wiring on the front surface and the back surface) is white.

The inner lens 805 is made of a translucent synthetic resin material, and is placed in a region surrounded by a plurality of fourth effect LEDs 804 on the front surface of the LED substrate 803.

As shown in FIG. 10-21 (B), the back surface of the inner lens 805 is reflected forward by a reflecting unit 806 for reflecting the light incident from the fourth effect LED 804 toward the front. It is emitted forward substantially evenly from the entire front surface of the inner lens 805. Since the front surface of the inner lens 805 is a flat surface, it emits surface light like a light guide plate.

The cover member 802 is formed of a translucent (transparent) synthetic resin material, and is formed so as to cover the front side of the base member 801 and the LED substrate 803. Specifically, the cover member 802 does not cover the front end of the standing wall 801A of the portion of the standing wall erected on the front peripheral edge of the base member 801 along the guide rail 211, and the standing wall 801B other than the portion along the guide rail 211. It covers the front end. Further, a light diffusing portion 802A formed of an uneven portion is formed on the back surface of the cover member 802 so that the light from the inner lens 805 can be diffused and emitted forward.

In this way, in the fourth effect unit 800, when the fourth effect LED 804 emits light, the light emitted forward from the fourth effect LED 804 through the inner lens 805 further passes through the cover member 802. By being diffused and emitted forward, the entire front surface of the cover member 802 emits surface light.

Next, the third effect unit 600 and the fourth effect unit 800 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 10-24, in the third effect unit 600 and the fourth effect unit 800, the surfaces of the base members 601, 801 and the LED substrates 603 and 803 are white, which are the same color, and these base members 601, The front side of the 801 and the LED substrate 603 and 803 is covered with a transparent cover member 602 and 802, and the light emitting effect body that emits light on the front surface when the third effect LED 604A and 604B and the fourth effect LED 804 are turned on. Has been done.

As shown in FIGS. 10-20 and 10-21 (A), the LED substrate 603 as an electronic component having the third effect LEDs 604A and 604B is arranged on the front side of the base member 601 and the front side thereof is covered. It is covered with a member 602. However, since the cover member 602 is made of a translucent synthetic resin material, even if the light diffusing portion 602A is formed on the cover member 602, the cover member 602 can be seen through from the player side. Although it is possible to visually recognize the back side, an inner lens 605 having a light diffusing portion 605A formed on the front and rear surfaces is provided on the back side so as to cover the LED substrate 603 from the front side. Although it is possible to visually recognize the front surface of the LED substrate 603, it is extremely difficult to visually recognize the front surface.

Here, as shown in FIG. 10-21 (A), the vertical wall of the same white base member 601 is arranged around (periphery) the white LED substrate 603, so that the LED substrate 603 is a base member around the white LED substrate 603. Assimilated with 601 it is difficult to understand the boundary portion BD between the LED substrate 603 and the cover member 602. That is, since it is difficult to understand that the LED substrate 603 is provided on the base member 601, the LED substrate 603, which is an electronic component, is less noticeable.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 10-20 and 10-21 (B), the LED substrate 803 as an electronic component having the fourth effect LED 804 is arranged on the front side of the base member 801 and is arranged on the front side thereof. Is covered with a cover member 802. However, since the cover member 802 is made of a translucent synthetic resin material, even if the light diffusing portion 802A is formed on the cover member 802, the cover member 802 is transparent from the player side. It is possible to visually recognize the front surface of the base member 801 and the LED substrate 803.

Here, as shown in FIG. 10-21 (B), by arranging the same white base member 801 around (periphery) the white LED substrate 803, the LED substrate 803 becomes a base member 801 around the white LED substrate 803. Assimilated, the boundary portion BD between the LED substrate 803 and the cover member 802 becomes difficult to understand. That is, it becomes difficult to understand that the LED substrate 803 is provided on a part of the front surface of the base member 801. Therefore, the LED substrate 803, which is an electronic component, becomes inconspicuous.

However, the fourth effect LED 804 is an angle type LED that injects light from the side end surface of the inner lens 805, and is arranged along the peripheral edge of the LED substrate 803, so that the LED including the fourth effect LED 804 is included. Since the front side of the front peripheral edge of the substrate 803 is not covered with the inner lens 805, and the inner lens 805 has a smaller area where the reflecting portion and the light diffusing portion are formed than the inner lens 605, the player The visibility when the LED substrate 803 including the 4th effect LED 804 is visually recognized through the inner lens 805 from the side is the LED substrate including the 3rd effect LEDs 604A and 604B through the inner lens 605 from the player side. It is higher than the visibility when the 603 is visually recognized. That is, the LED substrate 803 is more conspicuous than the LED substrate 603.

Here, as shown in FIG. 10-24, the light emitting effect unit 630 of the third effect unit 600 is larger than the LED substrate 803 of the fourth effect unit 800 when visually recognized from the player side (see FIG. 10-20). ), And the arrangement position of the front surface in the front-rear direction is in front of the arrangement position of the front surface of the fourth effect unit 800 (on the player side) (see FIGS. 10-22 and 10-23), and further, the fourth While the light emitting mode of the effect unit 800 by the fourth effect LED 804 is surface emission, the light emission mode of the third effect unit 600 by the third effect LEDs 604A and 604B is spotlight (see FIG. 10-25). In FIG. 10-25, the backgrounds of the third effect unit 600 and the fourth effect unit 800 are shown in black for convenience of explaining the light emitting mode.

As described above, the light emitting effect unit 630 of the third effect unit 600 is larger than the LED substrate 803 of the fourth effect unit 800 when visually recognized from the player side, is located close to the player, and emits light with strong light. Therefore, the visibility when visually recognized from the player side is considered to be higher than that of the fourth effect unit 800. That is, the third effect unit 600, which is an effect means having higher visibility when viewed from the player side than the fourth effect unit 800, is provided at a position near the fourth effect unit 800. Since the third effect unit 600 is more conspicuously attracting the attention of the player than the four effect unit 800, the LED substrate 803, which is an electronic component of the fourth effect unit 800, is less conspicuous.

In the present embodiment, the light emitting effect unit 630 of the third effect unit 600 is larger than the LED substrate 803 of the fourth effect unit 800 when visually recognized from the player side, and is located close to the player. The present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to the third effect. The light emitting effect unit 630 of the unit 600 is visible because at least one of the size when viewed from the player side, the position with respect to the player, and the light emitting mode is different from the LED substrate 803 of the fourth effect unit 800. Should be high.

Further, the front surface of the light emitting effect unit 630 of the third effect unit 600 as an effect means may be colored with a color having higher visibility than the surface color of the LED substrate 803, or a decorative part having a color having high visibility may be provided. By using the cover member 602 molded in a color having high visibility, the visibility of the light emitting effect unit 630 may be easily enhanced. Further, the visibility of the light emitting effect unit 630 may be easily enhanced by the light emitting mode (for example, lighting color, lighting mode, brightness, etc.) of the third effect LEDs 604A and 604B.

Further, as the effect means, an embodiment in which the light emitting effect unit 630 of the third effect unit 600, which can emit light by the light emitting means and can be operated by the effect motor 631, is applied has been exemplified, but the present invention is limited thereto. It may be a light emitting means (lamp unit or the like) provided around the fourth effect unit 800 in the gaming machine frame 3, or an effect means that does not emit light by the light emitting means, or may be a predetermined drive source. It may be an effect unit that does not operate and is fixed at a predetermined position.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-23, a protruding portion 3A (eaves) protruding forward from the gaming board 2 and the glass window 50a is formed on the upper front surface of the gaming machine frame 3. The protruding portion 3A is formed above the game area Y so as not to obstruct the visual recognition of the game ball passing through the upper part of the game area Y. When the game machine 75SG001 is installed on the game island of the game field, the area E1 below the protrusion 3A (the area indicated by the halftone dots in the figure) is shaded by the outside light of the game field blocked by the protrusion 3A. It gets dark.

Therefore, since the third effect unit 600 and the fourth effect unit 800 are provided at positions corresponding to the area E1 in the upper part of the game area Y, the LED substrates 603 and 803 are easily mixed with the shadow of the protrusion 3A. So it becomes less noticeable.

Further, above the LED boards 603 and 803, a protruding portion 3A that protrudes toward the player from the LED boards 603 and 803 is provided, and the protruding portion 3A is larger than the LED boards 603 and 803 ( (See FIG. 10-23), the LED substrates 603 and 803 become shadows of the protrusions 3A and become inconspicuous.

Further, the LED substrates 603 and 803 and the base members 601, 801 have been exemplified in the form of being white, but the present invention is not limited to this, and these may be dark colors (for example, black), as described above. By doing so, the LED substrates 603 and 803 and the base members 601, 801 are easily mixed with the shadow of the protruding portion 3A, so that they are less noticeable.

In the present embodiment, as a protrusion protruding toward the player above the electronic component and the specific member, a protrusion 3A protruding toward the player above the LED substrates 603 and 803 is applied. Although exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the protruding portion is not limited to the protruding portion projecting from a part of the game machine frame 3, for example, the game board 2 or the game. It may be composed of other gaming devices (for example, a winning ball device) or a directing device provided in the area Y. Further, the protruding portion 3A is not only fixed to the front surface of the gaming machine frame 3, but also operates from the origin position to the protruding position at a predetermined timing, so that the player can move above the electronic parts and the specific member. It may be a protruding portion protruding to the side.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-26, the light emitting region 506 of the light guide plate 501 is when the light emitting effect unit 630 and the power transmission member 632 of the third effect unit 600 operating on the back side of the light guide plate 501 move. It is formed so as to overlap most of the moving region E2 (the region surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line in FIGS. 10-26) in the front-rear direction.

Specifically, the moving area E2 of the light emitting effect unit 630 and the power transmission member 632 is an area in which the light emitting effect unit 630 moves from the origin position to the effect position, and is an area including the origin position and the effect position. When light is incident on the right end surface 501a of the light guide plate 501, the light emitting region 506 is in a state of emitting light, and the display image of the rear image display device 5, the light emitting effect unit 630, and the power transmission member 632 are displayed from the player side. It becomes difficult or invisible to see through 501. That is, the effect control CPU 120 lights the light guide plate LED 502 to emit light in a light emitting region during a moving period in which the light emitting effect unit 630 and the power transmission member 632 are moved from at least the origin position to the effect position or an effect period located in the effect position. By executing the light emitting effect of causing the 506 to emit light, the light emitting effect unit 630 and the power transmission member 632 become difficult to see or invisible through the light guide plate 501 from the player side, so that the power is transmitted during the moving period and the effect period. It is possible to prevent the cable C (electronic component) or the like provided along the member 632 from being conspicuous.

Further, when the light guide plate LED 502 is turned off after the light emitting effect unit 630 is moved to the effect position and the light emitting effect of the light emitting region 506 is completed, the power transmission member 632, the cable C, etc. can be visually recognized, but the light emitting effect unit By turning on the third effect LEDs 604A and 604B of the 630 to make the light emitting effect unit 630 stand out, the power transmission member 632 and the cable C can be made inconspicuous.

Further, the electronic components (for example, the LED board 603 and the cable C) provided so as to be operable are made visible to the player during the waiting period or the moving period waiting at the origin position. However, it is preferable that the player makes it difficult or invisible from the player side, at least during the production period located at the production position. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the electronic components from being conspicuous during the production period that the player pays attention to.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001 of the feature portion 75SG of the present embodiment is
Electronic components (for example, LED substrates 303, 403, 603, 803) provided so as to be visible to the player, and
Specific members (for example, base members 301, 401, 601, 801) provided around the electronic component and formed in a color similar to that of the electronic component, and
A translucent member (for example, a cover member 302, 402, 602, 802) which is a translucent member and is provided so that the player can visually see the electronic component and the specific member through the member.
It is characterized by having.
By doing so, even if the electronic components are arranged so as to be visible to the player, the electronic components are less noticeable due to the specific members of the same color, so that the degree of freedom in design can be increased.
The electronic component and the specific member can be changed to any color as long as they have similar colors. Further, as in the above embodiment, the electronic component and the specific member have the same color (for example, black and black, white and white, etc.).

(Explanation of deformation and application of feature 75SG)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001 described above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

For example, in the feature portion 75SG of the above-described embodiment, light emitting diodes such as the first effect LED 304, the second effect LEDs 404A to 404D, the third effect LEDs 604A, 604B, and the fourth effect LED 804 are provided as electronic components. The embodiment in which the LED substrates 303, 403, 603, and 803 are applied has been illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a circuit board without a light emitting diode (main substrate 11 not for production, production). (Including control board 12 and relay board, etc.), electronic components such as sensors, solenoids, motors, connectors, cables (wiring), and boards and members for fixing these.

Further, in the feature portion 75SG of the above-described embodiment, a mode in which the base members 301, 401, 601 and 801 for arranging the LED substrates 303, 403, 603 and 803 as electronic components are applied as specific members is exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and is not limited to a member constituting a part of a unit (device) for arranging or accommodating an electronic component as described above, but is a member provided around the electronic component. If there is, a different member (for example, a member forming a part of another unit, a game board 2 or a game machine frame 3) provided separately from the unit (device) for arranging or accommodating the electronic component. It may be a member that constitutes a part, etc.).

Further, in the feature portion 75SG of the above-described embodiment, a mode in which cover members 302, 402, 602, 802 forming a part of a unit (device) for arranging or accommodating electronic components are applied as a light-transmitting member has been exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and is a member having translucency even if it is not a member constituting a part of a unit (device) for arranging or accommodating an electronic component as described above. If the member is provided so that the player can visually recognize the electronic component and the specific member through the member, a different member (for example, for example) provided separately from the unit (device) for arranging or accommodating the electronic component. It may be a member forming a part of another unit, a member forming a part of the game board 2 or the game machine frame 3, and the like).

Further, in the feature portion 75SG of the above-described embodiment, an embodiment in which the electronic component and the specific member provided around the electronic component have the same color (same color) is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited thereto. However, as long as the electronic component and the specific member provided around the electronic component have the same color as described above, the electronic component and the specific member are not limited to those having the same color.

Further, in the feature portion 75SG of the above-described embodiment, the base members 301, 401, 601, 801 as specific members partially overlap on the back side of the LED substrates 303, 403, 603, 803 as electronic components. Although the embodiment in which the non-overlapping portions are arranged around the LED substrates 303, 403, 603, and 803 is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the electronic component and the specific member are described from the player side. It may be arranged side by side at least one of the upper side, the lower side, the left side, and the right side without overlapping a part when visually recognized. Further, if the specific member is arranged and visible around the electronic component when visually recognized from the player side, the electronic component and the specific member are arranged apart from each other in the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, the front-rear direction, and the like. It may have been done.

The specific member provided around the electronic component includes a specific member provided at a position visible from the player side together with the electronic component, and is arranged, for example, within a range of about 5 cm from the electronic component. Specific members may be included.

Further, in the feature portion 75SG of the above-described embodiment, a mode in which a cover member 302, 402, 602, 802 made of a translucent synthetic resin material is applied as a translucent member has been illustrated. The material is not limited, and any material may be used as long as it is a translucent member, and may be a glass material or the like. Further, as long as the player can see the electronic component and the specific member through the member, the electronic component and the specific member may be transparent or translucent, or may be colored in a predetermined color. Further, the light transmittance does not have to be 100% or a value close to 100%.

Further, in the feature portion 75SG of the above-described embodiment, the cover members 302, 402, 602, 802 as the translucent members are the LED substrates 303, 403, 603, 803 as electronic components by the player through the member. And, a form in which a part or the whole area of the base member 301, 401, 601, 801 as a specific member can be visually recognized has been illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and at least a part of the electronic component is the member. If at least a part of the specific member is not visible through the member, the electronic component and the specific member can be visually recognized together. You just have to.

Further, in the feature portion 75SG of the above-described embodiment, the cover members 302, 402, 602, 802 as the translucent members are the LED substrates 303, 403, 603, 803 as electronic components, and the base member 301 as a specific member. Although the embodiment in which the electronic components and the specific members are arranged along the front side of the 401, 601, 801 is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the electronic components and the specific members are not necessarily arranged along the electronic components and the specific members. It does not have to be. That is, the electronic component or the specific member may be arranged in a state of being obliquely inclined with respect to the translucent member.

Further, in the feature portion 75SG of the above-described embodiment, an embodiment in which the entire surface surface of the LED substrates 303, 403, 603, 803 and the base members 301, 401, 601, 801 is set to a predetermined color (black or white) is exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the color of the portion of the electronic component and the specific member that can be seen through the translucent member (for example, the front color of the electronic component and the specific member) is a similar color. If so, the entire surface does not necessarily have to be a similar color. Further, the colors of these electronic parts and the specific member may be colored at the time of molding the member, may be colored by painting or printing after molding, or may be colored by attaching a sticker or the like to a predetermined color. You may have.

Further, in the feature portion 75SG of the above-described embodiment, an embodiment in which the electronic component and the specific member provided around the electronic component have the same color (same color) is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. Not, for example, a predetermined electron provided so as to be difficult to see or invisible to the player, separately from the LED substrate 303, 403, 603, 803 as an electronic component and the base member 301, 401, 601, 801 as a specific member. Parts (for example, first start port switch 22A, second start port switch 22B, solenoids 81, 82, etc.) and predetermined members (for example, first start port switch 22A, second) provided around the predetermined electronic component. In those provided with a start port switch 22B, a member for fixing the solenoids 81, 82, etc.), predetermined electronic components (for example, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, the solenoids 81, 82, etc.) are , It is preferable that the color is not similar to that of a predetermined member (for example, a member for fixing the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, the solenoids 81, 82, etc.).

As described above, the predetermined electronic components such as the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the solenoids 81 and 82 provided so as to be difficult to see or invisible to the player are in balance with the predetermined members for fixing them. Since a general-purpose product can be used without considering the above, the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

Further, by setting the color of the specific member to be a color having the same hue and having either higher lightness or saturation of the color of the electronic component, the specific member has higher visibility than the electronic component. Electronic components can be made relatively inconspicuous.

Further, by coloring the translucent member with a color similar to that of the electronic component and the specific member, the translucent member is assimilated with the electronic component and the specific member, so that the electronic component can be made less noticeable.

Further, for example, when an electronic component such as a black LED substrate is arranged on the right side of the game board 2, it is provided around the electronic component on the left side of the game board 2 on the opposite side of the image display device 5. By providing the outer rail decoration 212 of the same color or the same color as the electronic component so as to be visible to the player separately from the specific member, the black members are arranged in a well-balanced manner on the left and right sides of the image display device 5. As a result, the player is less likely to feel uncomfortable, so that the electronic components can be made less noticeable. In this way, the electronic component can be made less noticeable by arranging the member having the same color or the same color as the electronic component at a distant position separately from the specific member.

Further, the configuration related to the feature unit 75SG may be appropriately combined with a part or all of the configurations related to the feature unit 91AK, 92AK, 01AK, 02AK and the like. For example, when the effect described by the feature units 91AK, 92AK, 01AK, and 02AK can be executed by the image display device 5, the first effect unit 300 described by the feature unit 75SG provided around the image display device 5 Since the electronic components of the second effect unit 400, the third effect unit 600, and the fourth effect unit 800 are less noticeable, it is possible to make the above effect look suitable.

Specifically, for example, as described with reference to FIGS. 9-9 to 9-11, the normal drawing effect NOR is executed even in a period other than the effect execution period D0 among the plurality of effect execution periods D0 to D4. In this case, it is possible to execute a light emitting effect using the first light emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 or other decorative LED, and the light emitting effect is executed when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed in the effect execution period D2 or the like. In the case of controlling so as not to be performed, the periphery (for example, the game effect lamp 9) of the electronic component (for example, LED substrate 303, 403, 603, 803) and the specific member (for example, the base member 301, 401, 601, 801) It may be controlled so that the light emitting effect using the second light emitting member provided at a position (closer to the above) is not executed (or the amount of light is lower than the amount of light of the game effect lamp 9 or the like). By doing so, when the light emitting effect using the first light emitting member is restricted, the light emitting effect using the second light emitting member is executed, so that the electronic component or the specific member is prevented from becoming conspicuous. can.

Further, among the second light emitting members provided around the electronic component and the specific member, the decorative portion 420 of the translucent member arranged on the front side of the electronic component and the specific member can be surface-emitted. For a light emitting member such as LED404A that is inconspicuous even if light emission is continued, the amount of light may be maintained (execution is not limited) even when the light emitting effect using the first light emitting member is controlled so as not to be executed. .. By doing so, it is possible to make the electronic components and specific members inconspicuous without excessively reducing the effect of the effect.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1,75SG001 is illustrated as an example of the gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a gaming ball having a predetermined number of balls can be used. The number of rented balls that are circulated inside the game machine and lent out in response to the player's request for rent and the number of prize balls given in response to winning are added, while the number of game balls used in the game The present invention can also be applied to a so-called enclosed gaming machine in which is subtracted and stored. In these enclosed gaming machines, points and points are given to the player instead of the game ball, and the points and points given are given to the game value.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a spherical game ball (pachinko ball) has been applied as an example of the game medium, but the present invention is not limited to the spherical game medium, and for example, a non-spherical game such as a medal. It may be a medium.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine is applied as an example of the gaming machine, but for example, the game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the game value. At the same time, one game is completed by deriving the variable display result to the variable display device capable of variablely displaying a plurality of types of symbols that can be identified by each, and according to the variable display result derived to the variable display device. It can also be applied to slot machines that can generate prizes.

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to an enclosed gaming machine, a slot machine, or the like in which a gaming medium is enclosed and a score is given based on the occurrence of a prize. Further, the game machine capable of playing a game may be at least one that plays a game, and may be a general game machine as well as a pachinko game machine or a slot machine.

The present invention is not limited to those described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiment examples described later.

Further, all or a part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modification, and the configurations shown in the following embodiment and each modification may be arbitrarily combined.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiment and the following-described embodiment disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and are not considered to be restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention also performs variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and when a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed, the player can see it. A gaming machine (eg, pachinko gaming machine 75SG001) that can be controlled to an advantageous advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state), and is an electronic component (eg, LED substrate 303, 403, 603) that is visibly provided to the player. , 803), a specific member (for example, base member 301, 401, 601, 801) provided around the electronic component and formed in a color similar to that of the electronic component, and a member having translucency. A translucent member (for example, cover member 302, 402, 602, 802) provided so that the player can visually see the electronic component and the specific member through the member, and a display means (for example, an image display device 5). ) And a state control means that can control a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-17, step 100 IWS166 in the game control computer 100, A part for executing step 100IWS173, a part for executing step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 11-19) and an update means capable of updating numerical information based on the execution of variable display. (For example, as shown in FIG. 11-13, a portion that executes step 100 IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the translucent member (for example, the cover member 302) is the electronic component (for example, the electronic component). It has a decorative pattern (eg, decorative pattern 331) formed so as to straddle the LED substrate 303) and the specific member (for example, the base member 301) (see FIG. 10-12), and the electronic component (for example, LED). The substrate 303) is provided at a position farther from the display means than the specific member (for example, the upper part of the base member 301), and the state control means corresponds to a special number of numerical information updated by the update means. When the special condition is satisfied by becoming a specific value, the special state can be controlled (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-13, a portion for executing step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 in the game control computer 100, As shown in FIGS. 11-17, step 100 IWS170 and step 100 in the game control microcomputer 100. The updating means updates the numerical information between the case where the variable display of the first identification information is executed and the case where the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, FIG. As shown in 11-13, a gaming machine (a portion for executing step 100 IWS71 in the gaming control microcomputer 100) can be mentioned.

According to such a configuration, even if the electronic components are arranged so as to be visible to the player, the electronic components are less noticeable due to the decorative pattern, so that the degree of freedom in design can be increased. Further, since the electronic component is located at a position away from the display means that the player pays attention to, it becomes less noticeable. In addition, the relief of the player can be preferably realized. Specifically, even if the game state changes and the variable display of any identification information is executed, the numerical information is continuously updated, so that the player can be easily rescued and the motivation for the game is increased. Can be done.

That is, it is possible to make the gaming machine look good while increasing the degree of freedom in design, and numerical information is used depending on whether the variable display of the first identification information is executed or the variable display of the second identification information is executed. Is updated, for example, the numerical information reaches a special number of times compared to the case where the numerical information is updated only when either the variable display of the first identification information or the variable display of the second identification information is executed. Since it becomes easier for the player to be rescued, the motivation for the game can be increased. That is, it is possible to provide a game machine that looks good when installed in a game hall and can improve the player's motivation to play.

Further, as an example of the form of the gaming machine that can increase the degree of freedom in design and can suitably realize the relief of the player, the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed. A special state (for example, a game machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) when a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed, and in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state (for example, a big hit game state). For example, a state control means that can be controlled to a time saving state (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-17, a portion that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIG. 11-19, A portion of the game control microcomputer 100 that executes step 100 IWS537) and an update means that can update numerical information based on the execution of the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-13, the game control micro The computer 100 includes a portion for executing step 100 IWS71), and the state control means is provided with the special condition when the special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the updating means becoming a specific value corresponding to a special number of times. The state can be controlled (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-13, the portion of the game control microcomputer 100 that executes step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75, and as shown in FIG. 11-17, the game control microcomputer 100. In step 100IWS170 and step 100IWS173), the updating means updates the numerical information depending on whether the variable display of the first identification information is executed or the variable display of the second identification information is executed. (For example, as shown in FIG. 11-13, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 for executing step 100 IWS71). Hereinafter, an example of a form example of these gaming machines will be described as another form example.

(Explanation of feature 108IW)
Next, the feature portion 108IW of this embodiment will be described. In the feature unit 108IW, the gaming state is controlled to either a normal state, a time saving state, or a probabilistic state (also controlled in the time saving state). In this example, in the time-saving state, the average special figure fluctuation time is shortened as compared with the normal state, and the average normal map fluctuation time is shortened as compared with the normal state, as compared with the normal state. There is a high probability that you will be hit by the average in the ordinary game. For example, while the probability of hitting a normal figure is 10% in the normal state, the probability of hitting a normal figure is increased to 90% in the time saving state, and a game ball wins in the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening). It will be easier to do. Not limited to such an aspect, for example, in the time saving state, the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening) can be obtained by lengthening the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B as compared with the normal state. It may be configured so that the game ball can easily win a prize.

Further, in this example, in the probabilistic state, the probability of becoming a big hit (big hit probability) is increased as compared with the normal state and the time saving state. In this example, when it is controlled to the probabilistic state, it is also controlled to the time saving state.

Further, in this example, in addition to the case where the variable display result becomes a big hit and is controlled to the probabilistic change state or the time saving state after the big hit game ends, even if the variable display result is out of order, the time saving out-of-time symbol is derived and displayed. It may be controlled to a shorter time based on what has been done.

Further, in this example, even if the fluctuation display of a predetermined number of times (800 times in this example) is finished after the power is turned on to the gaming machine, after the big hit occurs, after the time reduction occurs, and after the relief time reduction occurs, the next big hit Even if the time reduction does not occur, it may be controlled to the time reduction state (relief time reduction).

In the time saving state, (1) control to increase the probability of hitting a normal symbol, (2) control to shorten the fluctuation time of a normal symbol, and (3) opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening). Control to lengthen and (4) control to shorten the fluctuation time of the special symbol can be performed, but all of those (1) to (4) may be controlled, or (1) to (1) to It is not necessary to control a part of (4). For example, which of the following (1) to (4) may be controlled may differ between the time saving state via the jackpot, the time saving state via the time saving loss, and the time saving state via the relief time saving. It may be the same.

Further, for example, in a low base state, the probability of hitting a normal figure may be 1/1, or the probability of hitting a normal figure may be extremely low and the probability of hitting a normal figure may be substantially 1/1. That is, when the relief time is shortened, even if the control of the above (1) is not performed, a part or all of the above (2) to (4) are controlled so that the high base state is obtained. You may.

It is preferable that the number of fluctuations n until the relief time is controlled and the number of time reductions N in the relief time are defined as follows.
2.5P ≤ n ≤ 3.0P
0.4P ≤ N ≤ 3.8P
(P = denominator of jackpot probability ML, n = number of fluctuations, N = number of time reductions)
Specifically, for example, when the jackpot probability is 1/300, the number of fluctuations n is 750 to 900, and the number of time reductions N is 120 to 1140. As will be described later, in this example, in the case of the set value "6" having the highest jackpot probability, the jackpot probability is about 1/270, so the number of fluctuations n is 675 to 810, and the number of time reductions N is 108 to. It becomes 1026. Further, in the case of the set value "1" having the lowest jackpot probability, since the jackpot probability is about 1/319, the number of fluctuations n is 797 to 957, and the number of time reductions N is 127 to 1212. In this example, the number of fluctuations n and the number of time reductions N are both set to "800", and the above provisions are satisfied regardless of which setting value is set.

Next, the gaming machine according to the first embodiment in the feature unit 108IW of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-1 to 11-47.

(Board composition)
FIG. 11-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in the feature portion 108IW. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 108IW, in addition to the board surface configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1, as shown in FIG. 11-1, a right-handed LED 100IW10 is provided below the normal drawing hold indicator 25C. ing. Further, as shown in FIG. 11-1, a right-handed notification LED 100IW20 is provided on the right side of the image display device 5.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-1, the fourth symbol display devices 100IW21a and 21b are provided on the left side and the right side of the image display device 5, respectively. Of these, the fourth symbol display 100IW21a provided on the left side of the image display device 5 is a display that executes the variation display of the fourth symbol in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol. Further, the fourth symbol display 100IW21b provided on the right side of the image display device 5 is a display that executes the variation display of the fourth symbol in synchronization with the variation display of the second special symbol. In this example, the fourth symbol display 100IW21a and 21b are composed of two LEDs arranged one above the other, and the two LEDs are alternately turned on and off to execute the variable display of the fourth symbol. NS.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-1, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 108IW, instead of the passing gate 41 shown in FIG. 1, a passing game ball can pass to the right side of the image display device 5. A gate 100 IW41 is provided. In the feature unit 108IW, the normal drawing game is executed based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 100IW41. Therefore, in the feature unit 108IW, since the probability of hitting a normal figure increases in the probability variation state or the time saving state, it is advantageous to perform the firing operation (right-handed operation) aiming at the right side of the game area. On the other hand, in the main feature unit 108IW, in the normal state, it is advantageous to perform the firing operation (left-handed operation) aiming at the left side of the game area.

(Big hit probability, time saving loss probability)
11-2 and 11-3 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the jackpot probability and the time saving loss probability for each set value. Of these, FIG. 11-2 shows the jackpot probability and the time saving loss probability when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed. Further, FIG. 11-3 shows the jackpot probability and the time saving loss probability when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. In this example, it is configured so that it can be set to any of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player (in this example, the jackpot probability is different), and when the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is possible to check the current setting value or change the setting value by executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process. Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-2 and 11-3, in this example, a case is shown in which the setting can be changed in 6 stages of the setting values "1" to "6". Not only when the setting can be changed in 6 steps, for example, the setting may be changed in 2 to 5 steps, or the setting may be changed in 7 or more steps.

As shown in FIGS. 11-2 (A) and 11-3 (A), the non-probability change state (low) is performed both when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. In the probability state (normal state or time saving state), the setting value "1" is the lowest with the jackpot probability "205/65536" (about 1/319), which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. Then, the jackpot probability increases in the order of the set value "2", the set value "3", the set value "4", and the set value "5", and the jackpot probability "242/65536" is the highest when the set value is "6". It is high (about 1/270), which is the most advantageous setting for the player.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-2 (B) and 11-3 (B), the probability change state (probability change state) in both the case of executing the variable display of the first special symbol and the case of executing the variable display of the second special symbol. In the high probability state), the case where the set value is "1" is the lowest (about 1/32) with the jackpot probability "2050/65536", which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. Then, the jackpot probability increases in the order of the set value "2", the set value "3", the set value "4", and the set value "5", and the jackpot probability "2420/65536" is the highest when the set value is "6". It is high (about 1/27), which is the most advantageous setting for the player. Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-2 and 11-3, in this example, the jackpot probability is increased 10 times in the probabilistic state as compared with the non-probability state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-2, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6" is set (furthermore, whether it is in a probabilistic state). Regardless of whether it is in a non-probability state), the time saving loss probability is constant as "164/65536" (about 1/400). Further, as shown in FIG. 11-3, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, it does not matter which of the set values "1" to "6" is set (furthermore, whether it is in a probabilistic state). Regardless of whether it is in a non-probability state), the time saving loss probability is constant as "328/65536" (about 1/200). That is, in this example, the determination value for determining the time reduction is the same regardless of the set value.

As shown in FIGS. 11-2 and 11-3, even when the jackpot probability is different depending on the set value as described above and the time reduction probability is set to be constant, no time reduction is lost. By making the probabilities different for the set values "1" to "6", the number of determined values for each set value may be matched.

In addition, it may be configured to be controllable to a small hit game state. When the small hit is also determinable, for example, the small hit probability may be constant regardless of any of the set values "1" to "6".

Further, when the small hit is also configured to be determinable, it may be configured so that there is a small hit with a time reduction that is controlled to a time reduction state triggered by the small hit.

The examples shown in FIGS. 11-2 and 11-3 are examples, and various modes can be considered as methods for setting the jackpot probability and the time saving loss probability. For example, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 11-2 and 11-3, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, the time saving loss probability is about 1/400, and the variation of the second special symbol. When the display is executed, the case where the time saving loss probability is about 1/200 is shown, but conversely, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the time saving loss probability is about 1/200. When executing the variation display of the second special symbol, the time saving loss probability may be configured to be about 1/400.

(Big hit type judgment table)
FIG. 11-4 is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. Of these, FIG. 11-4 (A) shows a specific example of the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol. Further, FIG. 11-4 (B) shows a specific example of the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 11-4 (A), the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol is based on a random number for type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol. It is a table referred to for determining the type of jackpot to be either "normal jackpot", "probability change jackpot", or "sudden probability variation jackpot".

As shown in FIG. 11-4 (B), the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol is based on a random number for type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol. It is a table referred to for determining the type of jackpot to be either "normal jackpot", "probability change jackpot", or "sudden probability variation jackpot".

The "normal jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot game state of 15 rounds and shifts to a time saving state after the end of the jackpot game state. When the state shifts to the time saving state, the time saving state is maintained until the fluctuation display of 100 times is finished or the next big hit occurs.

The "probability change jackpot" is a jackpot that controls the jackpot game state of 15 rounds and shifts to the probability variation state after the end of the jackpot game state. When the state shifts to the probabilistic state, the probabilistic state is maintained until the fluctuation display of 100 times is completed or the next big hit occurs. In this example, when it is controlled to the probabilistic state, it is also controlled to the time saving state.

The "sudden probability change jackpot" is a jackpot that controls the jackpot game state of two rounds and shifts to the probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state. When the state shifts to the probabilistic state, the probabilistic state is maintained until the fluctuation display of 100 times is completed or the next big hit occurs. In this example, when it is controlled to the probabilistic state, it is also controlled to the time saving state.

In this example, in the case of "normal jackpot" and "probability variable jackpot", 29 seconds have passed or a predetermined number (10 in this example) of games in each of the 15 rounds during the jackpot game. The large winning opening is controlled to be open until the ball wins (therefore, the long-term opening of the large winning opening is performed 15 times). On the other hand, in the case of a "sudden change jackpot", the jackpot is controlled to be open for an extremely short 0.5 seconds in each of the two rounds of the jackpot game (hence, a short period of time for the jackpot). Opening is done twice). Therefore, in the case of a "sudden change jackpot", it is practically impossible to expect a prize in the big prize opening, and it can be made to appear as if the player suddenly changed to the probability change state.

As shown in FIG. 11-4 (A), in this example, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed and a big hit is obtained, it is determined as a "normal big hit" with a probability of 40%, and 40%. It is determined to be a "probability change jackpot" with a probability, and is determined to be a "sudden change jackpot" with a probability of 20%. Further, as shown in FIG. 11-4 (B), in this example, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed and a big hit is obtained, it is determined as a "normal big hit" with a probability of 40%, 55. With a% probability, it is determined as a "probability change jackpot", and with a 5% probability, it is determined as a "sudden change jackpot".

(Time saving type judgment table)
FIG. 11-5 is an explanatory diagram showing a time saving type determination table stored in the ROM 101. Of these, FIG. 11-5 (A) shows a specific example of the time saving type determination table for the first special symbol. Further, FIG. 11-5 (B) shows a specific example of the time saving type determination table for the second special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 11-5 (A), the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol is based on a random number for type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a symbol that is out of time. , It is a table referred to for determining the time saving type as one of "time saving loss A", "time saving loss B", or "time saving loss C".

As shown in FIG. 11-5 (B), the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol is based on a random number for type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a symbol that is out of time. , It is a table referred to for determining the time saving type as one of "time saving loss A", "time saving loss B", or "time saving loss C".

As shown in FIGS. 11-5 (A) and 11-5 (B), in this example, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed and the time is out of time, and when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed and the time is shortened. In any case of loss, there is a 1/3 chance that it will be determined as "time reduction A", a 1/3 probability that it will be determined as "time reduction B", and a 1/3 probability that it will be "time reduction C". Is decided.

In the example shown in FIG. 11-5, various modes can be considered as a method of determining the time saving type. For example, when the variation display of the first special symbol is determined to be out of time, the probability of determining "time reduction out of C" is increased, while when the variation display of the second special symbol is determined to be out of time, "time reduction is out". The determination ratio of the time saving type may be different between the case of executing the variable display of the first special symbol and the case of executing the variable display of the second special symbol, such as increasing the determination probability of "missing A".

Further, for example, when the time reduction is configured so that the time reduction can be determined even during the time reduction state via the relief time reduction, the time reduction counter or the like may be uniformly configured so as not to be overwritten even if the time reduction is lost, or the time reduction deviation symbol may be configured. Depending on the type, the time reduction counter or the like may be overwritten or not overwritten.

FIG. 11-6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the time saving type. As shown in FIG. 11-6, in this example, in the normal state, when the time reduction is "A", the time reduction is controlled to 100 times, and when the time reduction is "B", the time reduction is 50. It is controlled to the time saving state of 30 times, and when it becomes "time saving out of C", it is controlled to the time saving state of 30 times. Further, in the time saving state, when "time saving loss A" occurs, the time saving state is controlled until the next big hit, and when "time saving loss B" occurs, the time saving state is controlled to 200 times, and "time saving loss". When it becomes "C", it is controlled to the time saving state of 100 times of time saving. Further, in the normal state and the time saving state, when the relief time is shortened, the time saving state is controlled to 800 times.

In this example, as will be described later, the time reduction may not be determined in the probabilistic state. Further, in this example, as will be described later, there is no case where the time reduction is determined to be out of time even in the time reduction state due to the relief time reduction. Further, in this example, as will be described later, if a big hit does not occur even after finishing the variation display of 800 times after being controlled to the time saving state of 800 times by the relief time saving, the relief time is shortened again. It is controlled to a time saving state (relief time saving) of 800 times. Therefore, the number of time reductions due to the relief time reduction is substantially until the next big hit occurs.

Here, the relief time reduction arrival rate for each set value will be described. The relief time reduction arrival rate is the rate controlled to the time reduction state via the relief time reduction. Since the time saving state via the relief time saving is controlled by fluctuating n times (800 times in this example) without being controlled by the jackpot game state, the relief time saving arrival rate K is as follows. It can be calculated in this way.
K = (1-ML) n = {(P-1) ÷ P} n
(K = Relief time reduction arrival rate, P = Big hit probability ML denominator, n = Number of operations)

Specifically, for example, if the set value is "1", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/319, so the relief time reduction arrival rate K is 8.1%, and if the set value is "2", the jackpot probability ML is Since it is about 1/310, the relief time reduction arrival rate K is 7.5%, and if the set value is "3", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/300, so the relief time reduction arrival rate K is 6.9%. If the set value is "4", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/290, so the relief time reduction arrival rate K is 6.3%, and if the set value is "5", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/280. The relief time reduction arrival rate K is 5.7%, and if the set value is "6", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/270, so the relief time reduction arrival rate K is 5.1%.

In this way, the lower the jackpot probability is, the higher the relief time reduction arrival rate is. As a result, the player can be rescued even if the set value has a low jackpot probability.

Further, the method of controlling the number of time reductions in the case of a time reduction deviation is not limited to that shown in FIG. 11-6. For example, even when the same time-saving out-of-time symbol is derived and displayed, it may be configured to control so that the number of time-savings is 100 times in the normal state and the time-saving state. Further, for example, even when the same time saving out-of-time symbol is derived and displayed, the time saving number is controlled to 100 times in the normal state, and the time saving number is controlled to 0 times in the time saving state (that is,). It may be configured to fall from the time saving state to the normal state). Various modes can be considered as a method of controlling the number of time reductions in the case where the time reduction is lost.

(Variation pattern table)
11-7 and 11-8 are explanatory views showing a specific example of the fluctuation pattern table in the feature unit 108IW. Of these, FIG. 11-7 (A) shows a specific example of the fluctuation pattern table A for big hits. Further, FIG. 11-7 (B) shows a specific example of the variation pattern table B for deviation in the normal state. Further, FIG. 11-7 (C) shows a specific example of the variation pattern table C for the deviation in the time saving state controlled via the jackpot. Further, FIG. 11-7 (D) shows a specific example of the variation pattern table D for the time saving state, which is controlled via the time saving time loss.

Further, FIG. 11-8 (E) shows a specific example of the variation pattern table E for the deviation in the time saving state controlled via the relief time saving. Further, FIGS. 11-8 (F) and 11-8 (G) show specific examples of fluctuation pattern tables F and G for deviation within 10 fluctuations immediately before the relief time is shortened. Of these, the fluctuation pattern table F shown in FIG. 11-8 (F) is a fluctuation pattern table for immediately before the relief time reduction, which is selected when the number of reserved storages (for example, the total number of reserved storages) is 3 or less. Further, the fluctuation pattern table F shown in FIG. 11-8 (G) is a fluctuation pattern table for immediately before the relief time reduction, which is selected when the number of reserved storages (for example, the total number of reserved storages) is 4 or more.

Further, FIG. 11-8 (H) shows a specific example of the variation pattern table H for deviation in the probabilistic state. However, in this example, even in the probabilistic change state or the time saving state, when the number of reserved storages is not 1 or more (when there is no reserved storage), the fluctuation pattern is determined using the fluctuation pattern table B.

Further, FIG. 11-8 (I) shows a specific example of the fluctuation pattern table I for removing the fluctuation display that shortens the relief time. Further, FIG. 11-8 (J) shows a specific example of the fluctuation pattern table J for the jackpot of the fluctuation display that shortens the relief time.

As shown in FIG. 11-7 (A), in this example, in the case of a big hit, the fluctuation patterns include the fluctuation pattern PB2-1 (normal reach), the fluctuation pattern PB2-2 (super reach α), and the fluctuation pattern PB2. It is determined to be one of -3 (super reach β).

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (B), in this example, when the deviation occurs in the normal state, the fluctuation patterns include the fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (normal fluctuation) and the fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach). , The fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) and the fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) are determined.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (C), in this example, when there is a deviation in the time saving state controlled via the jackpot, the fluctuation patterns include the fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortening fluctuation) and the fluctuation. It is determined to be one of pattern PA1-3 (shortening variation), variation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), and variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β).

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (D), in this example, when the deviation occurs in the time reduction state controlled via the time reduction deviation, the fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortening fluctuation), It is determined to be one of the fluctuation pattern PA1-3 (shortening fluctuation), the fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), the fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), and the fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β).

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-8 (E), in this example, when there is a deviation in the time saving state controlled via the relief time saving, the fluctuation pattern PA1-4 (extremely shortened fluctuation) is used as the fluctuation pattern. , The fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), the fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), and the fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) are determined.

As shown in FIGS. 11-7 (C), 11-7 (D), and 11-8 (E), in this example, the fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortening fluctuation) and fluctuation are observed in the time-saving state. The rate at which the pattern PA1-3 (shortening fluctuation) and the fluctuation pattern PA1-4 (extremely shortened fluctuation) are determined is high, and the average fluctuation time is shorter than in the normal state. Further, even in the same time saving state, in the time saving state controlled via the time saving deviation, the selection probability of the fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortening fluctuation) is 80 as compared with the time saving state controlled via the jackpot. It is as high as%, and the average fluctuation time is short. In addition, in the time saving state controlled via the relief time saving, the selection ratio of the fluctuation pattern PA1-4 (extremely shortened fluctuation) is as high as 99%, which is the same as in the time saving state controlled via the time saving deviation or the jackpot. In comparison, the average fluctuation time is even shorter. With such a configuration, when the number of executions of the fluctuation display reaches a predetermined number of times (900 times in this example) and the relief time is shortened (that is, when a big hit does not occur for a long period of time), the fluctuation pattern PA1-4 (Extremely shortened fluctuation) increases the rate at which the fluctuation display is executed, and shortens the period until the next big hit is controlled, so that the decline in interest can be suppressed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-7 (C), 11-7 (D), and 11-8 (E), in this example, the variation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortened variation) is compared with that of this example. The selection probability is as high as 80%, and the average fluctuation time is short. Further, in the time saving state controlled via the relief time saving, the fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) and the fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) are different from the time saving state controlled via the time saving loss or the jackpot. ) Will not be determined and Super Reach will not be performed. That is, in the time saving state controlled via the relief time saving, unlike the time saving state controlled via the time saving loss or the jackpot, the super reach is not executed at the time of the loss, and the average fluctuation time becomes shorter. There is. With such a configuration, when the number of times the variable display is executed reaches a predetermined number of times (900 times in this example) and the relief time is shortened (that is, when a big hit has not occurred for a long period of time), the super reach will be missed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest. In addition, since the period until the next big hit is controlled is shortened, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest. In this example, in the time saving state controlled via the relief time saving, the super reach is not executed at the time of disconnection, but it may be configured to be executed. For example, in the time saving state controlled via the relief time saving, the super reach may be executed at a lower rate than in the time saving state controlled via the time saving loss or the jackpot. With such a configuration, when the number of times the variable display is executed reaches a predetermined number of times (900 times in this example) and the relief time is shortened (that is, when a big hit has not occurred for a long period of time), the super reach will be missed. Since the ratio of becoming is low, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-8 (F), in this example, if the time is out of the range within 10 fluctuations immediately before the relief time is shortened, the number of reserved storages (for example, the total number of reserved storages) is 3 or less. For example, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be either fluctuation pattern PA1-3 (shortening fluctuation) or fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), and the probability of being determined to fluctuation pattern PA1-3 (shortening fluctuation) is 95%. It's getting higher. Further, as shown in FIG. 11-8 (G), in this example, if the time is out of the range within 10 fluctuations immediately before the relief time is shortened, the number of reserved storages (for example, the total number of reserved storages) is 4 or more. For example, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be either the fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (normal fluctuation) or the fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), and the probability of being determined to the fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (normal fluctuation) is 95%. It's getting higher.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-8 (F) and 11-8 (G), if the deviation is within 10 fluctuations immediately before the relief time is shortened, the fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) or the fluctuation pattern PA2-3 It is not determined to be (Super Reach β), and Super Reach is not executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when the variable display of the super reach is executed in the period immediately before the relief time is shortened but the jackpot is not obtained. In addition, even if the deviation occurs within 10 fluctuations immediately before the relief time is shortened, the fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) or the fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) may be determined. For example, within the 10 fluctuations immediately before the relief time is shortened, the rate is lower than the period before the 10 fluctuations immediately before the relief time (that is, the period using the fluctuation pattern table C shown in FIG. 11-7 (C)). At the time of disconnection, the fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) or the fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) may be determined.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-8 (H), in this example, when the deviation occurs in the probabilistic state, the fluctuation patterns include the fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortening fluctuation) and the fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach). ), The fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), and the fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β).

As shown in FIG. 11-8 (H), in this example, the fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortened fluctuation) is determined with a high probability of 90% in the probabilistic state, and the average fluctuation time is further averaged than in the time-shortened state. Is getting shorter.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-8 (I), in this example, the variation display is such that the relief time is shortened, and if it is out of alignment, the variation pattern is determined to be the variation pattern PA3-1 (rushing out). NS. That is, the variation pattern PA3-1 (rushing off) is a variation pattern dedicated to the relief time reduction, which is not used for the variation display that does not result in the relief time reduction, but is used only for the variation display (disappearance) that results in the relief time reduction. In this example, when the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the fluctuation pattern PA3-1 (rushing out), as will be described later, a time saving rushing effect (for example, a time saving rushing effect) for notifying that the time saving state (that is, relief time saving) is controlled is performed. (See FIGS. 11-38 (G) and (H)) is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify the player that the rescue time is shortened and the time is controlled to be shortened, and it is possible to improve the interest when the rescue time is shortened.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-8 (J), in this example, if the relief time is shortened and the jackpot is missed, the fluctuation pattern PA3-2 (rushing pretending jackpot) is determined as the fluctuation pattern. Will be done. That is, the fluctuation pattern PA3-2 (rushing fake jackpot) is a fluctuation pattern dedicated to the relief time reduction, which is not used for the fluctuation display that does not result in the relief time reduction, but is used only for the fluctuation display (big hit) that results in the relief time reduction. In this example, when the fluctuation pattern PA3-2 (rushing pretending big hit) is determined, the time saving rushing effect (for example, FIG. 11) is notified that the time saving state (that is, the relief time saving) is controlled, as will be described later. -38 (G), (H)) and the same mode of effect (see, for example, FIG. 11-41 (G')), and then an effect of notifying that a big hit will occur (for example, FIG. 11-41). (See (H')) is executed. With such a configuration, after the player once recognizes that the relief time has been shortened, it is notified that a big hit will occur, so that the player can be surprised and the interest can be improved.

The method of setting the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIGS. 11-7 and 11-8 is an example, and various modes can be considered. For example, when the time reduction state occurs and the time reduction state is controlled again during the time reduction state, it is the same as the variation pattern table C for the time reduction state controlled via the jackpot shown in FIG. 11-7 (C). The table may be used to determine the variation pattern.

Further, for example, only when the time saving state is continued until the next big hit among the cases where the time saving is lost (in this example, the time saving state is A during the time saving state), via the big hit shown in FIG. 11-7 (C). The fluctuation pattern may be determined by using the same table as the fluctuation pattern table C for the deviation in the time saving state controlled by.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 11-8 (E), the selection ratio of the fluctuation pattern PA1-4 of the extremely shortened fluctuation of 1.5 seconds is high during the time saving state via the relief time saving, and the fluctuation display is displayed. Since the digestion speed is fast, there are few types of feasible advance notice effects and look-ahead advance notice effects. For example, when the time is shortened via the relief time saving, the effect image is displayed at the edge of the display screen of the image display device 5, the effect of turning on the lamp or the LED, the predetermined effect sound, or the normal effect. An effect that outputs different fluctuating stop sounds is executed.

Further, in this example, the case where the fluctuation pattern table E dedicated to the time saving state via the relief time saving is provided, but the fluctuation pattern table E dedicated to the time saving state via the relief time saving is not provided, for example, via the jackpot. The fluctuation pattern may be determined by using the fluctuation pattern table C (see FIG. 11-7 (C)) in the time saving state.

Further, in this example, when the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less, the case of switching to the fluctuation pattern tables F and G (see FIGS. 11-8 (F) and 11-8) is shown. , Not limited to such aspects. For example, the fluctuation pattern table may be switched so that the reach ratio gradually decreases as the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened, or the number of divisions such as 100 or 200 remaining fluctuations. Only in the case of, the fluctuation pattern table may be switched so that the remaining number of fluctuations can be suggested.

Further, in this example, different fluctuation pattern tables are used (that is, the average fluctuation time is different) depending on the time saving state via the jackpot, the time saving state via the missed time saving, and the time saving state via the relief time saving. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the same fluctuation pattern table may be used in both cases (that is, the average fluctuation time is the same), and the time saving state via the relief time saving is better than the time saving state via the jackpot or the missed time saving. However, the average fluctuation time may be long.

(Direction control command)
11-9 and 11-10 are explanatory views showing an example of the contents of the effect control command sent to the effect control CPU 120. In the examples shown in FIGS. 11-9 and 11-10, the command 80XX (H) is an effect control command for designating a variation pattern of the decorative symbol that is variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol. (Fluctuating pattern command). The effect control command for specifying the fluctuation pattern is also a command for designating the fluctuation start. Therefore, when any of the commands 80XX (H) is received, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative symbol.

Command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (display result 1 designation command) (missing designation command) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variation pattern command is out of line (no time reduction). be.

The command 9001 (H) is an effect control command (display result 2 designation command) (time saving A designation command) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the time saving deviation A. be. The command 9002 (H) is an effect control command (display result 3 designation command) (time saving B designation command) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the time saving deviation B. be. Command 9003 (H) is an effect control command (display result 4 designation command) (time reduction C designation command) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the time reduction C. be.

The command 9004 (H) is an effect control command (display result 5 designation command (normal jackpot designation command)) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command is a normal jackpot. The command 9005 (H) is an effect control command (display result 6 designation command (probability variation jackpot designation command)) for designating the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command as the probability variation jackpot. The command 9006 (H) is an effect control command (display result 7 designation command (sudden probability change jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is suddenly changed to the probability change jackpot. ..

The command 95XX (H) is an effect control command (relief time reduction number 1 designation command) for designating the remaining number of fluctuations (number of times of 126 times or less) until the relief time is shortened. In this example, the value corresponding to the remaining number of fluctuations (the number of times of 126 times or less) until the relief time is shortened is set in the EXT data of the relief time reduction number 1 designated command. For example, when the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 1, the command 9501 (H) is transmitted as the rescue time reduction number 1 designation command, and when the remaining number of fluctuations is 126, the command is transmitted. The command 957E (H) is transmitted as a rescue time reduction number 1 designation command. In this example, when the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 127 times or more, the maximum value of 7F (H) is set in the EXT data, and the command is uniformly designated as the relief time reduction number 1 designation command. The command 957F (H) is transmitted to.

The command 96XX (H) is an effect control command (relief time reduction number 2 designation command) for designating the remaining number of fluctuations (number of times in units of 100 times) until the relief time is shortened. In this example, a value corresponding to the remaining number of fluctuations (number of times in units of 100 times) until the relief time is shortened is set in the EXT data of the relief time reduction number 2 designated command. For example, when the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 100, the command 9601 (H) is transmitted as a command for specifying the number of relief times 2, and when the remaining number of fluctuations is 800, the command is transmitted. The command 9608 (H) is transmitted as the rescue time reduction number 1 designation command.

The command 97XX (H) is an effect control command (command for specifying the number of times of relief time for restoration) that specifies the number of remaining fluctuations (the number of times in units of 100 times) until the relief time is shortened at the time of power restoration. In this example, when the power is restored, the EXT data of the command for specifying the number of times of relief time for restoration is set with a value corresponding to the number of remaining fluctuations until the time for relief is shortened and transmitted. For example, when the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened at the time of power restoration is 100 times or less, the command 9701 (H) is transmitted as a command for specifying the number of relief time reductions at the time of restoration, and the remaining number of fluctuations is 701 times or more. If the number of times is 800 or less, the command 9708 (H) is transmitted as a command for specifying the number of times of relief time for restoration.

In this example, the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened can be specified in units of 126 times, and when the remaining number of times is 127 times or more, it can be specified in units of 100 times. However, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, two commands may be combined and transmitted so that even if the remaining number of times is 127 or more, the two commands can be identifiable and transmitted in units of one time.

The command A000 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol confirmation A designation command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the first special symbol and can specify that the symbol confirmation period is 20 seconds. The command A001 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol confirmation B designation command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the first special symbol and can specify that the symbol confirmation period is 10 seconds. Command A002 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol confirmation C designation command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the first special symbol and that the symbol confirmation period is 0.5 seconds. be.

The command A100 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol confirmation A designation command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the second special symbol and that the symbol confirmation period is 20 seconds. The command A101 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol confirmation B designation command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the second special symbol and that the symbol confirmation period is 10 seconds. The command A102 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol confirmation C designation command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the second special symbol and that the symbol confirmation period is 0.5 seconds. be.

The command B000 (H) is an effect control command (big hit start designation command: fanfare designation command) for designating the start of the jackpot game. The command B001 (H) is an effect control command (big hit end designation command: ending designation command) for designating the end of the jackpot game.

The command B1XX (H) is an effect control command (display command during opening of the big winning opening) for designating the display during the round during the big hit game. The number of rounds to be displayed in "XX" is set. The command B2XX (H) is an effect control command (display command after opening the big winning opening) that specifies the display after the round (display of the interval between rounds) during the big hit game.

The command B400 (H) is an effect control command (a command for designating a prize in the prize opening) for designating that the game ball has won a prize in the prize opening.

The command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first hold storage number addition designation command) for designating that the first hold storage number has been increased by 1. The command C001 (H) is an effect control command (second hold storage number addition designation command) for designating that the second hold storage number has been increased by 1. The command C100 (H) is an effect control command (first hold storage number subtraction designation command) for designating that the first hold storage number has decreased by one. The command C101 (H) is an effect control command (second hold storage number subtraction designation command) for designating that the second hold storage number has decreased by 1.

The command E000 (H) is an effect control command (normal state designation command) that specifies that the gaming state is controlled to the normal state. The command E001 (H) is an effect control command (time saving state A designation command) that specifies that the game state is controlled to the time saving state at the end of the big hit game. The command E002 (H) is an effect control command (time saving state B designation command) that specifies that the gaming state is controlled to the time saving state when the time saving is lost. The command E003 (H) is an effect control command (time reduction state C designation command) that specifies that the game state is controlled to the time reduction state at the time of relief time reduction. The command E004 (H) is an effect control command (probability change state specification command) that specifies that the game state is controlled to the probability change state.

The command E100 (H) is an effect control command (right-handed notification start designation command) for designating the start of right-handed notification. The command E101 (H) is an effect control command (right-handed notification end designation command) for designating the end of the right-handed notification.

The command F000 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demo designation command) that specifies to start displaying the customer waiting demonstration. The customer waiting demo designation command is transmitted, for example, when the hold storage is not stored (that is, when the total number of hold storages is 0) at the end of the symbol confirmation period and the end of the jackpot game. The customer waiting demo designation command is also transmitted, for example, when the power is turned on (it is transmitted regardless of whether the initialization process or the recovery process is executed). In addition, for example, when shifting to the setting change mode for executing the setting change process or the setting confirmation mode for executing the setting confirmation process, a setting value specification command is sent after each mode is completed, and then a customer waiting demo is specified. The command is sent. When the recovery process or the setting confirmation process is executed, the customer is not executing the big hit game, the small hit game, or the special figure game, and the hold memory is not stored. The wait demo specification command is sent. As will be described later, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the customer waiting demo designation command, the relief time saving function is activated when 10 seconds elapse without receiving other commands such as the effect control command at the time of starting winning. Start the telop display indicating that it is installed (in this example, it is determined whether or not to display the telop by lottery). In addition, when 3 minutes have passed without receiving another command after receiving the customer waiting demo designation command, the demonstration movie is played.

The command F1XX (H) is an effect control command (setting value designation command) for designating a set setting value. A value corresponding to the set value is set in "XX".

When the effect control CPU 120 (specifically, the effect control CPU 120) mounted on the effect control board 12 receives the above-mentioned effect control command from the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11. The display state of the image display device 5 is changed according to the contents shown in 11-9 and 11-10, the display state of the lamp is changed, and the sound number data is output to the voice control board 13. The effect control commands other than the effect control commands shown in FIGS. 11-9 and 11-10 are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. For example, a more detailed effect control command related to the jackpot game and an effect control command indicating the game state (for example, an effect control command indicating an initialization command) are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

(Game control main processing)
FIG. 11-11 is a flowchart showing the game control main process in the feature unit 108IW. In this example, the processes of steps S1 to S7, the processes of steps S8 to S9, and the processes of steps S10 to S12 are the same as those processes shown in FIG.

In this example, when the effect control command instructing the recovery from the power failure is transmitted in step S7, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the relief time reduction counter for counting the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened. Control is performed so that a value corresponding to the value of the current relief time reduction counter is set and a recovery relief time reduction specification command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS11). For example, when the value of the current relief time reduction counter is 100 or less, the CPU 10 controls to transmit the command 9701 (H) as a recovery time reduction designation command. Further, for example, when the value of the current relief time reduction counter is 701 or more and 800 or less, the CPU 10 controls to transmit the command 9708 (H) as a recovery time reduction designation command. Therefore, in this example, if the RAM clear process is not executed and the recovery process is executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, the command for specifying the number of times of relief time for recovery is transmitted, and the remaining time until the current relief time is shortened. The number of fluctuations is notified. In addition, the relief time can be shortened by executing the variable display based on the hold memory restored by the recovery process (that is, the hold memory stored before the power failure). With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a disadvantage for the player when a power failure occurs in a situation where the hold memory corresponding to the variable display in which the relief time is shortened is stored before the power failure.

In this example, a case is shown in which a command for specifying the number of times of relief time for recovery is transmitted separately from the command for recovery at the time of power failure recovery, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the EXT data of the recovery command (for example, the power-on designation command) transmitted in step S7 may be configured to be set with a value corresponding to the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened and transmitted.

Further, when the effect control command instructing the initialization is transmitted in step S9, the CPU 103 sets "800" in the relief time reduction counter (step 100 IWS12). Therefore, in this example, when the RAM clear process is executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, "800" is set in the relief time reduction counter. That is, in this example, if the RAM clear process is executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine and then the jackpot and the time reduction are not generated even if the fluctuation display is executed 800 times, the relief time is shortened and the time reduction state is established. Will be controlled by. In this example, the initial value to be set in the relief time reduction counter can be specified based on the effect control command for instructing the initialization to be transmitted in step S9.

In this example, when the RAM clear process is executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, "800" is set in the relief time reduction counter to make the initial setting, but only in such a mode. Instead, it may be configured not to perform the initial setting of the relief time reduction counter when the RAM clear processing is executed. For example, when the RAM clear process is executed, the time saving flags A to C indicating that the time saving state is executed, the time saving number counter for counting the number of executions of the variation display during the time saving state, and the hold storage are initialized. On the other hand, the value of the relief time reduction counter may be restored. With such a configuration, the game can be started from the state where the value of the relief time reduction counter on the previous day is continued, so that the investment amount until the relief time is shortened can be reduced and the player is not disadvantaged. be able to. In addition, it is possible to prevent the relief time reduction counter from being intentionally initialized, and it is possible to increase the degree of relief for the player.

Further, in the case of the above configuration, the relief time reduction counter is not initially set only when the ON of the clear switch is detected (Y in step S3) and the RAM clear processing is executed, and the RAM is configured. When an abnormality is detected (N in steps S4 and S5) and the RAM clear process is executed, the relief time reduction counter may be initially set.

(Special design normal processing)
11-12 and 11-13 are flowcharts showing a special symbol normal process (step S110) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total pending storage number (step 100IWS51). Specifically, the count value of the total hold storage number counter for counting the total number of the first hold storage number and the second hold storage number is confirmed. If the total number of reserved storages is not 0, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the second number of reserved storages is 0 (step 100IWS52). Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the second hold storage number counter for counting the second hold storage number is 0. If the second reserved memory number is not 0, the CPU 103 is a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol process processing is being performed for the first special symbol or the special symbol process processing is being performed for the second special symbol). Set the data indicating "second" in (step 100IWS53). If the second reserved storage number is 0 (that is, when only the first reserved storage number is accumulated), the CPU 103 sets the data indicating "first" in the special symbol pointer (step 100IWS54).

In the feature unit 108IW, by executing the processes of steps 100IWS52 to S54, the variation display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed with respect to the variation display of the first special symbol. In other words, the second start condition for starting the variable display of the second special symbol is controlled to be satisfied in preference to the first start condition for starting the variable display of the first special symbol.

Not limited to the mode shown in this example, for example, the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol are executed in the order in which the game ball wins the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening. It may be configured as follows.

Next, the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 102 and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (step 100IWS55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 has each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the first hold storage number = 1 in the first hold storage number buffer. The numerical value is read out and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = 1 in the second reserved storage number buffer. Is stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the hold storage counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 100IWS56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first reserved storage counter, and each storage area in the first reserved storage buffer. Shift the contents of. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second reserved storage counter is subtracted by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second reserved storage buffer are shifted.

That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 has a storage area corresponding to the first hold storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first hold storage number buffer of the RAM 102. Each random value stored in is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n-1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", it is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 102. Each random value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n-1.

Therefore, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved storage number (or each second reserved storage number) is always extracted is the first reserved storage number (or each second reserved storage number). The order of the second reserved memory) = 1, 2, 3, 4 is matched.

Then, the CPU 103 reduces the value of the total pending storage number by 1. That is, the count value of the total pending storage counter is subtracted by 1 (step 100IWS57). The CPU 103 stores the value of the total pending storage counter before the count value is subtracted by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 102.

Next, the CPU 103 reads the hit determination random number from the random number buffer area (step 100IWS61) and executes the jackpot determination module (step 100IWS62). In this case, the CPU 103 reads a hit determination random number extracted in the start winning determination process (step S101) and stored in advance in the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer, and performs a big hit determination. The jackpot determination module compares a predetermined jackpot determination value (see FIGS. 11-2 and 11-3) with a hit determination random number, and executes a process of determining a jackpot if they match. It is a program. That is, it is a program that executes a jackpot determination process. In this case, if the probability variation flag indicating the probability variation state is not set (if the probability variation state is low), the CPU 103 has a jackpot determination value for low probability (FIGS. 11-2 (A) and 11-3). (See (A)) is used to make a jackpot determination. Further, if the probability variation flag is set (in the high probability state), the CPU 103 uses the jackpot determination value for high probability (see FIGS. 11-2 (B) and 11-3 (B)). Make a big hit judgment. When the value of the hit determination random number matches any of the jackpot determination values shown in FIGS. 11-2 and 11-3, the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol is a jackpot.

When it is decided to make a big hit (Y in step 100IWS63), the CPU 103 sets a big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit (step 100IWS64). Then, the CPU 103 determines the type (normal jackpot, probability variation jackpot, sudden probability variation jackpot) corresponding to the value corresponding to the value of the type determination random number stored in the random number buffer area as the jackpot type (step 100IWS65). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the type determination random numbers extracted in the start winning determination process (step S101) and stored in advance in the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer, and determines the jackpot type. Then, the process proceeds to step 100 IWS84.

On the other hand, if it is not decided to make a big hit (N in step 100IWS63), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the time reduction counter for counting the number of executions of the variation display in the time reduction state is 0. (Step 100 IWS66). If the value of the time reduction counter is not 0, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the time reduction counter value (step 100IWS67), and confirms whether or not the subtracted time reduction counter value is 0 (step 100IWS68). ). If the value of the time reduction counter after subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 sets the time reduction end flag indicating that the time reduction state ends at the end of the fluctuation (step 100IWS69).

In this example, steps 100IWS66 to S69 are executed before the count processing of the number of fluctuations up to the relief time reduction after step 100IWS70 to perform the subtraction processing of the time reduction counter. I can't be limited. For example, it may be configured to execute the subtraction process of the time reduction counter after executing the counting process of the number of fluctuations up to the relief time reduction after step 100 IWS70. In this case, for example, in the case of a variable display that shortens the relief time, if the subtraction process is executed after setting "800" in the time reduction counter (see step 100IWS172), the value of the time reduction counter becomes 1 extra. Since the value is subtracted, the value of the time reduction counter may be added by 1 again after the subtraction process in the variable display in which the relief time is shortened. Further, it may be configured to set "901", which is one more time reduction counter, in advance.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0 (step 100IWS70). If the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0, the process proceeds to step 100 IWS79. If the value of the relief time reduction counter is not 0, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the relief time reduction counter value (step 100IWS71). In this example, by executing the process of step 100 IWS71, the value of the relief time reduction counter is uniformly updated regardless of whether the game state is the normal state, the time reduction state, or the probability change state. .. Further, in this example, by executing the process of step 100IWS71, regardless of whether the variation display of the first special symbol is executed or the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. , The value of the relief time reduction counter is updated uniformly.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the relief time reduction counter after subtraction is 127 or more (step 100IWS72). If the value of the relief time reduction counter after subtraction is 126 or less (N in step 100IWS72), the CPU 103 sets the value corresponding to the value of the relief time reduction counter in the EXT data, and issues the relief time reduction 1 designation command. Control to transmit to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS73). For example, when the value of the relief time reduction counter is 1, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the command 9501 (H) as the relief time reduction 1 designation command. Further, when the value of the relief time reduction counter is 126, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the command 957E (H) as the relief time reduction 1 designation command.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the relief time reduction counter after subtraction is 0 (step 100IWS74). If the value of the relief time reduction counter after subtraction is not 0, the process proceeds to step 100 IWS79. If the value of the relief time reduction counter after subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 sets a relief time reduction determination flag indicating that the time reduction state is controlled at the end of the fluctuation based on the occurrence of the relief time reduction (step 100IWS75). .. Then, the process proceeds to step 100 IWS84.

On the other hand, if the value of the relief time reduction counter after subtraction is 127 or more (Y in step 100IWS72), the CPU 103 uniformly sets 7F (H) as EXT data, and commands 957F as a relief time reduction 1 designation command. (H) is controlled to be transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100 IWS76). Next, in the CPU 103, the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is the number of times in units of 100 times (in this example, 100 times, 200 times, 300 times, 400 times, 500 times, 600 times, 700 times, or 800 times). It is confirmed whether or not it is (step 100IWS77). Whether or not the remaining number of fluctuations up to the relief time reduction is in units of 100 can be determined by checking the value of the relief time reduction counter. If the remaining number of fluctuations up to the relief time reduction is in units of 100 times, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the value of the relief time reduction counter in the EXT data, and directs and controls the relief time reduction 2 designation command. Control to transmit to the CPU 120 (step 100IWS78). For example, when the value of the relief time reduction counter is 100, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the command 9601 (H) as the relief time reduction 2 designation command. Further, when the value of the relief time reduction counter is 800, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the command 9608 (H) as the relief time reduction 2 designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step 100 IWS79.

In this example, when the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) counts the number of remaining fluctuations up to the relief time reduction and transmits the relief time reduction number 1 designation command and the relief time reduction number 2 designation command. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the effect control CPU 120 may be configured to count the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened and execute the fanning effect, the countdown effect, and the effect effect described later.

Further, for example, as will be described later, the relief time reduction counter is set (set to "800") at the timing when the relief time is shortened, and in a configuration in which the relief time reduction can be continuously generated, the relief time reduction is set to the first time. It is configured to send the relief time reduction number 1 specified command and the relief time reduction number 2 specified command only when the relief time is reduced, and when the relief time is reduced after the second time, the relief time reduction number 1 specified command and the relief time reduction number 2 specified command are transmitted. It may be configured not to.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time saving flag C indicating that the time saving state is controlled via the relief time saving is set (step 100IWS79). If the time saving flag C is set (that is, if the time saving state is via the relief time saving), the process proceeds to step 100IWS84. In this example, when the process of step 100IWS79 is executed and the time is shortened via the relief time reduction, the time reduction is not determined as it is without performing the subsequent time reduction determination processing of step 100IWS81. It is decided to.

In addition to the time saving state via the relief time saving, the time saving state may be uniformly determined not to be determined as the time saving state during the time saving state including the time saving state via the jackpot and the time saving state via the time saving loss. That is, not only when the time saving flag C is set, but also when the time saving flag A and the time saving flag B are set, the time saving deviation determination process after step 100 IWS81 is uniformly prevented, and there is no time saving as it is. You may decide to make it out of the question.

Further, conversely, even during the time saving state via the relief time saving, the processing after step 100IWS81 may be executed so that the time saving deviation can be determined. Further, the same variation display may be configured so that both the relief time reduction and the time reduction deviation may occur. In this case, for example, it may be configured to give priority to the relief time saving and control it to the time saving state, or it may be configured to control the time saving time loss to give priority to the time saving state.

If the time saving flag C is not set (that is, the time saving state via the relief time saving is not set), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the probability variation flag is set (step 100IWS80). If the probability change flag is set (that is, if it is in the probability change state), the process proceeds to step 100 IWS84. In this example, by executing the process of step 100 IWS80, it is determined that, in the case of the probability change state, the process of step 100 IWS 81 and the subsequent process of determining the time reduction is not performed, and the process of step 100 IWS 81 is performed as it is. NS.

If the probability change flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the probability change state), the CPU 103 uses a time reduction loss determination table for determining whether or not the time reduction is lost, and a lottery process based on the time reduction deviation determination random number is used. To determine whether or not the time reduction is lost (step 100IWS81). In this case, when the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the time saving loss determination table for the first special symbol is selected, and it is determined that the time saving is lost with a probability of about 1/400. (See FIG. 11-2). If the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the time saving loss determination table for the second special symbol is selected, and it is determined that the time saving is lost with a probability of about 1/200 (). See Figure 11-3).

When it is decided to be out of time (Y in step 100IWS82), the CPU 103 uses the type corresponding to the value corresponding to the value of the random number for type determination stored in the random number buffer area (out of time A or out of time). B, time saving loss C) is determined as the type of time saving loss (step 100IWS83). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the type determination random numbers extracted in the start winning determination process (step S101) and stored in advance in the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer, and determines the time saving type. Then, the process proceeds to step 100 IWS84.

In step 100IWS83, the time saving type determination is performed using the type determination random number used in the jackpot type determination in step 100IWS65 and the common type determination random number. Furthermore, when the small hit type is also determined and the small hit type is also determined, a common type determination random number is used in the small hit type determination in addition to the large hit type determination and the time saving type determination. It may be configured to perform the determination process.

Next, the CPU 103 determines the stop symbol of the special symbol according to the determination result of the jackpot type and the time saving type (step 100IWS84). In this case, for example, if it is decided to make a normal jackpot, the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "3", and if it is decided to be a probabilistic jackpot, the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "7". If it is decided and suddenly it is decided to make a probabilistic jackpot, the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "9", and if it is decided to be the time saving out of A, the stop symbol of the special symbol is set to "2". If it is decided and it is decided to set the time saving out of B, the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "4", and if it is decided to be the time saving out of C, the stop symbol of the special symbol is set to "6". If it is decided and it is decided that it is out of order (no time reduction), the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined as "-". Further, the CPU 103 stores the determined stop symbol of the special symbol in the stop symbol storage area provided in the RAM 102 (step 100IWS85).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S111) (step 100IWS86).

(Variation pattern setting process)
FIG. 11-14 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern setting process (step S111) in the special symbol process process. In the variation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first confirms whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step 100IWS1701). If the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0 (step 100IWS1701A). When the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0 (that is, when the relief time is shortened and the value is a big hit), the CPU 103 uses FIG. 11-8 (J) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern. ) Is selected (step 100 IWS1701B). When the value of the relief time reduction counter is not 0, the CPU 103 selects the jackpot fluctuation pattern table A shown in FIG. 11-7 (A) as the table for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 100IWS1702). ..

If the jackpot flag is not set (that is, if it is off), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0 (step 100IWS1702A). When the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0 (that is, when the relief time is shortened and the variation display is out of order), the CPU 103 uses FIG. 11-8 (I) as a table for determining the variation pattern. ) Is selected (step 100 IWS1702B). When the value of the relief time reduction counter is not 0, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the relief time reduction counter is 10 or less (step 100IWS1703). If the value of the relief time reduction counter is 10 or less (that is, if the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is reduced is 10 or less), the CPU 103 has a total hold storage counter value of 3 or less. Check if it is. In addition, not limited to the aspect shown in this example, for example, it may be configured to confirm whether or not the value of the first hold storage number counter or the second hold storage number counter is 3 or less.

If the value of the total pending storage counter is 3 or less (Y in step 100IWS1704), the CPU 103 serves as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern for the deviation immediately before the relief time reduction shown in FIG. 11-8 (F). The variation pattern table F of (step 100IWS1705) is selected. If the value of the total pending storage counter is 4 or more (N in step 100IWS1704), the CPU 103 serves as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern for the deviation immediately before the relief time reduction shown in FIG. 11-8 (G). The variation pattern table G of (step 100IWS1706) is selected.

If the value of the relief time reduction counter is not 10 or less (N in step 100IWS1703), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the probability change flag is set (step 100IWS1707). If the probability change flag is set (that is, in the probability change state), the CPU 103 uses the fluctuation pattern table for deviation in the probability change state shown in FIG. 11-8 (H) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern. Select H (step 100 IWS 1708). However, in this case, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total pending storage counter, selects the variation pattern table H on condition that the value of the total pending storage counter is 1 or more, and sets the value of the total pending storage counter. If is 0 (that is, if there is no hold storage), the variation pattern table B for deviation in the normal state shown in FIG. 11-7 (B) is selected.

If the probability change flag is not set, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time saving flag A indicating that the time saving state is controlled via the jackpot is set (step 100IWS1709). If the time saving flag A is set (that is, if the time saving state is controlled via the jackpot), the CPU 103 uses the jackpot as shown in FIG. 11-7 (C) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern. The variation pattern table C for the outlier in the controlled time saving state is selected (step 100IWS1710). However, in this case, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total pending storage counter, selects the variation pattern table C on condition that the value of the total pending storage counter is 1 or more, and sets the value of the total pending storage counter. If is 0 (that is, if there is no hold storage), the variation pattern table B for deviation in the normal state shown in FIG. 11-7 (B) is selected.

If the time saving flag A is not set, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time saving flag B indicating that the time saving state is controlled via the time saving deviation is set (step 100IWS1711). If the time reduction flag B is set (that is, if the time reduction state is controlled via the time reduction deviation), the CPU 103 uses the time reduction deviation as shown in FIG. 11-7 (D) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern. The variation pattern table D for the outlier in the time saving state controlled via the method is selected (step 100IWS1712). However, in this case, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total pending storage counter, selects the variation pattern table D on condition that the value of the total pending storage counter is 1 or more, and sets the value of the total pending storage counter. If is 0 (that is, if there is no hold storage), the variation pattern table B for deviation in the normal state shown in FIG. 11-7 (B) is selected.

If the time saving flag B is not set, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time saving flag C indicating that the time saving state is controlled via the relief time saving is set (step 100IWS1713). If the time saving flag C is set (that is, if the time saving state is controlled via the relief time saving), the CPU 103 uses the relief time saving as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern as shown in FIG. 11-8 (E). The variation pattern table E for the outlier in the time saving state controlled via the method is selected (step 100IWS1714).

If the time saving flag C is not set (that is, in the normal state), the CPU 103 uses the fluctuation pattern for deviation in the normal state shown in FIG. 11-7 (B) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern. Select table B (step 100 IWS 1715).

Next, the CPU 103 is stored in the variation pattern table determined to be used in steps 100IWS1701B, S1702, S1702B, S1705, S1706, S1708, S1710, S1712, S1714, S1715, and the first special symbol determination buffer. Based on the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern, which of the fluctuation patterns shown in FIGS. 11-7 and 11-8 is used is determined (step 100 IWS1716). In this example, by determining the fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is determined. After determining the fluctuation time, the fluctuation pattern in which the determined fluctuation time is set may be selected from a plurality of fluctuation patterns.

When the variation pattern is determined, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1717).

Further, when the fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is determined in step 100IWS1716, the CPU 103 sets the fluctuation time data indicating the determined fluctuation time in the fluctuation time timer and measures the fluctuation time. (Step 100IWS1718), the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A or the variation display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is started (step 100IWS1719). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol variation processing (step 100IWS1720).

(Special symbol variation processing)
FIG. 11-15 is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation process (step S112) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol variation processing, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first determines whether or not to make a big hit, the big hit type determination result, and the time saving type if it has not been transmitted yet. Based on the determination result of, one of the display result designation commands (display result 1 designation command to display result 7 designation command) is controlled to be transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1121).

Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the fluctuation time timer (step 100IWS1122), and when the fluctuation time timer times out (step 100IWS1123), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not it is determined to be out of time (step). 100IWS1124). It should be noted that whether or not it is determined that the time reduction is out of time can be determined, for example, by confirming the stop symbol of the special symbol stored in the stop symbol storage area in step 100 IWS85.

If it is determined that the time is out of time, the CPU 103 controls to start lighting the right-handed LED 100IW10 (step 100IWS1125). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the right-handed notification start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1126).

By executing the process of step 100IWS1125, in this example, when the time-saving out-of-time symbol is derived and displayed, the right-handed LED 100IW10 is started to light at the start of the symbol determination period.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time saving flag A or the time saving flag B is set (step 100IWS1127). If neither the time saving flag A nor the time saving flag B is set (that is, in the normal state), the CPU 103 measures the fixed display period of the stop symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. A value corresponding to "20 seconds" is set in the fixed period timer (step 100IWS1128). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the first symbol confirmation A designation command or the second symbol confirmation A designation command that can specify that the symbol confirmation period is 20 seconds to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1129). In this case, when the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "first", control is performed to send the first symbol confirmation A designation command, and the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "second". In this case, control is performed to send the second symbol confirmation A designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step 100 IWS1139.

If the time saving flag A or the time saving flag B is set (that is, in the time saving state), the CPU 103 determines the symbol confirmation period for measuring the confirmation display period of the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. A value corresponding to "10 seconds" is set in the timer (step 100IWS1130). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the first symbol confirmation B designation command or the second symbol confirmation B designation command that can specify that the symbol confirmation period is 10 seconds to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1131). In this case, if the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "first", control is performed to send the first symbol confirmation B designation command, and the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "second". In this case, control is performed to send the second symbol confirmation B designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step 100 IWS1139.

Unless it is determined to be out of time (N in step 100IWS1124), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the relief time reduction determination flag is set (step 100IWS1132). If the rescue time reduction determination flag is set, the CPU 103 controls to start lighting the right-handed LED 100IW10 (step 100IWS1133). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the right-handed notification start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1134).

By executing the process of step 100IWS1133, in this example, when the relief time is shortened, the right-handed LED 100IW10 is started to light at the start of the symbol determination period.

Next, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to "20 seconds" in the symbol confirmation period timer for measuring the confirmation display period of the stop symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol (step 100IWS1135). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the first symbol confirmation A designation command or the second symbol confirmation A designation command that can specify that the symbol confirmation period is 20 seconds to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1136). In this case, when the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "first", control is performed to send the first symbol confirmation A designation command, and the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "second". In this case, control is performed to send the second symbol confirmation A designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step 100 IWS1139.

If the relief time reduction determination flag is not set (N in step 100IWS1132), the CPU 103 sets the symbol confirmation period timer for measuring the confirmation display period of the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol to "0.5". A value corresponding to "seconds" is set (step 100 IWS1137). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the first symbol confirmation C designation command or the second symbol confirmation C designation command capable of specifying that the symbol confirmation period is 0.5 seconds to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1138). .. In this case, if the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "first", control is performed to send the first symbol confirmation C designation command, and the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "second". In this case, control is performed to send the second symbol confirmation C designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step 100 IWS1139.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop process (step S113) (step 100IWS1139).

(Special symbol stop processing)
11-16 and 11-17 are flowcharts showing a special symbol stop process (step S113) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 first subtracts 1 from the value of the symbol confirmation period timer (step 100IWS131), and confirms whether or not the value of the symbol confirmation period timer after the subtraction is 0 (step 100IWS132). ..

If the value of the symbol confirmation period timer after subtraction is not 0 (that is, if the confirmation display period of the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol has not ended), the special symbol stop process is terminated. do. If the value of the symbol confirmation period timer after subtraction is 0 (that is, if the confirmation display period of the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol has ended), the jackpot flag is set in the CPU 103. It is confirmed whether or not it has been performed (step 100IWS133). When the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103, if set, counts the probability change flag, the time reduction flag A, the time reduction flag B, the time reduction flag C, and the number of times of execution of the variation display during the probability change state. The probability variation counter and the time reduction counter for counting the number of executions of the variation display during the time reduction state are reset (step 100IWS134).

Next, the CPU 103 sets "800" in the relief time reduction counter (step 100IWS135). Therefore, in this example, when "800" is set in the relief time reduction counter triggered by the big hit, and even if the fluctuation display of 800 times is executed after the big hit game is completed, neither the next big hit nor the time reduction occurs. , The relief time will be shortened and the time will be controlled.

In this example, when a big hit is obtained by executing the process of step 100 IWS135, "800" is set in the relief time reduction counter at the start of the fanfare period of the big hit to make an initial setting. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, "800" may be set in the relief time reduction counter during the round of the jackpot game, and "800" may be set in the relief time reduction counter at the start or end of the ending period of the jackpot game to make the initial setting. It may be configured as.

Next, the CPU 103 controls to start lighting the right-handed LED 100IW10 (step 100IWS136). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the right-handed notification start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS137).

Next, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the jackpot start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS138). Next, the CPU 103 sets a large winning opening pre-opening time timer for measuring the large winning opening pre-opening time (fanfare time) until the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to the open state (step 100IWS139). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot release preprocessing (step S144) (step 100 IWS140).

If the jackpot flag is not set (N in step 100IWS133), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time saving end flag is set (step 100IWS141). If the time saving end flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the time saving end flag (step 100IWS142). Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time saving flag C is set (step 100IWS143). If the time saving flag C is set, the CPU 103 sets "800" in the relief time saving number counter (step 100IWS144).

In this example, as will be described later, when the relief time is shortened, the time reduction state is controlled to 800 times (see steps 100IWS172 and S173). By executing the processes of steps 100 IWS143 and S144, in this example, when the time reduction state is controlled with the relief time reduction as an opportunity, after that, the variation display is executed 800 times without a big hit or a time reduction loss. With this as an opportunity, "800" is set in the relief time reduction counter. After that, if the next big hit or time reduction does not occur even after executing the fluctuation display 800 times, the second relief time is shortened and the time reduction state is controlled. In this example, the time reduction does not occur in the time reduction state triggered by the relief time reduction, but it may occur and the value of the relief time reduction counter is reset (that is, "800" is set). ) May be done.

Next, the CPU 103 resets any of the set time saving flags (any of the time saving flags A to C) and ends the time saving state (step 100IWS145). Then, the process proceeds to step 100 IWS150.

If the time saving end flag is not set (N in step 100IWS141), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the probability variation counter is 0 (step 100IWS146). If the value of the probability variation counter is 0, the process proceeds to step 100IWS153. If the value of the probability variation counter is not 0, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the probability variation counter (step 100IWS147) and confirms whether or not the value of the probability variation counter after subtraction is 0 (step 100IWS148). ). If the value of the probability change counter after subtraction is 0, the CPU 10 resets the probability change flag and the time saving flag A, and ends the probability change state (step 100IWS149). Then, the process proceeds to step 100 IWS150.

Next, the CPU 103 controls to end the lighting of the right-handed LED 100IW10 (step 100IWS150). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the right-handed notification end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS151). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the normal state designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS152). Then, the process proceeds to step 100 IWS153.

In this example, by executing the processes of steps 100IWS141 to S152, the time saving final variation and the probability variation final variation shift to the normal state at the end of the symbol determination period and end the right-handed notification. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, in the time saving final fluctuation or the probability variation final fluctuation, the right-handed notification may be terminated by shifting to the normal state at the start of the fluctuation or the start of the symbol fixing period.

Further, in this example, the case where the probabilistic state is terminated and the time saving state is also terminated in the probabilistic final variation is shown, but not limited to such a mode, only the probabilistic state is terminated and the time saving state is continued. It may be configured.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not it is the case where the time reduction is decided (step 100IWS153). It should be noted that whether or not it is determined that the time reduction is out of time can be determined, for example, by confirming the stop symbol of the special symbol stored in the stop symbol storage area in step 100 IWS85.

If it is determined that the time reduction is off, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time reduction flag A or the time reduction flag B is set (step 100IWS154). If neither the time saving flag A nor the time saving flag B is set (that is, in the normal state), the CPU 103 sets "100" in the time saving number counter if it is out of time saving A (Y in step 100IWS155). (Step 100 IWS156). Then, the process proceeds to step 100 IWS165.

If it is not the time reduction A, the CPU 103 sets "50" in the time reduction counter if it is the time reduction B (Y in step 100IWS157) (step 100IWS158). Then, the process proceeds to step 100 IWS165.

If it is not the time reduction B (that is, if it is the time reduction C), the CPU 103 sets "30" in the time reduction counter (step 100IWS159). Then, the process proceeds to step 100 IWS165.

If the time saving flag A or the time saving flag B is set (that is, in the time saving state), the CPU 103 resets the value of the time saving number counter to 0 if the time saving is out of A (Y in step 100 IWS160). Step 100 IWS 161). Then, the process proceeds to step 100 IWS165.

If it is not the time reduction A, the CPU 103 sets "200" in the time reduction counter if it is the time reduction B (Y in step 100IWS162) (step 100IWS163). Then, the process proceeds to step 100 IWS165.

If it is not the time reduction B (that is, if it is the time reduction C), the CPU 103 sets "100" in the time reduction counter (step 100IWS164). Then, the process proceeds to step 100 IWS165.

Next, the CPU 103 resets the time saving flag A if it is set (step 100IWS165). Further, the CPU 103 sets the time saving flag B and controls the time saving state (step 100IWS166).

Next, the CPU 103 sets "800" in the relief time reduction counter (step 100IWS167). Therefore, in this example, when "800" is set in the relief time reduction counter triggered by the time reduction, and even if the fluctuation display of 800 times is executed after the time reduction is executed, neither the next big hit nor the time reduction occurs. , The relief time will be shortened and the time will be controlled.

Next, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the time saving state B designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS168).

By executing the processing of steps 100IWS166 and S168, in this example, when the time saving out-of-time symbol is derived and displayed, the time saving state is controlled at the end of the symbol confirmation period, and the time saving state B designation command is issued. By being transmitted, the background image can be switched according to the time saving state via the time saving deviation.

Unless it is determined to be out of time (N in step 100IWS153), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the relief time reduction determination flag is set (step 100IWS170). If the relief time reduction determination flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the relief time reduction determination flag (step 100IWS171), sets the time reduction counter to "800" (step 100IWS172), and sets the relief time reduction counter to "800". Is set (step 100IWS172A). Further, the CPU 103 sets the time saving flag C and controls the time saving state (step 100IWS173). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the time saving state C designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS174).

In this example, the relief time can be continuously generated by controlling the time reduction state at the timing when the relief time is shortened and setting the relief time reduction counter ("800" is set). Once the time reduction occurs, it is configured to continue the time reduction state until a big hit occurs, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, at the timing when the relief time is shortened, the relief time reduction counter is not set only by controlling the time reduction state, and then the relief time reduction counter is set at the timing when the fluctuation display of 800 times is finished and the normal state is controlled. (See step 100 IWS 144).

Further, in this example, "800" is set when setting the relief time reduction counter, and the value of the relief time reduction counter is subtracted by 1 each time the fluctuation display is executed, and the value of the relief time reduction counter is "0". However, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, "0" is set when setting the relief time reduction counter, and the value of the relief time reduction counter is added by 1 each time the fluctuation display is executed, and the value of the relief time reduction counter becomes "800". Based on this, it may be configured to generate a reduction in relief time.

Further, in this example, when the relief time is shortened, a case is shown in which 20 seconds longer than usual is set as the symbol confirmation period to secure an effect period such as a mode transition effect, but the image display device is used during the symbol determination period. In 5, the decorative symbol may not be displayed, but only the small symbol may be displayed so that the small symbol is not concealed by the effecting object or the like.

Further, in this example, by executing the process of step 100IWS172, 800 times, which is the same as the number of fluctuations until the relief time reduction occurs, is set as the time reduction number, but it is limited to such a mode. No. For example, in step 100IWS172, a value larger than "800" may be set in the time reduction counter, or a value smaller than "800" may be set.

Further, in step 100IWS172, a value corresponding to a plurality of types of time reduction times may be set in the time reduction counter. For example, when the relief time is shortened for the first time, "100" is set in the time reduction counter, and when the relief time is shortened for the second time, "800" is set in the time reduction counter. May be good.

Further, for example, a lottery process based on a random number may be performed to determine the number of time reductions, and in step 100IWS172, a value corresponding to the number of time reductions determined in the lottery process may be set in the time reduction counter. good. In this case, for example, the number of time reductions may be determined to be 100 times with a probability of 10% and 800 times with a probability of 90%. When determining the number of time reductions by lottery processing, the number of time reductions may be determined by using the type determination random number used for determining the jackpot type and the time reduction type, or the number of time reductions may be determined using a dedicated random number. You may.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step S110) (step 100IWS175).

(External output signal)
FIG. 11-18 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an external output signal output externally from the pachinko gaming machine 1. As shown in FIGS. 11-18, in this example, a jackpot 1 signal, a jackpot 2 signal, a jackpot 3 signal, a jackpot 4 signal, and a fluctuation stop signal are output as external output signals. Of these, the jackpot 1 signal is a signal that is output externally during the jackpot game. Further, the jackpot 2 signal is a signal that is output externally during the jackpot game and the time saving state. Further, the jackpot 3 signals are signals that are output externally during the symbol determination period that is out of time. Further, the jackpot 4 signals are signals that are output externally during the symbol determination period of the variation display in which the relief time is shortened. The fluctuation stop signal is a signal that is output externally at the start of the symbol determination period.

In this example, in addition to the case where the game is shifted to the time saving state at the end of the big hit game, the time saving out-of-time symbol may be derived and displayed even when the time-saving out-of-time symbol is derived and displayed. At the end of the symbol determination period, the external output of the jackpot 2 signal is started. In addition, even if the relief time is shortened, the time may be shortened. Therefore, if a symbol that is out of the variable display that shortens the relief time is derived and displayed, the jackpot 2 signal is displayed at the end of the symbol confirmation period. External output is started.

The big hit 3 signal and the big hit 4 signal may be configured to be output not only during the symbol determination period but also during the big hit game. Further, in this example, a case where different external output signals (3 big hit signals and 4 big hit signals) are output for the case where the time reduction is missed and the case where the relief time is shortened is shown, but the external output signal for both purposes is shown. May be configured to output.

Further, the big hit 3 signal and the big hit 4 signal may be configured to be output at a timing after the fluctuation stop signal during the symbol determination period is output.

For example, a fluctuation stop signal may be output at the start of the symbol confirmation period of the missing symbol, and three jackpot signals may be output during the symbol confirmation period after the fluctuation stop signal is output, or a variation display that shortens the relief time. The fluctuation stop signal may be output at the start of the symbol confirmation period, and four jackpot signals may be output during the symbol confirmation period after the fluctuation stop signal is output. With such a configuration, when the fluctuation stop signal and the big hit 3 signal or the big hit 4 signal are output at the same time, it is possible to prevent the signal from being dropped externally.

Further, the jackpot 3 signals may be configured to be continuously output even during the time saving state via the time saving deviation. Further, the jackpot 4 signals may be configured to be continuously output even during the time saving state via the relief time saving. With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably discriminate the type of the time saving even in the time saving state.

(Big hit end processing)
FIG. 11-19 is a flowchart showing a jackpot end process (step S117) in the special symbol process process. In the jackpot end processing, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the jackpot end display timer is set (step 100IWS531), and if the jackpot end display timer is set, proceeds to step 100IWS535. If the jackpot end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 resets the jackpot flag (step 100IWS532) and controls the transmission of the jackpot end designation command (step 100IWS533). Then, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time (big hit end display time) in which the big hit end display is performed in the image display device 5 in the big hit end display timer (step 100IWS534), and performs the process. finish.

In step 100 IWS535, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the jackpot end display timer. Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 100IWS536). If it has not passed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step 100IWS536), the CPU 103 sets the time saving flag A and controls the time saving state (step 100IWS537). Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the jackpot that ends this time is a normal jackpot (step 100IWS538). Whether or not it is a normal big hit can be determined by checking, for example, the stop symbol of the special symbol stored in the stop symbol storage area in step 100 IWS85. If it is a normal big hit, the CPU 103 sets "100" in the time reduction counter (step 100IWS539). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the time saving state A designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS540).

If it is not a normal jackpot (that is, if it is a probability variation jackpot or a sudden probability variation jackpot), the CPU 103 sets a probability variation flag and controls the probability variation state (step 100IWS541). Further, the CPU 103 sets "100" in the probability variation counter (step 100IWS542). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the probability change state designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS543).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step S110) (step 100IWS544).

(state change)
Next, the state transition in the feature unit 108IW will be described. FIG. 11-20 is a state transition diagram for explaining the state transition in the feature unit 108IW. As shown in FIG. 11-20, in the normal state, when a probability variation jackpot or a sudden probability variation jackpot occurs, the probability variation state is controlled (see steps 100IWS541 to S542), and when a normal jackpot occurs, the time saving state A (see steps 100IWS541 to S542). It is controlled to (time saving state via jackpot) (see steps 100IWS537 to S539). Further, in the normal state, even if the symbol is out of time, it is controlled to the time saving state B (time saving state via the time saving deviation) when the time saving out-of-time symbol is derived and displayed (see step 100IWS166). Furthermore, even if the time is lost, the number of fluctuations has reached 800 times without the next big hit or time saving loss occurring after the RAM clear processing or after the big hit or time saving loss. In the case), it is controlled to the time saving state C (time saving state via the relief time saving) (see step 100IWS173).

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-20, in the probability change state, when the probability change big hit or the sudden probability change big hit occurs, the probability change state is controlled again (see steps 100IWS541 to S542), and when the normal big hit occurs, the time is shortened. It is controlled to state A (time saving state via jackpot) (see steps 100IWS537 to S539). On the other hand, in the probabilistic state, the time saving out-of-time symbol is not derived and displayed (see Y in step 100IWS80), and the relief time is not shortened. Further, in the probabilistic state, when the fluctuation display of 100 times is completed without the occurrence of a big hit, it is controlled to the normal state (see steps 100IWS146 to S149).

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-20, in the time saving state A, when the probability change big hit or the sudden probability change big hit occurs, the probability change state is controlled (see steps 100IWS541 to S542), and when the normal big hit occurs again. It is controlled to the time saving state A (time saving state via the jackpot) (see steps 100IWS537 to S539). Further, in the time saving state A, even if it is out of time, it is controlled to the time saving state B (time saving state via the time saving out) when the time saving out-of-time symbol is derived and displayed (see step 100IWS166). Further, in the time saving state A, when the fluctuation display of 100 times is completed without the occurrence of a big hit, it is controlled to the normal state (see steps 100IWS66 to S69 and S145). On the other hand, in the time saving state A, the relief time may not be shortened.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-20, in the time saving state B, when the probability change big hit or the sudden probability change big hit occurs, the probability change state is controlled (see steps 100IWS541 to S542), and when the normal big hit occurs, the time reduction occurs. It is controlled to state A (time saving state via jackpot) (see steps 100IWS537 to S539). Further, in the time saving state B, even if the time saving state B is out of order, when the time saving out-of-time symbol is derived and displayed, the time saving state B (time saving state via the time saving out of time) is controlled again (see step 100IWS166). Further, in the time saving state A, when the variation display of 30, 50, 100, or 200 times is completed without the occurrence of a big hit, it is controlled to the normal state (see steps 100IWS66 to S69 and S145). However, if the time reduction state is controlled to the time reduction state B due to the time reduction loss A during the time reduction state, the time reduction state B is continued until the next big hit occurs (see steps 100IWS160 and S161). On the other hand, there is no case where the relief time is shortened in the time saving state B.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-20, in the time saving state C, when the probability change big hit or the sudden probability change big hit occurs, the probability change state is controlled (see steps 100IWS541 to S542), and when the normal big hit occurs, the time reduction occurs. It is controlled to state A (time saving state via jackpot) (see steps 100IWS537 to S539). On the other hand, in the time saving state C, the time saving out-of-time symbol is not derived and displayed (see Y in step 100IWS79). Further, in the time saving state C, when the variation display of 800 times is completed without the occurrence of a big hit, the time saving state C (time saving state via the relief time saving) is controlled again (see steps 100IWS170 to S173).

In this example, when the time saving out-of-time symbol is derived and displayed in the time saving state A, the case is uniformly shifted to the time saving state B, but the control mode is not limited to such a control mode. For example, the remaining number of times of the current time reduction is compared with the number of time reductions corresponding to the determined time reduction type, and if the remaining number of times of the current time reduction is larger, the current time reduction state A is configured to continue as it is. You may.

In this example, when a normal jackpot occurs during the time saving state B, the case where the time saving state A is uniformly shifted is shown, but the control mode is not limited to such a control mode. For example, the remaining number of times of the current time reduction is compared with the number of time reductions corresponding to the normal jackpot (100 times in this example), and if the remaining number of times of the current time reduction is larger, the current time reduction state B is continued as it is. It may be configured to do so.

Further, in this example, a case is shown in which the time saving out-of-time symbol is not derived and displayed in the time saving state C (see Y in step 100IWS79), but the present invention is not limited to such a mode, for example. , Even in the time saving state C, it may be configured so that it can be determined that the time saving is out.

Further, in this example, when the probability change state is controlled, the case where the probability change state is terminated based on the execution of the fluctuation display 100 times is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, it may be configured to determine whether or not to end the probabilistic state for each variation display by a lottery process, and to end the probabilistic state based on the determination to end the probabilistic state.

(Main processing of production control)
Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 11-21 is a flowchart showing a specific example of the effect control main process in the feature unit 108IW. In FIG. 11-21, the processes of steps S71 to S76 are the same as those processes shown in FIG.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the small symbol process process (step 087IWS701). In this example, by executing the small symbol process process of step 087IWS701, the image display device 5 synchronizes with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in addition to the variable display of the decorative symbol. In the image display device 5, a variable display of small symbols in a reduced manner of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols is executed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the fourth symbol process process (step 100IWS702). In this example, by executing the fourth symbol process process of step 100IWS702, the image display device 5 synchronizes with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in addition to the variable display of the decorative symbol. The variable display of the fourth symbol is executed. In this example, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed by the fourth symbol display 100IW21a provided on the left side of the image display device 5. When the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed on the fourth symbol display 100IW21b provided on the right side of the image display device 5.

The process of step S77 is the same as the process of step S77 shown in FIG.

When the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed, the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed by alternately turning on and off the two LEDs arranged above and below on the fourth symbol display 100IW21a and 21b. Will be done.

When the fluctuation time is completed, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is confirmed and displayed at the start of the symbol determination period. In this case, in the case of a big hit, the two LEDs arranged one above the other as the big hit symbol are stopped and displayed in a state of being lit in red. In addition, when the time reduction is lost, the two LEDs arranged above and below as the time reduction deviation symbol are stopped and displayed in a state of being lit in blue. In addition, when the LED is off (no time reduction), the two LEDs arranged above and below are turned off as an out-of-order design (no time reduction), and the stop display is displayed.

The mode of the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is not limited to the mode shown in this example, and for example, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is derived and displayed in a mode in which the jackpot type and the time saving type can be distinguished. May be good.

Further, in this example, the case where a dedicated symbol is provided as the time-saving out-of-time symbol of the fourth symbol is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode, and the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is provided in the case of a big hit and the case of time-saving out of time. May be used as a common pattern.

(Command analysis processing)
Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. 11-22 to 11-23 are flowcharts showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step S75). The effect control command received from the main board 11 is stored in the received command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step 100IWS611). Whether or not it is stored is determined by comparing the value of the command reception count counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 120 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step 100IWS612). After reading, the value of the read pointer is set to +2 (step 100IWS613). The reason for +2 is that it reads 2 bytes (1 command) at a time.

If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (step 100IWS614), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received variation pattern command in the variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 100IWS615). Then, the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step 100IWS616).

If the received effect control command is a display result specification command (step 100IWS617), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received display result specification command in the display result specification command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 100IWS618). ).

The received effect control command is one of the symbol confirmation command (1st symbol confirmation A designation command, 1st symbol confirmation B designation command, 1st symbol confirmation C designation command, 2nd symbol confirmation A designation command, 2nd symbol confirmation If it is (B designation command, second symbol confirmation C designation command) (step 100IWS619), the effect control CPU 120 sets the confirmation command reception flag corresponding to the received symbol confirmation designation command (step 100IWS620). For example, when the first symbol confirmation A designation command is received, the first confirmation A command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the first symbol confirmation B designation command is received, the first confirmation B command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the first symbol confirmation C designation command is received, the first confirmation C command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the second symbol confirmation A designation command is received, the second confirmation A command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the second symbol confirmation B designation command is received, the second confirmation B command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the second symbol confirmation C designation command is received, the second confirmation C command reception flag is set.

If the received effect control command is a jackpot start designation command (step 100IWS621), the effect control CPU 120 sets the jackpot start designation command reception flag (step 100IWS622). If the received effect control command is a jackpot end designation command (step 100IWS623), the effect control CPU 120 sets the jackpot end designation command reception flag (step 100IWS624).

If the received effect control command is a rescue time reduction 1 designation command (step 100IWS625), the effect control CPU 120 transmits the received relief time reduction 1 designation command to the relief time reduction 1 designation command storage area formed in the RAM 122. Store in (step 100 IWS 626).

If the received effect control command is a rescue time reduction 2 designation command (step 100IWS627), the effect control CPU 120 transmits the received relief time reduction 2 designation command to the relief time reduction 2 designation command storage area formed in the RAM 122. Store in (step 100 IWS628).

If the received effect control command is a recovery time reduction time reduction command (step 100IWS629), the effect control CPU 120 reaches the relief time reduction in the image display device 5 based on the received recovery time reduction number designation command. Control is performed to display the initial result according to the number of times (step 100IWS630). For example, when the EXT data of the received recovery time reduction command is "01 (H)" (when the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is reduced is 100 or less), the initial result is "112". Is displayed, suggesting that the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 100 or less. Further, for example, when the EXT data of the received recovery time reduction command is "02 (H)" (when the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 101 times or more and 200 times or less), the initial stage. "223" is displayed as a result, suggesting that the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 101 times or more and 200 times or less. Further, for example, when the EXT data of the received recovery time reduction command is "08 (H)" (when the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 701 or more and 800 or less), the initial state "889" is displayed as a result, suggesting that the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 701 or more and 800 or less.

It should be noted that not only when the initial result suggesting the remaining number of fluctuations is displayed at the time of power restoration, for example, in the first variation display after power restoration, a display suggesting the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is displayed. , A combination of symbols suggesting the number of remaining fluctuations may be displayed. Further, for example, within 1 to 100 fluctuations after the power restoration, a display suggesting the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened, a combination of symbols suggesting the remaining fluctuations, and the like are displayed after the power restoration. The suggestion display may be configured at a relatively early stage. Further, it may be configured so as not to suggest the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened by the initial roll (for example, in the configuration of Example 2 described later, the relief time is shortened by the initial roll). It is possible not to suggest the number of remaining fluctuations).

If the received effect control command is a normal state specification command (step 100IWS631), the effect control CPU 120 displays a background image according to the normal state (for example, a blue background image according to the sea mode) in the image display device 5. Control is performed to switch to (step 100 IWS632).

If the received effect control command is a time saving state A designation command (step 100IWS633), the effect control CPU 120 presents the image display device 5 with a background image (for example, a setting sun) corresponding to the time saving state A (time saving state via a jackpot). Control to switch to the yellow background image according to the mode) is performed (step 100IWS634).

If the received effect control command is a time saving state B designation command (step 100IWS635), the effect control CPU 120 presents the image display device 5 with a background image (for example, a time saving state via the time saving state) according to the time saving state B. Control to switch to the green background image according to the forest mode) is performed (step 100IWS636).

If the received effect control command is a time saving state C designation command (step 100IWS637), the effect control CPU 120 displays a background image (for example, a time saving state via the relief time saving) in the image display device 5. Control is performed to switch to the orange background image according to the tangerine field mode (step 100IWS638).

In this example, by executing the processes of steps 100IWS633 to S638, even in the same time saving state, which of the time saving state via the jackpot, the time saving state via the time saving loss, and the time saving state via the relief time saving is performed. Display different background images depending on. With such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify the player of the difference in the gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest.

Not limited to the mode shown in this example, the common background image is displayed regardless of whether the time saving state is via the jackpot, the time saving state via the time saving loss, or the time saving state via the relief time saving. It may be configured. For example, a common background image may be displayed in step 100IW634, step 100IWS636, and step 100IWS638, and a common background image may be displayed in the time saving state via the jackpot, the time saving state via the time saving loss, and the time saving state via the relief time saving. It may be configured as.

If the received effect control command is a probability change state specification command (step 100IWS639), the effect control CPU 120 displays a background image according to the probability change state (for example, a red background image according to the flame mode) in the image display device 5. Control is performed to switch to (step 100 IWS 640).

If the received effect control command is a right-handed notification start designation command (step 100IWS641), the effect control CPU 120 controls to start lighting the right-handed notification LED 100IW20 (step 100IWS642). In this example, the right-handed notification start designation command is transmitted at the start of the symbol confirmation period when the time saving out-of-time symbol is derived and displayed or the relief time is shortened (see step 100IWS1126, S1134). At the start of the symbol determination period, the right-handed notification LED 100IW20 is turned on.

If the received effect control command is a right-handed notification end designation command (step 100IWS643), the effect control CPU 120 controls to end the lighting of the right-handed notification LED 100IW20 (step 100IWS644).

If the received effect control command is another command, the effect control CPU 120 executes a process of storing the received effect control command or setting a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step 100 IWS645). ). For example, when a command for designating a large prize opening is received, a large winning opening winning flag indicating that the large winning opening has been won is set. Then, the process proceeds to step 100 IWS611.

(Customer waiting demo production control process)
FIG. 11-24 is a flowchart showing a customer waiting demo effect control process. As described above, in this example, when the hold storage is not stored at the end of the symbol determination period and the end of the jackpot game (that is, when the total number of hold storages is 0), the effect control board from the main board 11 A customer waiting demo designation command is transmitted to 12.

When the customer waiting demo designation command is received, the production control CPU 120 receives the customer waiting demo designation command, and then 10 seconds elapse without receiving other commands such as the production control command at the time of starting winning. (Y in step 105IWS250), the telop display execution lottery process is executed (step 105IWS251).

In this example, it is possible to display a telop indicating that the relief time saving function is installed during the period when the variable display is not performed. In step 105 IWS251, it is determined by lottery whether or not to display the telop.

FIG. 11-25 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the telop display execution lottery table and the telop mode determination lottery table. Of FIGS. 11-25, FIG. 11-25 (A) is a telop display execution lottery table used when the set value is set to "1", and FIG. 11-25 (B) shows the set value. It is a telop display execution lottery table used when it is set to "6".

As shown in FIGS. 11-25 (A) and 11-25 (B), in this example, the ratio of displaying the telop while waiting for a customer differs depending on the number of times remaining until the relief time is shortened. With such a configuration, it is possible to suggest the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened depending on the presence or absence of the telop display while waiting for the customer.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-25 (A) and 11-25 (B), in this example, the ratio of displaying the telop while waiting for a customer differs depending on the set value. With such a configuration, it can be suggested whether the set value is set to be advantageous depending on the presence or absence of the telop display while waiting for the customer.

In addition, in FIG. 11-25, an example of the setting value 1 and the setting value 6 is shown for simplification of the description, but a table corresponding to each setting value may be provided, or a plurality of sets may be provided. A table corresponding to the set value of (for example, set values 1 to 3) may be provided.

When it is determined to execute the telop display (Y in step 105IWS252), the effect control CPU 120 executes the telop display mode determination lottery process (step 105IWS253). Then, the telop display is started (step 105IWS254).

In this example, the telop display can be performed by the red effect mode and the blue effect mode. In step 105 IWS253, the effect mode of the telop display is determined by lottery.

FIG. 11-25 (C) is a telop mode determination lottery table used when the set value is set to "1", and FIG. 11-25 (D) shows the set value set to "6". It is a telop mode determination lottery table used when there is.

As shown in FIGS. 11-25 (C) and 11-25 (D), in this example, the effect mode of the telop display displayed while waiting for a customer differs depending on the number of times remaining until the relief time is shortened. With such a configuration, it is possible to suggest the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened depending on the effect mode of the telop display waiting for the customer.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-25 (C) and 11-25 (D), in this example, the ratio of the telop display effect mode displayed while waiting for a customer is configured to be different depending on the set value. With such a configuration, it can be suggested whether the set value is set to be advantageous depending on the effect mode of the telop display waiting for the customer.

Then, after 3 minutes have passed without receiving other commands such as the effect control command at the time of starting winning after receiving the customer waiting demo designation command (Y in step 105IWS255), the effect control CPU 120 is demonstrated. The movie is played back (step 105IWS256).

It should be noted that the telop display and the reproduction of the demonstration movie waiting for the customer are terminated when the production control command or the like at the time of the start winning is received.

11-26 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the effect mode of the telop display. In the example shown in FIGS. 11-26, the screens change in the order of (A), (B), (C), or (A), (D), and (E).

As shown in FIGS. 11-26 (A), if the hold storage is not stored when the symbol determination period elapses, the customer waiting demo designation command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

Then, after receiving the customer waiting demo designation command on the production control board 12 side, 10 seconds have passed without receiving other commands such as the production control command at the time of starting winning, and the telop display while waiting for the customer is displayed. If it is decided to do so, the image display device 5 displays a telop display indicating that the relief time saving function is installed.

At this time, if it is determined to display the telop display according to the blue effect mode, the telop display 108IW001 with a blue edge is displayed (in the example of FIG. 11-26 (B), the edge is white. It is in the form of). Further, when it is determined to display the telop display according to the red effect mode, the telop display 108IW002 with a red edge is displayed (in the example of FIG. 11-26 (D), the edge is painted black. It is an aspect).

Then, after 3 minutes have passed without receiving other commands such as the production control command at the time of starting winning after receiving the customer waiting demo designation command on the production control board 12, the demonstration is performed on the image display device 5. The movie is played. As shown in FIGS. 11-26 (C) and 11-26 (E), the telop display is continuously displayed even during the playback of the demonstration movie.

(Read-ahead notice setting process)
11-27 is a flowchart showing a read-ahead notice setting process (step S161) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7.

In this example, in the start winning determination process (step S101) in the special symbol process process, a process of detecting the occurrence of the start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. In addition, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern is executed based on the extracted random number value. Then, after storing the hold information and the hold storage number, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning prize, the hold storage number, and the look-ahead determination is set on the effect control board 12. Will be done. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

In the look-ahead notice setting process (step S161), for example, a determination, determination, and setting for executing the look-ahead notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 11-27, the effect control CPU 120 is used to specify an effect control command at the time of starting a prize (for example, an effect control command for designating a determination result such as the occurrence of a start winning, the number of reserved memories, and the look-ahead determination). ) Is received (step 108IWS701).

When the effect control command at the time of starting prize is received, the effect control CPU 120 has a hold memory number including the hold memory for newly receiving the effect control command at the time of starting prize, which is larger than the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened. It is determined whether or not there are many (step 108IWS702). That is, it is determined whether or not the variable display corresponding to the newly stored hold memory due to the occurrence of the start winning is executed after the relief time is shortened. Then, when the number of reserved memories is not greater than the number of remaining times until the rescue time is shortened, that is, when the variable display corresponding to the newly stored reserved memory due to the occurrence of the start winning is executed after the rescue time is shortened. Ends the read-ahead notice setting process.

In this example, by executing the process of step 108IWS702, among the variable displays corresponding to the reserved storage stored before the relief time is shortened, the look-ahead notice effect for which the variable display when the relief time is shortened is targeted for advance notice is performed. While it is feasible, it restricts the execution of the look-ahead notice effect that targets the variable display after the variable display when the relief time is shortened. That is, it is configured to limit the execution of the look-ahead notice effect across the relief time reduction in which the game state changes. With such a configuration, it is possible to avoid complicating the control process and avoid inconsistency in the production contents.

When the number of reserved memories is larger than the number of remaining times until the rescue time is shortened, that is, when the variable display corresponding to the newly stored reserved memory due to the occurrence of the start winning is executed before the rescue time is shortened. The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the look-ahead notice effect is executed, the effect type when the pre-reading notice effect is executed, and the effect mode (step 108IWS703).

FIG. 11-28 is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of the pre-reading advance notice effect execution decision table, the pre-read notice effect type determination table, and the pre-read notice effect mode determination table. In step 108 IWS703, each table shown in FIGS. 11-28 is used to determine whether or not to execute the look-ahead notice effect, the type of effect to be executed, and the mode of effect.

Specifically, when the gaming state is different from the time saving state C, it is determined whether or not to execute the look-ahead notice effect using the look-ahead notice effect execution decision table shown in FIG. 11-28 (A). Then, when the game state is the time saving state C, the presence / absence of execution of the look-ahead notice effect is determined using the look-ahead notice effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 11-28 (B).

As shown in FIGS. 11-28 (A) and 11-28 (B), in this example, the pre-reading notice effect can be executed in both the case where the display result is a big hit and the case where the display result is a big hit, and the big hit. In the case of, the rate of executing the look-ahead notice effect is higher than in the case of being out of order. Therefore, it is suggested that the expectation of becoming a big hit is high by executing the look-ahead notice effect.

In such a configuration, further, as shown in FIGS. 11-28 (A) and 11-28 (B), the display result is different in the time saving state C than in the gaming state other than the time saving state C. In addition, it is configured so that the ratio of executing the look-ahead notice effect is low. With such a configuration, in the case of the time saving state C (that is, when the big hit has not occurred for a long period of time), it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when the pre-reading notice effect is executed but the big hit does not occur.

When the execution of the look-ahead notice effect is determined in step 108 IWS703, if the game state is different from the time saving state C, the execution is executed using the look-ahead notice effect type determination table shown in FIG. 11-28 (C). The effect type of the look-ahead notice effect to be performed is determined, and when the game state is the time saving state C, the effect of the look-ahead advance notice effect to be executed is performed using the look-ahead notice effect type determination table shown in FIG. 11-28 (D). Determine the type. Specifically, the type of effect is determined to be either a chance eye effect or a pending change effect.

The chance eye effect is a variable display that is the target of the look-ahead notice effect because the display result of the variable display that is executed before the variable display that is the target of the look-ahead notice effect is the chance eye (“778” in this example). Is a production that suggests that is a big hit. In the chance eye effect, for example, an effect of inciting whether or not the display result is the chance eye (“778” in this example) is executed. Further, for example, when the chance eye effect is executed by the red effect mode, the red chance eye (“778” in this example) is stopped and displayed, and the chance eye effect is executed by the blue effect mode. The blue chance eye (“778” in this example) is stopped and displayed.

The hold change effect suggests that the change display that is the target of the look-ahead notice effect becomes a big hit because the hold display corresponding to the change display that is the target of the look-ahead notice effect is displayed in a display mode different from the normal mode. It is a production to do. Further, for example, when the hold change effect is executed by the red effect mode, the red hold display is displayed, and when the hold change effect is executed by the blue effect mode, the blue hold display is displayed. Will be done.

FIG. 11-29 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of each effect type of the look-ahead notice effect. Of FIGS. 11-29, FIGS. 11-29 (A1) to (E1) show specific examples of the chance eye effect, and FIGS. 11-29 (A2) to (B2) show specific examples of the pending change effect. It shows an example.

When the chance eye effect is executed as the look-ahead notice effect, it is shown in FIGS. 11-29 (B1) and (C1) after one variation display is started as shown in FIGS. 11-29 (A1). As shown, the left and right decorative patterns are stopped and displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 11-29 (D1), whether the decorative symbol in the center stops at "7", which is the chance eye "778", or "6", which is not the chance eye "778". The production that incites is executed. After that, as shown in FIG. 11-29 (E1), when the decorative symbol in the center stops at "7" and the chance eye "778" is stopped and displayed, the variable display becomes a big hit in the reserved memory. It will be suggested that there may be a corresponding hold memory. In addition, after the fanning effect is executed, a symbol different from the chance eye "778" (for example, "768") may be stopped and displayed.

When the hold change effect is executed as the look-ahead notice effect, as shown in FIGS. 11-29 (A2) and (B2), when the start winning is generated, the new hold display is different from the normal mode. It is displayed in a display mode (for example, red), and it is suggested that a variable display that is a big hit may be executed based on the hold storage corresponding to the hold display. In this example, the display mode of the hold display is inherited as the display mode of the active display. The hold change effect is not limited to the mode shown in FIGS. 11-29, but at any timing from the display of the new hold display in the normal mode to the end of the corresponding hold display and active display display. It may be changed to a display mode different from the normal mode.

FIG. 11-30 is a time chart for explaining the fluctuation period and the execution period of the look-ahead notice effect in the time saving state via the jackpot and the time saving state via the relief. Of FIGS. 11-30, FIG. 11-30 (A) is a time chart for explaining the fluctuation period in the time saving state via the jackpot and the execution period of the look-ahead notice effect, and FIG. 11-30 (B) is , It is a time chart for explaining the fluctuation period in the time saving state via relief and the execution period of the look-ahead notice effect. In the examples shown in FIGS. 11-30 (A) and 11-30 (B), it is assumed that the start winning prize is generated at the same timing.

As shown in FIG. 11-30 (A), when the chance eye effect is executed as the look-ahead notice effect, in the variable display executed from the time when the start winning prize is generated to the start of the variable display of the look-ahead target. , The effect of inciting whether or not the chance symbol is stopped is executed, and then the chance symbol is stopped and displayed. Since such a fanning effect is included, when executing the chance eye effect, it is necessary to secure an execution period of a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) during at least one variation display.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11-30 (A), when the hold change effect is executed as the look-ahead notice effect, the change display of the look-ahead target is displayed from the timing when the start prize occurs or the time when the start prize occurs. The display mode of the hold display (or active display) changes at an arbitrary timing over a plurality of variable displays until the end. Then, the display of the hold display and the display of the active display according to the display mode after the change is continuously executed until the variable display of the look-ahead target is completed. That is, when the hold change effect is executed, it can be executed at any timing from the time when the start winning is generated until the variation display of the look-ahead target ends, and continues until the variation display of the look-ahead target ends. can do.

In this way, even in the look-ahead advance notice effect, the execution period differs between the chance eye effect and the hold change effect. That is, the chance eye effect is executed in a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) during one variation display, while the hold change effect is executed over a plurality of variation displays.

Further, as described above, in the time saving state via the jackpot, the ultra-super shortening fluctuation (1.5 seconds) is not executed at the time of disconnection, and the shortening fluctuation (5 seconds) is mainly executed, but the time saving state via relief is executed. In, the extremely ultra-shortening fluctuation (1.5 seconds) is mainly executed at the time of disconnection. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 11-30, it is difficult to secure a period for executing the chance eye effect in the time saving state via the relief.

Therefore, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 11-28 (C) and 11-28 (D), both the chance eye effect and the hold change effect can be executed as the look-ahead notice effect in the time saving state via the jackpot. On the other hand, in the time-saving state via relief, as a look-ahead notice effect, the execution of the chance eye effect is restricted, and only the hold change effect can be executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably execute the look-ahead notice effect according to the game state.

Further, when the execution of the look-ahead notice effect is determined in step 108IWS703, if the game state is different from the time saving state C, the look-ahead notice effect mode determination table shown in FIG. 11-28 (E) is used. , The effect mode of the look-ahead advance notice effect to be executed is determined, and when the game state is the time saving state C, the look-ahead advance notice effect to be executed is executed using the look-ahead advance notice effect type determination table shown in FIG. 11-28 (D). Determine the production type of. Specifically, it is determined to be either a red effect mode or a blue effect mode.

As shown in FIGS. 11-28 (E) and 11-28 (F), in this example, the pre-reading advance notice effect can be executed by the red effect mode and the blue effect mode, and the case of a big hit is out of order. It is configured so that the ratio of executing the look-ahead notice effect is higher depending on the red effect mode than in the case of. Therefore, it is suggested that the expectation of a big hit is high by executing the pre-reading advance notice effect of the red effect mode.

In such a configuration, as shown in FIGS. 11-28 (E) and 11-28 (F), in the time saving state C, the pre-reading advance notice effect is executed only in the red effect mode. With such a configuration, in the case of the time saving state C (that is, when the big hit has not occurred for a long period of time), the deterioration of the interest when the pre-reading notice effect is executed is suppressed by the blue effect mode in which the big hit expectation is low. be able to. In this example, in the time saving state C, the look-ahead notice effect is executed only in the red effect mode, but when the time is off, the look-ahead notice effect is not executed at a rate of 99%. Therefore, although the pre-reading notice effect is executed in the red effect mode, the display result is configured so as not to occur frequently.

In this example, by setting the determination ratio as shown in FIGS. 11-28, a look-ahead notice is given depending on whether the time saving state C (that is, no big hit has occurred for a long period of time) or the time saving state C. The execution ratio of the production, the production type, and the ratio of the production mode can be different, and the interest can be improved.

In this example, as will be described later, when the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 10 times or less, the execution of the advance notice effect is restricted (even if only the advance notice effect with high expectation is not executed). Although it is configured to be good), the execution of the pre-reading notice effect may also be restricted (for example, the execution rate may be reduced (or not executed). In this case, the pre-reading notice effect is executed in the case of a loss. It may be configured to reduce (or not execute) the ratio, or may reduce (or not execute) the execution ratio of the pre-reading advance notice effect of the type with high expectation.

Further, not limited to the example shown in FIGS. 11-28, for example, even in the time saving state C, when the variable display that is a big hit or the time saving is executed, the execution of the look-ahead notice effect is not restricted. May be good.

When the process of step 108IWS704 is completed, the effect control CPU 120 sets the execution of the look-ahead advance notice effect based on the determined content (step 108IWS704). For example, when it is determined to execute the chance eye effect, the chance eye flag is set as the execution setting of the chance eye effect in step 108IWS704. Then, in steps 108IWS809 to S810 of the variable display start setting process described later, when the chance eye flag is set, the chance eye effect is executed by selecting the process table including the chance eye effect. The chance eye flag is reset when the variation display immediately before the variation display to be read ahead is executed.

Further, for example, when it is determined to execute the hold change effect, the hold change effect is executed by changing the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the command at the time of starting winning in step 108IWS704.

(Variable display start setting process)
11-31 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first reads the variable pattern command from the variable pattern command storage area (step 100 IWS801). Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays a decorative symbol display result (stop) according to the variation pattern command read in step 100IWS801 and the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command). The symbol) is determined (step 100IWS802). That is, by executing the process of step 100IWS802 by the effect control CPU 120, the display result of the variable display of the identification information (stop of the decorative symbol) according to the variable display pattern (variable pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determining means. A display result determining means for determining a symbol) is realized. When the pseudo-ream is specified by the variation pattern command, the effect control CPU 120 has a chance eye symbol (for example, "223" or "445") as a temporary stop symbol of the pseudo-ream in step 100IWS802. , A combination of a jackpot symbol that does not reach but one symbol is out of alignment) is also determined. The effect control CPU 120 stores data indicating the determined stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. In step 100IWS802, the effect control CPU 120 may determine whether or not it is a big hit based on the received variation pattern command, and determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based only on the variation pattern command. ..

In step 100 IWS802, when the received display result designation command indicates "normal jackpot", the effect control CPU 120 has a decorative symbol in which the three symbols are the same even-numbered symbols as the stop symbol. Determine the combination (usually the jackpot symbol). When the received display result specification command indicates "probability variation jackpot", the effect control CPU 120 determines a combination of decorative symbols (probability variation jackpot symbol) in which three symbols are the same odd-numbered symbols as stop symbols. do. Further, when the received display result designation command indicates "sudden probability change big hit", the effect control CPU 120 determines the combination of the decorative symbols of "135" (sudden probability change big hit symbol) as the stop symbol.

Then, in the case of "off", a combination of decorative patterns other than the above is determined. However, when accompanied by a reach effect, a combination of decorative symbols in which the two left and right symbols are aligned is determined. Further, even if it is out of order, if it is "out of time saving", the combination of the decorative symbols of the out of place symbol including the special symbol (for example, the star symbol) is determined. It should be noted that the combination of decorative symbols of the out-of-order symbols including different special symbols (for example, heart-shaped symbols and rhombic symbols) may be determined according to the time saving type. Further, when the execution setting of the chance eye effect is set, the combination of the decorative symbols of the chance eye symbol (“778” in this example) is determined.

The effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, a random number for determining a stop symbol, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating a combination of decorative symbols and a numerical value are associated with each other to generate a stop symbol for the decorative symbol. decide. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting the data indicating the combination of the decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value corresponding to the extracted random number.

As for the decorative symbols, the stop symbol (a combination of symbols with the same symbol on the left, middle, and right) reminiscent of a jackpot is called a jackpot symbol. In addition, among the jackpot symbols, the stop symbol (combination of symbols in which the left, middle, and right are all the same odd-numbered symbols) reminiscent of the probabilistic jackpot is called the probabilistic jackpot symbol. In addition, among the jackpot symbols, a stop symbol (a combination of symbols in which the left, middle, and right are all the same even-numbered symbols) reminiscent of a normal jackpot (non-probability variation jackpot) is called a non-probability variation jackpot symbol. In addition, a stop symbol that reminds us of an outlier is called an outlier symbol.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets the execution of the advance notice effect to be executed during the variable display (step 108IWS802A). As a notice effect, for example, a timer effect can be executed in which a countdown is started after the start of fluctuation and an effect image suggesting a jackpot expectation is displayed when the count number becomes "0". In step 108IWS802A, the timer effect is executed. You may set the execution of.

FIG. 11-32 is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of the advance notice effect execution determination table and the advance notice effect mode determination table. In step 108IWS802A, when the number of times remaining until the relief time reduction exceeds 10 times, the presence or absence of execution of the advance notice effect is determined using the advance notice effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 11-32 (A), and the relief time reduction is performed. When the number of remaining times up to is 10 or less, it is determined whether or not the advance notice effect is executed by using the advance notice effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 11-32 (B). Further, when it is decided to execute the advance notice effect, if the number of remaining times until the relief time is shortened exceeds 10, the effect form of the advance notice effect is determined using the advance notice effect mode determination table shown in FIG. 11-32 (C). Then, when the number of remaining times until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less, the mode of the notice effect is determined using the notice effect mode determination table shown in FIG. 11-32 (D).

As shown in FIGS. 11-32 (A) and 11-32 (B), in this example, the advance notice effect can be executed in both the case where the display result is a big hit and the case where the display result is a big hit. It is configured so that the rate of executing the advance notice effect is higher in the case of becoming than in the case of being out of order. Therefore, it is suggested that the high expectation of a big hit is high by executing the advance notice effect.

In such a configuration, as shown in FIGS. 11-32 (A) and 11-32 (B), a predetermined period before the relief time is shortened (in this example, the remaining number of times until the relief time is 10 or less). In this case, the rate of executing the advance notice effect is lower than the period before the predetermined period (in this example, the period in which the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened exceeds 10) when the display result is out of alignment. It is configured as follows. With such a configuration, the advance notice effect is given in a predetermined period before the relief time is shortened (in this example, the remaining number of times until the relief time is 10 or less, and the countdown effect and the effect effect described later are executed). It is possible to suppress the decline in interest when the game is executed but it does not become a big hit.

Further, in the predetermined period before the relief time is shortened (in this example, the remaining number of times until the relief time is 10 or less), the countdown effect and the effect effect described later are executed. At this time, the timer is used as a notice effect. By limiting the execution of the effect, it is possible to avoid displaying a plurality of numerical values indicating the counters, and it is possible to prevent them from interfering with each other.

As shown in FIGS. 11-32 (C) and 11-32 (D), in this example, a red effect mode (for example, a red effect image is displayed) and a blue effect mode (for example, a blue effect image are displayed). The notice effect can be executed by (displayed), and the rate of executing the notice effect according to the red effect mode is higher in the case of a big hit than in the case of the loss. Therefore, it is suggested that the expectation of a big hit is high by executing the advance notice effect of the red effect mode.

In such a configuration, as shown in FIGS. 11-32 (C) and 11-32 (D), a predetermined period before the relief time is shortened (in this example, the remaining number of times until the relief time is 10 or less). If the display result is different from the period before the predetermined period (in this example, the period in which the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened exceeds 10), the advance notice effect is executed by the red effect mode. It is configured so that the ratio of doing so is low. With such a configuration, the interest when the notice effect is executed in the red effect mode in the predetermined period before the relief time is shortened (in this example, the remaining number of times until the relief time is 10 or less) is not a big hit. Can be suppressed.

In addition, when a plurality of types of notice effects having different jackpot expectations are configured to be executable, a notice effect of a type with a high jackpot expectation (for example, when the jackpot expectation is classified into 5 stages, it is possible to execute the notice effect. Only the notice production of the type with the jackpot expectation of the 4th stage or higher) is restricted in the predetermined period before the relief time is shortened (in this example, the remaining number of times until the relief time is 10 or less). May be good.

Further, not limited to the example shown in FIGS. 11-32, for example, even if the number of remaining times until the relief time reduction is 10 or less, if a big hit or a variation display that is out of the time reduction is executed, the advance notice effect is executed. You may not limit it.

Further, as described above, in this example, in the case of the time saving state C, the execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect is restricted, but the execution of the advance notice effect is also restricted (for example, the execution rate is lowered). It may be set (or not executed). In this case, it may be configured to reduce (or not execute) the execution rate of the advance notice effect in the case of a loss, or it may be configured to reduce (or not execute) the advance notice effect of a type with high expectation. The execution rate may be reduced (or not executed).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 100 times, 200 times, 300 times, 400 times, 500 times, 600 times, 700 times, or 800 times. (Step 100 IWS803). Whether or not the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 100 times, 200 times, 300 times, 400 times, 500 times, 600 times, 700 times, or 800 times is determined by, for example, the number of relief time reductions of 2. It can be determined by checking whether or not the specified command has been received.

If the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 100 times, 200 times, 300 times, 400 times, 500 times, 600 times, 700 times, or 800 times, the effect control CPU 120 is until the relief time is shortened. A process table containing the fanning effect according to the remaining number of fluctuations of is selected (step 100IWS804). For example, when the EXT data of the received rescue time reduction 2 specified command is "01 (H)" (when the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is reduced is 100), the remaining number of fluctuations is set to "100". Select the process table that contains the corresponding fanning effect. Further, for example, when the EXT data of the received rescue time reduction number 2 designated command is "08 (H)" (when the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 800 times), the remaining number of fluctuations is "800 times". Select a process table that includes a fanning effect according to. Then, the process proceeds to step 108 IWS812.

If the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is not 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, or 800, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the relief time is shortened. It is confirmed whether or not the remaining number of fluctuations until the result is 0 (step 108IWS805). Whether or not the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 0 is determined by checking, for example, whether or not the value of the EXT data of the received rescue time reduction 1 designation command is 0. Can be judged.

When the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 0, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the display result is a big hit (step 108IWS806A). When the display result is not a big hit, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table including a time reduction rush effect that notifies that the time reduction state is controlled by the relief time reduction (step 100IWS806B). With such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify the player that the relief time is controlled to be controlled to the time reduction state by the time reduction rush effect, and it is possible to improve the interest when the relief time is shortened.

On the other hand, when the display result is a big hit, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table including a time-saving rush rush effect that notifies that the display result will be a big hit after executing an effect in the same mode as the time-saving rush effect ( Step 100 IWS806C). Then, the process proceeds to step 108 IWS812. With such a configuration, once the player recognizes that the number of remaining fluctuations has become 0 until the relief time is shortened, it is notified that a big hit will occur, so that the player can be given a surprise. You can improve your interest.

In this example, when the display result becomes a big hit when the number of fluctuations of the relief time reduction is reached, the time reduction rushing pretending effect is executed using the special relief time reduction fluctuation big hit fluctuation pattern. For example, even if the full rotation effect (that is, the jackpot is confirmed) that fluctuates while the three decorative symbols are aligned is executed, which is not executed except when the number of fluctuations of the relief time reduction is reached. good. With such a configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise and special feeling, and it is possible to improve the interest.

Further, for example, when the display result becomes a big hit when the number of fluctuations of the relief time reduction is reached, the same fluctuation pattern for big hits as usual may be used, or a reach effect with a short fluctuation time is specified. It may be configured to use a variation pattern.

Further, in this example, when the display result is out of order when the number of fluctuations in the relief time reduction is reached, a dedicated variation pattern for the relief time reduction deviation is used. A fluctuation pattern for deviation similar to the usual one may be used, or a fluctuation pattern that specifies a reach effect with a short fluctuation time may be used. With this configuration, the fluctuation pattern can be shared between when the number of fluctuations in the relief time reduction is reached and before it is reached, and the data capacity can be reduced. In this case, when the symbol determination period elapses, the time saving state C is entered, and the background image (in this example, the orange color) corresponding to the time saving state C (the time saving state via the relief time saving) is displayed on the image display device 5. Since the background image of the display color can be switched to (see step 078IWS638), it is possible to notify that the change in the background image controls the time saving state by the relief time saving.

When the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is not 0, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 10 times or less (). Step 108 IWS807). To check whether the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less, for example, check whether the value of the EXT data of the received rescue time reduction 1 designation command is 10 or less. It can be judged by doing.

If the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table including a countdown effect and an effect effect according to the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened. (Step 108 IWS808). For example, when the EXT data of the received rescue time reduction 1 specified command is "0A (H)" (when the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is reduced is 10), the count number until the relief time is reduced " Select a process table that includes a countdown effect and an effect effect according to "10". Further, for example, when the EXT data of the received rescue time reduction 1 designation command is "01 (H)" (when the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is reduced is 1), the count until the relief time is reduced is counted. Select a process table that includes a countdown effect and an effect effect according to the number "1". Then, the process proceeds to step 108 IWS812.

In this example, when the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief fluctuation is 10 or less, the countdown effect and the effect effect are executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to expect the player to change the relief, and it is possible to improve the interest. In addition, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a disadvantage for the player due to the player ending the game immediately before the relief change.

In this example, the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is determined based on the EXT data of the relief time reduction number 1 designation command and the relief time reduction number 2 designation command, and the fanning effect or the countdown effect is executed. Although shown, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, when the background specification command for specifying the background image is configured to be transmitted, the EXT data of the background specification command is configured to be set with a value corresponding to the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened and transmitted. You may. Then, the effect control CPU 120 side may be configured to determine the remaining number of fluctuations based on the EXT data of the received background designation command and execute the fanning effect or the countdown effect.

Further, in this example, when the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief fluctuation is 10 or less, the countdown effect and the effect effect are always executed, but whether or not to execute by lottery. You may decide whether or not. Further, for example, when the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief fluctuation is not 10 times or less, the so-called Gase countdown effect and effect effect (for example, the countdown effect and the effect effect are executed in the same manner as the effect effect). , The countdown effect and the effect effect according to the count number "0" are not continuously executed, but are interrupted in the middle. (See FIG. 11-42), it is decided whether or not to execute by lottery. May be good. In this case, when the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief fluctuation is 10 times or less, the countdown effect and the effect effect (genuine and fake) are compared to when the number of fluctuations is not 10 times or less. Including) may be executed at a higher rate. With such a configuration, it is possible to expect the player to change the relief, and it is possible to improve the interest. In addition, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a disadvantage for the player due to the player ending the game immediately before the relief change.

If the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is not 10 times or less (N in step 108IWS807), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the execution setting of the chance eye effect is set (step 108IWS809). , When the execution setting of the chance eye effect is set, the effect control CPU 120 selects the process table including the chance eye effect (including the effect of inciting whether or not the chance eye effect is obtained) (step 108 IWS810). .. In addition, when the execution setting of the chance eye effect is not set, the effect that the chance eye pattern is not stopped and displayed after executing the effect of inciting whether or not it becomes the chance eye (so-called chance eye effect of Gase) is executed by lottery. You may decide whether or not to do so.

When the execution setting of the chance eye effect is not set, the effect control CPU 120 selects the process table according to the fluctuation pattern (step 108 IWS811). Then, the process proceeds to step 108 IWS812.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 108IWS812).

The process table is a table in which process data to be referred to when the effect control CPU 120 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (effect component) such as the image display device 5 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of a collection of a plurality of combinations of process timer setting values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data. The display control execution data includes data and the like indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the decorative symbol. Specifically, data related to the change of the display screen of the image display device 5 is described. Further, in the process timer set value, the fluctuation time in the mode of the fluctuation is set. The effect control CPU 120 refers to the process table and controls the display control to display the decorative symbol in the variation mode set in the display control execution data only for the time set in the process timer set value. Further, the process table is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 12. In addition, the process table is prepared according to each fluctuation pattern.

In the process table used when executing the effect control for the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the reach effect, the left symbol is stopped and displayed when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the fluctuation, and the right symbol is stopped when the predetermined time elapses. Process data indicating that it is to be displayed is set. In addition, instead of setting the symbol to be stopped and displayed in the process table, the image for displaying the symbol is synthesized and generated according to the determined stop symbol, the pseudo-ream, and the temporary stop symbol in the sliding effect. You may.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 serves as an effect device (image display device 5 as an effect component, as an effect component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Control of various lamps and speakers 8L, 8R as production parts) is executed (step 108IWS813). For example, the image display device 5 outputs a command to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the fluctuation pattern. Further, in order to control the lighting / extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Further, in order to output the voice from the speakers 8L and 8R, the control signal (phone number data) is output to the voice control board 13.

In the feature unit 108IW, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern command so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed according to the variation pattern corresponding to one-to-one, while the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern command. The fluctuation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns corresponding to.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command in the fluctuation time timer (step 108IWS814).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect processing during variable display (step S172) (step 108IWS815).

(Variable display during production processing)
11-33 and 11-34 are flowcharts showing the variable display during effect processing (step S172) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7. In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the process timer value (step 100IWS841) and 1 subtracts the variable time timer value (step 100IWS842). When the process timer times out (step 100IWS843), the process data is switched. That is, the next set process timer setting value in the process table is set in the process timer (step 100IWS844). Further, the control state for the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, and the sound number data set next (step 100IWS845).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the first symbol confirmation A designation command or the second symbol confirmation A designation command has been received (step 100IWS846). Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the first confirmed A command reception flag or the second confirmed A command reception flag is set in the command analysis process. If the first symbol confirmation A designation command or the second symbol confirmation A designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 performs a mode transition effect (an effect of notifying the transition to the time saving state (time saving mode)) and right-handed. The process table corresponding to the notification is selected (step 100IWS847). Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 100IWS848). Further, the effect control CPU 120 serves as an effect device (image display device 5 as an effect component, as an effect component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Control of various lamps and speakers 8L, 8R as production parts) is executed (step 100IWS849). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to 20 seconds in the confirmation effect period timer for measuring the symbol determination period on the effect control means side (step 100IWS850). Then, the process proceeds to step 100 IWS862.

In this example, when the first symbol confirmation A designation command or the second symbol confirmation A designation command is received, the time reduction may be delayed or the relief time may be shortened during the normal state. However, in step 100IWS847, when the time reduction is lost during the normal state, the process table corresponding to the mode transition effect for the time reduction deviation and the right-handed notification is selected, and when the relief time is shortened, the relief time is shortened. Select the process table according to the mode transition effect and right-handed notification. Whether or not the first symbol confirmation A designation command or the second symbol confirmation A designation command is received as the relief time is shortened is determined by, for example, the EXT data of the received relief time reduction number 1 designation command being "00 ( It can be determined by confirming whether or not it is "H)".

If neither the first symbol confirmation A designation command nor the second symbol confirmation A designation command has been received, whether or not the effect control CPU 120 has received the first symbol confirmation B designation command or the second symbol confirmation B designation command. (Step 100 IWS851). Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the first confirmed B command reception flag or the second confirmed B command reception flag is set in the command analysis process. If the first symbol confirmation B designation command or the second symbol confirmation B designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the continuation effect (the effect of notifying that the time saving state continues). (Step 100 IWS852). Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 100IWS853). Further, the effect control CPU 120 serves as an effect device (image display device 5 as an effect component, as an effect component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Control of various lamps and speakers 8L, 8R as production parts) is executed (step 100IWS854). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to 10 seconds in the confirmation effect period timer for measuring the symbol determination period on the effect control means side (step 100IWS855). Then, the process proceeds to step 100 IWS862.

If neither the first symbol confirmation B designation command nor the second symbol confirmation B designation command has been received, whether or not the effect control CPU 120 has received the first symbol confirmation C designation command or the second symbol confirmation C designation command. (Step 100 IWS 856). Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the first confirmed C command reception flag or the second confirmed C command reception flag is set in the command analysis process. If the first symbol confirmation C designation command or the second symbol confirmation C designation command has been received, the process proceeds to step 100IWS858.

If neither the first symbol confirmation C designation command nor the second symbol confirmation C designation command has been received, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the fluctuation time timer has timed out (step 100IWS857). If the variable time timer has not timed out, the process ends.

When the first symbol confirmation C designation command or the second symbol confirmation C designation command is received (Y in step 100IWS856), or when the fluctuation time timer has timed out (Y in step 100IWS857), the effect control CPU 120 is normally used. Select the process table according to the symbol confirmation display of (step 100IWS858). Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 100IWS859). Further, the effect control CPU 120 serves as an effect device (image display device 5 as an effect component, as an effect component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Control of various lamps and speakers 8L, 8R as production parts) is executed (step 100IWS860). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to 0.5 seconds in the confirmation effect period timer for measuring the symbol determination period on the effect control means side (step 100IWS861). Then, the process proceeds to step 100 IWS862.

In this example, in addition to the case where the symbol confirmation designation command is received, even when the fluctuation time timer times out (see step 100IWS857), the process shifts to the processing after step 100IWS858 and shifts to the symbol confirmation period. However, normally, if the symbol confirmation designation command is not missed, it is determined as Y in step 100IWS857 and the process does not shift to the processing after step 100IWS858.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure hit wait process (step S173) (step 100 IWS862).

(Waiting processing per special figure)
11-35 is a flowchart showing a special figure hit waiting process (step S173) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7. In the special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the value of the fixed effect period timer (step 100IWS871), and confirms whether or not the value of the fixed effect period timer after the subtraction has timed out (step 100IWS871). Step 100 IWS872). Final effect period after subtraction If the timer value has not timed out, the process timer value is subtracted by 1 (step 100IWS873), and the contents of the process data n (display control execution data n, lamp control execution data n, sound number data). Control of the effect device (image display device 5 as the effect component, various lamps as the effect component, and speakers 8L, 8R as the effect component) is executed according to n) (step 100IWS874).

Further, when the process timer times out (step 100IWS875), the effect control CPU 120 switches the process data (step 100IWS876). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets the next set process timer setting value in the process table in the process timer and starts the process timer (step 087IWS877).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is being confirmed and displayed (step 100IWS878). Stopping the decorative symbol If the symbol is being confirmed and displayed, the process ends as it is. If the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is not being confirmed and displayed, the effect control CPU 120 controls to stop and display the determined stop symbol (missing symbol (no time reduction), time saving deviation symbol, jackpot symbol) (step 100IWS879). ).

When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the process of step 100IWS879 (Y in step 100IWS880), the effect control CPU 120 sets the jackpot stop flag indicating that the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed (step 100IWS881). Then, the process ends.

If the value of the fixed effect period timer after subtraction has timed out (that is, if the symbol fixed period has elapsed), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the jackpot stop flag is set (step). 100IWS882). If the jackpot stop flag is set, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the jackpot start designation command has been received (step 100IWS883). Whether or not the jackpot start designation command has been received can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not the jackpot start designation command reception flag (see step 100IWS622) is set. If the jackpot start specification command has not been received, the process ends as it is.

If the jackpot start designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 resets the jackpot stop flag (step 100IWS884). Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the big hit medium effect including the mode transition effect (the effect of notifying the transition to the probability change state (probability change mode) or the time reduction state (time reduction mode)) and the right-handed notification. (Step 100 IWS885). Then, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step 100IWS886), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number). The control of the effect device (image display device 5 as the effect component, various lamps as the effect component, and the speaker 27 as the effect component) is executed according to the data 1) (step 100 IWS887).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect processing during the jackpot (step 100 IWS888).

If the jackpot stop flag is not set (that is, when the missed symbol (no time reduction) or the missed symbol is stopped and displayed), the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the effect control process flag to the variable display start wait process. The value is updated according to (step S170) (step 100 IWS889).

(Direction execution timing)
Next, the execution timing of the effect when executing the variable display that shortens the relief time will be described. FIG. 11-36 is a timing chart for explaining the execution timing of the effect when the variable display that shortens the relief time is executed. As shown in FIGS. 11-36, in the variation display immediately before the variation display that shortens the relief time (the value of the relief time reduction counter is 1), the variation display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is finished, and the missing symbol (no time reduction). When is stopped and displayed, the out-of-order symbol (no time reduction) is confirmed and displayed over the symbol confirmation period of 0.5 seconds (see step 100IWS1137). Next, in the variation display (see steps 100IWS74 and S75) in which the value of the relief time reduction counter becomes 0 at the start of the variation display and the relief time is shortened, the time reduction rush effect is executed in the image display device 5 during the variation display of the special symbol. (See step 108 IWS806B). Then, when the variable display of the special symbol is finished and the out-of-order symbol (no time reduction) is stopped and displayed, the out-of-design symbol (no time reduction) is confirmed and displayed over the symbol confirmation period of 20 seconds (see step 100IWS1135). Further, during the symbol determination period, as shown in FIGS. 11-36, the mode transition effect is executed in the image display device 5 (see step 100IWS847). Next, when a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) elapses during the symbol determination period, right-handed notification is started in the image display device 5 as shown in FIGS. 11-36 (see step 100IWS847). Next, when the symbol determination period elapses, the process shifts to the time saving state C, and as shown in FIGS. 11-36, the background image (this example) corresponding to the time saving state C (time saving state via the relief time saving) in the image display device 5. Then, it can be switched to the orange display color background image) (see step 100IWS638). With such a configuration, it is possible to secure a period for notifying that the control of the time saving state (relief time saving) is started in the normal state, and it is possible to clarify the effect when switching the game state and to enjoy the hobby. Can be improved.

(Production example)
Next, a specific example of the effect mode until the transition to the time saving state C, which is the relief time saving, will be described. 11-37 to 11-40 are explanatory views for explaining a specific example of the effect mode until the time saving state is entered. In addition, in FIGS. 11-37 to 11-40, the effect screens transition in the order of (A), (B), and (C).

As shown in FIG. 11-37 (A), the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is displayed every 100 rotations when the symbol is stopped. In this example, in the image display device 5, the decorative symbol 100IW100 is displayed in the center of the screen, and the small symbol 100IW101 is displayed in the upper right. Then, for example, it is assumed that the decorative symbol 100IW100 and the small symbol 100IW101 are stopped and the detached symbol (in this example, the combination of the symbols of "134") is derived and displayed when the remaining 800 rotations until the transition to the relief time reduction. At this time, the remaining rotation number display 100IW102 is displayed in the upper left, which says "Relief time is shortened with 800 rotations left!". Further, at this time, the explanation regarding the relief time reduction (for example, the explanation of the relief time reduction function and the effect of the relief time reduction) is displayed at the lower part of the screen by the telop display 100IW103. With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine provided with the relief time reduction.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-37 (B), for example, when the remaining 700 rotations until the transition to the relief time reduction, the decorative symbol 100IW100 and the small symbol 100IW101 stop and the symbol is off (in this example, "423"). (Combination of symbols) is derived and displayed. At this time, similarly to FIG. 11-37 (A), the remaining rotation number display 100IW102 is displayed in the upper left, which says "Relief time reduction starts with 700 rotations left!". Further, at this time, the explanation regarding the relief time reduction (for example, the explanation of the relief time reduction function and the effect of the relief time reduction) is displayed at the lower part of the screen by the telop display 100IW103.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 11-37 (A) and 11-37 (B), a case is shown in which a fanning effect suggesting the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is executed every 100 fluctuations. It is not limited to such an aspect. For example, when the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened is 400 to 800 times, the fanning effect is not executed, and when the remaining number of times is 300 times or less (hence, the remaining number of times is 300 times, 200 times, 100 times), the fanning effect is performed. It may be configured to run.

In addition, instead of always executing the fanning effect when the remaining number of fluctuations is reached, for example, when a command for specifying the number of times of relief time 2 is received, a lottery process based on a random number is performed and it is decided to execute the fanning effect. It may be configured to perform the fanning effect in the manner shown in FIGS. 11-37 (A) and 11-37 (B). Further, in this case, it is desirable to configure so that the execution rate of the fanning effect increases as the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened decreases.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-37 (C) to 11-38 (E), the countdown display 100IW104A according to the remaining number of revolutions is displayed in the center of the screen after the remaining 10 revolutions until the transition to the relief time reduction. NS. For example, in the countdown display 100IW104A, a state of counting down from "10" to "1" is displayed every time the variation display of the symbol ends and the symbol stops. It should be noted that each figure shows an example in which the out-of-order symbols (in this example, a combination of the symbols of "653", "844", and "123") are derived and displayed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-37 (C) to 11-38 (E), the effect display 100IW104B in the range corresponding to the remaining rotation speed is displayed after the remaining 10 rotations until the transition to the relief time reduction. .. In this example, as the remaining number of revolutions decreases (that is, as the relief time shortens approach), the range in which the effect display 100IW104B is displayed becomes wider (the number displayed increases).

Then, as shown in FIG. 11-38 (E), there is only one rotation remaining until the transition to the relief time reduction, the decorative symbol 100IW100 and the small symbol 100IW101 are displayed in a variable manner, and the symbol is stopped and the symbol is out of alignment (in this example, the symbol is out of alignment). It is assumed that the combination of the symbols of "123") is derived and displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 11-38 (F), the remaining 0 rotations are reached until the transition to the relief time reduction, and the variation display of the decorative symbol 100IW100 and the small symbol 100IW101 (that is, the variation display that shortens the relief time) is started. As shown in FIG. 11-38 (G), the time saving rushing effect for notifying that the time saving state (relief time saving) is controlled is started, and the time saving rushing effect display 100IW104C is displayed on the image display device 5. With such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify the player that the time saving state (relief time saving) is controlled, and it is possible to improve the interest when the time saving state (relief time saving) is reached.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-38 (G), when the time saving rush effect is started, the decorative symbol 100IW100 is not displayed, and only the small symbol 100IW101 is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 11-38 (H), the decorative symbol 100IW100 is not displayed when the symbol is stopped, and only the small symbol 100IW101 (in this example, the combination of the symbols of "254") is derived and displayed.

In addition, in the time-saving rushing effect, notifications that are generally performed during the ending period of the first hit, such as a warning notification for forgetting to remove the prepaid card and a warning notification for preventing immersiveness, may be performed, or the logo of the pachinko / pachislot machine manufacturer. May be displayed. In this case, the notification in the time-saving rush effect may be performed in the same manner as the notification in the ending period of the first hit, or may be notified in a simplified manner. Further, these notifications may not be performed in the time saving rush effect, but may be performed in the ending period of the first big hit after shifting to the time saving state due to the relief time saving.

Then, as shown in FIG. 11-39 (I), when the symbol determination period is entered, the mode effect start display 100IW105 saying "super heat!" Is displayed, and the mode transition effect is started. After that, even in the mode transition effect, the decorative symbol 100IW100 is not displayed, and only the small symbol 100IW101 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-39 (J), when the mode transition effect is started, the operation suggestion image 100IW106 suggesting that the push button 31B (see FIG. 11-1) is operated (pressed) is displayed. NS. For example, in the operation suggestion image 100IW106, the characters "press" are displayed together with the image prompting the push button 31B to be pressed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 11-39 (K), when the push button 31B is operated when the operation suggestion image 100IW106 is displayed, or when a predetermined time elapses from the display of the operation suggestion image 100IW106, "V" The character display 100IW107 of "STOCK x 1" is displayed, and it is notified that the relief time reduction starts. In addition, a right-handed instruction display 100IW108 for instructing right-handedness is displayed next to the small symbol 100IW101.

In this example, even if a big hit occurs, it is possible to execute an effect of displaying the character display of "V STOCK x 1" as in FIG. 11-39 (K). In this case, for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) performs a look-ahead determination process of whether or not a big hit is obtained and a variation pattern type look-ahead determination process in the start winning prize determination process (step S101). Sends a look-ahead judgment result specification command that can specify the result. Then, the effect control CPU 120 executes an effect (so-called hold continuous effect) in the same manner as in FIG. 11-39 (K) based on the received look-ahead determination result designation command. For example, if it is specified that there is one big hit in the hold memory based on the received look-ahead judgment result specification command, the character display of "V STOCK x 1" is displayed to produce the hold continuous effect. To execute. Further, for example, when it is specified that there are two big hits in the hold storage based on the received look-ahead judgment result specification command, the character display of "V STOCK x 2" is displayed to hold the hold. Perform a series of productions.

On the other hand, when the relief time is shortened, there is a high ratio that the fluctuation display with an extremely short fluctuation time of 1.5 seconds is executed during the time reduction state via the relief time reduction (see FIG. 11-8 (E)). ), Therefore, the variable display is extremely quickly digested, and a big hit is likely to occur at a relatively early timing. Therefore, in the variable display (in this example, the symbol confirmation period) in which the relief time is shortened, the character display of "V STOCK x 1" shown in FIG. 11-39 (K) is displayed without confirming the look-ahead determination result. The effect to be displayed is executed. Therefore, the effect of displaying the character display of "V STOCK x 1" shown in FIG. 11-39 (K) has the same aspect as the pseudo hold continuous effect, and the relief time is shortened. It is a production to notify.

The case where the display of the right-handed instruction display 100IW108 is started from the display timing of the character display 100IW107 of "V STOCK x 1" is shown, but the display start timing of the right-handed instruction display 100IW108 is limited to the one shown in this example. No. For example, the display of the right-handed instruction display 100IW108 may be started from the timing of the final display of the stop symbol shown in FIG. 11-38 (H), and various modes are conceivable.

Then, as shown in FIG. 11-39 (L), the mode selection screen 100IW109 for selecting the effect mode for shortening the relief time is displayed. For example, a screen for selecting one of modes A to D is displayed. The mode is selected by moving the cursor by operating the stick controller 31A, and is confirmed by operating the push button 31B. When a predetermined time elapses without selecting the effect mode, the effect mode in which the cursor matches is automatically determined. Further, even when the mode selection screen 100IW109 is displayed, the right-handed instruction display 100IW108 remains displayed next to the small symbol 100IW101.

Then, as shown in FIG. 11-40 (M), when the selection of the effect mode is completed, the start notification screen 100IW110 for notifying that the relief time reduction is started is displayed. For example, the words "relief short rush" are displayed. Then, when the next fluctuation is started, the state shifts to the time saving state C, and the relief time saving is started.

Next, the production mode of the time-saving rushing pretending effect will be described. FIG. 11-41 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the effect mode of the time-saving rushing masquerade effect. The example shown in FIGS. 11-41 follows the example of FIGS. 11-37 (A) to (D).

As shown in FIG. 11-41 (E), there is only one rotation left until the transition to the relief time reduction, the decorative symbol 100IW100 and the small symbol 100IW101 are displayed in a variable manner, and the symbol stops and comes off (in this example, "123". ”) Is derived and displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 11-41 (F'), the remaining 0 rotations are reached until the transition to the relief time reduction, and the variable display of the decorative symbol 100IW100 and the small symbol 100IW101 is started. In this variable display, the relief time is shortened, but the display result is a big hit. Therefore, after the display result is derived and displayed, it does not shift to the time saving state due to the relief time saving, but shifts to the big hit game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-41 (G'), the time-saving rushing effect pretending effect is started, and the time-saving rushing effect display 100IW104C having the same mode as the time-saving rushing effect is displayed on the image display device 5. As shown in FIG. 11-41 (G'), when the time saving rushing effect is started, the decorative symbol 100IW100 is not displayed and only the small symbol 100IW101 is displayed, as in the case of starting the time saving rushing effect. Is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 11-41 (H), when the display of the time saving rush effect display 100IW104C is completed, the decorative symbol 100IW100 is not displayed when the symbol is stopped, and the small symbol 100IW101 (in this example, the symbol "254") is not displayed. Only the combination of) is derived and displayed. The variable display of the decorative symbol 100IW100 and the small symbol 100IW101 is stopped, and the jackpot symbol (in this example, the combination of the symbols of "777") is derived and displayed. After that, it shifts to the big hit game. With such a configuration, after the player once recognizes the establishment of the relief time reduction, it is notified that a big hit will be made, so that the player can be surprised and the interest can be improved.

It should be noted that the character game that controls the configuration of the feature unit 108IW to the big hit game based on the game ball winning (V winning) in the specific area (V winning area) in the character during the small hit game is also executed. When applied to a game machine that is configured to be possible, when the display result of the variable display that shortens the relief time is a small hit, a time saving rush pretending effect is executed to notify that the small hit is achieved. May be good.

Next, a mode of producing the so-called Gase countdown effect and effect effect will be described. FIG. 11-42 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the effect mode of the so-called Gase countdown effect and effect effect.

As shown in FIGS. 11-42 (A) to (C), when the remaining 49 rotations are reached until the transition to the relief time reduction, the so-called Gase countdown effect is executed, so that the remaining rotation speed is 10 times. A countdown display 100IW104A according to the case is displayed in the center of the screen. Then, every time the variation display of the symbol ends and the symbol stops, a state of counting down from "10" is displayed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-42 (A) to (C), when the remaining 49 rotations are reached until the transition to the relief time reduction, the so-called Gase effect effect is executed, so that the remaining rotation speed is 10. The effect display 100IW104B in the range corresponding to the number of times is displayed. Then, each time the variation display of the symbol ends and the symbol stops, the effect display 100IW104B is displayed so that the display range becomes wider (the number of the symbols displayed increases).

Then, as shown in FIG. 11-42 (E), the countdown display 100IW104A and the effect display 100IW104B are displayed before they are displayed in a mode corresponding to the case where the remaining number of revolutions is one until the transition to the relief time reduction. Is terminated. At this time, since the remaining number of revolutions is not 0 until the transition to the relief time reduction, the time reduction rush effect is not executed.

When the so-called Gase countdown effect and effect effect as shown in FIGS. 11-42 are configured to be executable, the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened as shown in FIGS. 11-37 (A) and 11-37 (B). You may not perform the fanning effect that suggests. With such a configuration, when the countdown display 100IW104A or the effect display 100IW104B is displayed, it is possible to make it difficult to easily distinguish between genuine and fake.

In this example, when the symbol is stopped, the remaining number of rotations until the relief time is shortened, the effect of the relief time is explained, and the countdown is displayed, but it may be performed at the start of the fluctuation of the symbol or during the fluctuation.

Further, in this example, a case is shown in which a symbol confirmation period is secured for 20 seconds and a mode transition effect or a right-handed notification is executed in a variable display in which the relief time is shortened, but the symbol confirmation period is normally 0.5 seconds. It may be configured to shift to the time saving state via the relief time saving as it is without performing the mode transition effect.

Further, in this example, the case where the relief time reduction count is initially set to "800" when the RAM clear processing is executed, when the jackpot is hit, or when the time reduction is lost is shown. Or, when it is configured to execute a story such as whether to make it fluctuate at high speed, it may be configured to clear the selection buffer and the story counter of the story. In addition, a story may be configured to be settable when the relief time is activated, or a different story may be configured to be settable according to the game state.

(Modification example 1)
In the above-mentioned feature unit 108IW, in the variable display that shortens the relief time, a symbol confirmation period of 20 seconds, which is longer than the normal 0.5 second, is set, and a mode transition effect or a right-handed notification is executed during the symbol confirmation period. Although shown, it is not limited to such a processing mode. For example, the symbol confirmation period is set to 0.5 seconds as usual, and then a postponement period until the start of the next fluctuation is provided, and the mode transition effect and the right-handed notification are executed during the postponement period. You may. Hereinafter, a modified example 1 in which a mode transition effect and a right-handed notification are executed with a postponement period until the start of the next fluctuation will be described.

FIG. 11-43 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol process processing in the first modification. As shown in FIGS. 11-43, in the modified example 1, in addition to the process shown in FIG. 5, the next fluctuation postponement process (step 100 IWS114) is included in the special symbol process process. In the first modification, the start winning determination process (step 100 IWS101) is executed in the same manner as the start winning determination process (step 101) shown in FIG.

In the first modification, the special symbol normal processing (step 100IWS110) is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0”. Further, the fluctuation pattern setting process (step 100IWS111) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. Further, the special symbol variation process (step 100IWS112) is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. Further, the special symbol stop processing (step 100IWS113) is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”.

Further, the next fluctuation postponement process (step 100 IWS114) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”.

Further, the jackpot opening preprocessing (step 100IWS115) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. Further, the jackpot opening process (step 100IWS116) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. Further, the jackpot release post-processing (step 100IWS117) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. Further, the jackpot end processing (step 100IWS118) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”.

Further, the small hit opening pre-processing (step 100IWS119) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. Further, the small hit opening process (step 100 IWS120) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. Further, the small hit end process (step 100 IWS121) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “11”.

In the first modification, the special symbol normal process (step 100IWS110) and the variation pattern setting process (step 100IWS111) are the same as the processes of the special symbol normal process (step S110) and the variation pattern setting process (step S111) shown in FIG. Is. Further, in the modified example 1, in the special symbol variation processing (step 100IWS112) and the special symbol stop processing (step 100IWS113), the same 0.5 seconds as usual is set as the symbol determination period even when the relief time is shortened. , The first symbol confirmation C designation command or the second symbol confirmation C designation command is transmitted, which is different from the special symbol variation processing (step S112) and the special symbol stop processing (step S113) shown in FIG.

In the first modification, the big hit opening pre-processing (step 100IWS115) to the small hit end processing (step 100IWS121) are the processes of the big hit opening pre-processing (step S114) to the small hit end processing (step S120) shown in FIG. Is similar to.

FIG. 11-44 is a flowchart showing the special symbol stop process (step 100 IWS113) in the first modification. In the first modification, the processing of steps 100IWS131 to S171 of the special symbol stop processing is the same as those processing shown in FIGS. 11-16 and 11-17. In the first modification, when the relief time reduction determination flag is reset in step 100IWS171, the CPU 103 sets the postponement period measurement timer for measuring the postponement period until the start of the next fluctuation to a predetermined postponement period (20 seconds in this example). A value corresponding to is set (step 100IWS171A). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the next fluctuation postponement process (step 100IWS114) (step 100IWS171B). The process of step 100 IWS175 is the same as the process shown in FIG. 11-17.

FIG. 11-45 is a flowchart showing the next fluctuation postponement process (step 100 IWS 114) in the first modification. In the next fluctuation postponement process, the CPU 103 first subtracts 1 from the value of the postponement period measurement timer (step 100IWS191), and confirms whether or not the value of the postponement period measurement timer after the subtraction is 0 (step 100IWS192). .. If the value of the postponement period measurement timer after subtraction is not 0, the process ends.

If the value of the postponement period measurement timer after subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 sets "800" in the time reduction counter (step 100IWS193) and sets "800" in the relief time reduction counter (step 100IWS193A). ). Further, the CPU 103 sets the time saving flag C and controls the time saving state (step 100IWS194). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the time saving state C designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS195).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step 100IWS110) (step 100IWS196).

In the modified example 1, in the next fluctuation postponement processing, a case is shown in which the time is shortened at the timing when the postponement period (20 seconds in this example) until the start of the next fluctuation has elapsed. It is not limited to the aspect. For example, in the next fluctuation postponement process, right-handed notification may be performed, and the time may be shortened at the start of the postponement period until the start of the next fluctuation or in the middle of the postponement period. That is, in the next fluctuation postponement process, it may be configured to control the time saving state and perform right-handed notification, or it may be configured to perform only right-handed notification without controlling the time saving state. Aspects are conceivable.

Further, in the modified example 1, the case where 20 seconds is uniformly measured as the postponement period in the next fluctuation postponement processing is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, when the relief time reduction counter is set ("800" is set) at the timing when the relief time is shortened and the relief time reduction is configured to be continuously generated, the relief time reduction is performed during the normal state and the time reduction is performed. A different postponement period may be set depending on the case where the relief time is shortened during the state. For example, when the relief time is shortened during the time reduction state, a shorter postponement period is set as compared with the case where the relief time is shortened during the normal state, and the measurement is performed in the next fluctuation postponement process, and the relief time is shortened for the second and subsequent times. In some cases, the postponement period may be shortened.

Further, during the execution of the next fluctuation postponement process, the image display device 5 does not display the decorative symbol, but displays only the small symbol so that the small symbol is not hidden by the effecting object or the like. May be good.

Further, in the modified example 1, when the relief time is shortened, the case where the next fluctuation postponement process is executed to extend the period until the next fluctuation is started is shown, but the variation display of the time reduction is not limited to such a mode. Also, it may be configured to extend the period until the next fluctuation is started by executing the next fluctuation postponement processing similar to the first variation.

Further, as described above, when applied to the variation display of the time saving deviation, the processing of steps 100IWS154 to S168 shown in FIGS. 11-17 may also be configured to be executed in the next variation postponement processing. With such a configuration, the symbol confirmation period of the fluctuation display when the time reduction is lost can be shared to 0.5 seconds, which is the same as the normal fluctuation display, and the processing related to right-handed notification can also be performed in the case of relief time reduction. Can be run in the same process as.

FIG. 11-46 is a timing chart for explaining the execution timing of the effect when the variation display that shortens the relief time in the first modification is executed. As shown in FIGS. 11-46, in the modified example 1, in the variation display immediately before the variation display in which the relief time is shortened (the value of the relief time reduction counter is 1), the variation display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is finished, and the variation display is removed. When the symbol (no time reduction) is stopped and displayed, the out-of-order symbol (no time reduction) is confirmed and displayed over the symbol confirmation period of 0.5 seconds (see step 100IWS1137). Next, in the variation display (see steps 100IWS74 and S75) in which the value of the relief time reduction counter becomes 0 at the start of the variation display and the relief time is shortened, the time reduction rush effect is executed in the image display device 5 during the variation display of the special symbol. (See step 108 IWS806B). Then, when the variable display of the special symbol is finished and the out-of-order symbol (no time reduction) is stopped and displayed, the out-of-order symbol (no time reduction) is confirmed and displayed for the same 0.5-second symbol confirmation period as usual (step 078IWS1135). reference). Then, when the symbol determination period of 0.5 seconds is completed, as shown in FIGS. 11-46, the next fluctuation postponement period of 20 seconds is started (see step 100 IWS114). Then, in the next fluctuation postponement period, as shown in FIGS. 11-46, the mode transition effect is executed in the image display device 5. Next, when a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) elapses during the next fluctuation postponement period, right-handed notification is started in the image display device 5 as shown in FIGS. 11-46. Then, when the next fluctuation postponement period elapses, the process shifts to the time saving state C, and as shown in FIGS. 11-46, the background image (the present) corresponding to the time saving state C (time saving state via the relief time saving) in the image display device 5. In the example, it can be switched to the background image of the orange display color).

In the case of the configuration as in the first modification, the fluctuation stop signal is output at the start of the symbol confirmation period of the outlier symbol, and after the symbol confirmation period has elapsed, the next fluctuation postponement process is started (that is, the next fluctuation postponement period). At the start), 4 jackpot signals may be output. The four jackpot signals here are signals that are output externally during the next fluctuation postponement period after the fluctuation display symbol determination period in which the relief time is shortened. With such a configuration, it is possible to avoid an external signal omission when the fluctuation stop signal and the four jackpot signals are output at the same time.

Further, in the case of the configuration as in the modified example 1, at the start of the next fluctuation postponement process (that is, at the start of the next fluctuation postponement period), the player is in a gaming state in which it is assumed that the player makes a right-handed strike. A test signal or an external output signal indicating the above may be output, or a right-handed notification may be started. With such a configuration, it is possible to output a signal related to right-handed strike and to notify right-handed strike at an appropriate timing.

(Modifications 2 to 4)
Further, in the above-mentioned feature unit 108IW, the fluctuation pattern table E (see FIG. 11-8 (E)) is uniformly selected during the time saving state controlled based on the relief time saving, and the fluctuation of the high speed fluctuation of 1.5 seconds is performed. The case where the display is executed is shown, but it is not limited to such an aspect. Hereinafter, modifications 2 to 4 in which the method of selecting the fluctuation pattern in the time saving state based on the relief time saving is different will be described. 11-47 is an explanatory diagram for explaining modified examples 2 to 4 of the method of selecting the fluctuation pattern in the time saving state based on the relief time saving.

First, with reference to FIG. 11-47 (A), a method of selecting a fluctuation pattern in the time saving state based on the relief time saving in the modification 2 will be described. In the above-mentioned feature unit 108IW, there is a case where the variation display is executed 800 times after the RAM clear processing (without becoming a big hit or a time saving loss), or after a big hit or a time saving loss (the next big hit or a time saving loss). Fluctuation pattern tables F, G (FIGS. 11-8 (F), (G)) from 10 before the fluctuation, which uniformly shortens the relief time, without distinguishing whether or not the fluctuation display is executed 800 times (without becoming). Select (see) and execute the fluctuation display for 5 seconds or 12 seconds at a high rate to execute the countdown effect and effect effect. After the relief time is shortened and the time is controlled to the time reduction state, the fluctuation pattern table E (Fig.) 11-8 (E)) is selected to execute the fluctuation display of the high-speed fluctuation of 1.5 seconds, but the mode is not limited to such a mode.

For example, as shown in the second modification of FIG. 11-47, when the relief time is shortened by executing the fluctuation display 800 times after the RAM clearing process, the relief time is shortened from 10 fluctuations before to 1 fluctuation before. Also selects the fluctuation pattern table B (see FIG. 11-7 (B)) to execute the same fluctuation display as usual, and after the time reduction state is controlled based on the relief time reduction, the fluctuation pattern table C (FIG. 11-7) (See (C)) may be selected to select a fluctuation pattern similar to the time saving state during the jackpot, and the fluctuation display of 5 seconds may be executed at a high rate.

Further, for example, as shown in the modified example 3 of FIGS. 11-47, in the case where the relief time is shortened by executing the variation display 800 times after the big hit, the variation is changed when the 800th variation display is executed. A variation pattern for relief time saving variation deviation (for example, variation pattern PA3-1) is selected from the pattern table I (see FIG. 11-8 (I)), and variation display with a variation time of 25 seconds is executed. The feature unit 108IW is configured to execute a time saving rush effect during the variation display, and execute a mode transition effect and a right-handed notification during the symbol confirmation period. For example, during the variation display for 25 seconds. In, the mode transition effect and the right-handed notification may be executed (thus, in this case, the symbol confirmation period may be secured for 0.5 seconds as usual).

In addition, in the modification 2 and the modification 3 of FIGS. 11-47, if the relief time is shortened after the RAM clear processing and the relief time is shortened after the big hit, the selection ratio of the fluctuation pattern in the variation display that is the relief time is different. It is possible to make the effect different, and it is also possible to make the effect different from the selection ratio of the fluctuation pattern in the variation display after shifting to the time saving state via the relief time saving.

Further, for example, as shown in the modified example 4 of FIG. 11-47, the fluctuation pattern table B (see FIG. 11-7 (B)) is selected even before the 10 fluctuations to 1 fluctuation, which shortens the relief time. Perform the same fluctuation display as usual, select the fluctuation pattern table C (see Fig. 11-7 (C)) during the time reduction state based on the first relief time reduction, and select the fluctuation pattern similar to the time reduction state when passing through the jackpot. Select to execute a 5-second fluctuation display at a high rate, select the fluctuation pattern table E (see FIG. 11-8 (E)) during the time reduction state based on the second relief time reduction, and select a high speed of 1.5 seconds. It may be configured to perform a variation display of the variation.

Next, the gaming machine according to the second embodiment in the feature unit 108IW of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-48 to 11-54. In addition, about Example 2, the part which is different from Example 1 will be mainly described.

In Example 2, in principle, it is not suggested that the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened and the relief time is close. Therefore, in the second embodiment, as in the fluctuation pattern table F as shown in FIG. 11-8 (F) of the first embodiment and the fluctuation pattern table G as shown in FIG. 11-8 (G), immediately before the relief time is shortened. There is no variable pattern table for this. That is, if the fluctuation pattern is determined using the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIGS. 11-8 (F) and 11-8 (G) only immediately before the relief time reduction, the player notices that it is immediately before the relief time reduction due to the tendency of the fluctuation pattern. However, by not using such a fluctuation pattern table, it is possible to prevent it from being noticed.

Further, in the second embodiment, the variation display in which the relief time is shortened is not a dedicated variation pattern in the relief time reduction, but a variation pattern used in the variation display in which the relief time is not shortened (for example, variation pattern PA1-1 (normal variation)). Is used. Therefore, in the second embodiment, the relief time is shortened as in the fluctuation pattern table I as shown in FIG. 11-8 (I) of the first embodiment and the fluctuation pattern table J as shown in FIG. 11-8 (J). There is no variation pattern table for variation when it becomes. With such a configuration, it is possible to standardize the fluctuation pattern when the relief time is shortened and before the relief time is shortened, and the data capacity can be reduced.

(Variation pattern setting process in Example 2)
Next, the fluctuation pattern setting process in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 11-48 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation pattern setting process (step S111) in the second embodiment. In the variation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first confirms whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step 100IWS1701). If the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 selects the jackpot variation pattern table A shown in FIG. 11-7 (A) as a table for determining the variation pattern (step 100IWS1702).

If the jackpot flag is not set (that is, if it is off), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the probability variation flag is set (step 100IWS1707). If the probability change flag is set (that is, in the probability change state), the CPU 103 uses the fluctuation pattern table for deviation in the probability change state shown in FIG. 11-8 (H) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern. Select H (step 100 IWS 1708). However, in this case, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total pending storage counter, selects the variation pattern table H on condition that the value of the total pending storage counter is 1 or more, and sets the value of the total pending storage counter. If is 0 (that is, if there is no hold storage), the variation pattern table B for deviation in the normal state shown in FIG. 11-7 (B) is selected.

If the probability change flag is not set, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time saving flag A indicating that the time saving state is controlled via the jackpot is set (step 100IWS1709). If the time saving flag A is set (that is, if the time saving state is controlled via the jackpot), the CPU 103 uses the jackpot as shown in FIG. 11-7 (C) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern. The variation pattern table C for the outlier in the controlled time saving state is selected (step 100IWS1710). However, in this case, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total pending storage counter, selects the variation pattern table C on condition that the value of the total pending storage counter is 1 or more, and sets the value of the total pending storage counter. If is 0 (that is, if there is no hold storage), the variation pattern table B for deviation in the normal state shown in FIG. 11-7 (B) is selected.

If the time saving flag A is not set, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time saving flag B indicating that the time saving state is controlled via the time saving deviation is set (step 100IWS1711). If the time reduction flag B is set (that is, if the time reduction state is controlled via the time reduction deviation), the CPU 103 uses the time reduction deviation as shown in FIG. 11-7 (D) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern. The variation pattern table D for the outlier in the time saving state controlled via the method is selected (step 100IWS1712). However, in this case, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total pending storage counter, selects the variation pattern table D on condition that the value of the total pending storage counter is 1 or more, and sets the value of the total pending storage counter. If is 0 (that is, if there is no hold storage), the variation pattern table B for deviation in the normal state shown in FIG. 11-7 (B) is selected.

If the time saving flag B is not set, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time saving flag C indicating that the time saving state is controlled via the relief time saving is set (step 100IWS1713). If the time saving flag C is set (that is, if the time saving state is controlled via the relief time saving), the CPU 103 uses the relief time saving as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern as shown in FIG. 11-8 (E). The variation pattern table E for the outlier in the time saving state controlled via the method is selected (step 100IWS1714).

If the time saving flag C is not set (that is, in the normal state), the CPU 103 uses the fluctuation pattern for deviation in the normal state shown in FIG. 11-7 (B) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern. Select table B (step 100 IWS 1715).

Next, the CPU 103 uses the variation pattern table determined to be used in steps 100IWS1702, S1708, S1710, S1712, S1714, and S1715, and the variation pattern determination random number stored in the first special symbol determination buffer. Based on this, it is determined which of the fluctuation patterns shown in FIGS. 11-7 and 11-8 should be used (step 100IWS1716).

When the variation pattern is determined, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1717).

Further, when the fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is determined in step 100IWS1716, the CPU 103 sets the fluctuation time data indicating the determined fluctuation time in the fluctuation time timer and measures the fluctuation time. (Step 100IWS1718), the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A or the variation display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is started (step 100IWS1719). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol variation processing (step 100IWS1720).

(Customer waiting demo production control process in Example 2)
As described above, in Example 2, in principle, it is not suggested that the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened and the relief time is close. Therefore, a telop display indicating that the rescue time saving function is provided is performed based on the reception of the customer waiting demo designation command (see Fig. 11-26), but the relief is performed depending on whether or not this telop display is executed and the production mode. It is not suggested that the remaining number of fluctuations until the time is shortened and the relief time is close. That is, in the second embodiment, based on the reception of the customer waiting demo designation command, the telop display for explaining the relief time reduction is always performed in a common manner.

Also in the second embodiment, it may be possible to suggest that the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened and the relief time reduction are close depending on whether or not the telop display is executed and the effect mode. However, in the predetermined period before the relief time is shortened (for example, the period in which the remaining number of fluctuations is 10 or less), the execution of the telop display is restricted (for example, the execution rate decreases) as compared with the period before that. Or do not do it). With this configuration, when the relief time is shortened, the background image is suddenly changed (that is, the notification that the time reduction control by the relief time is started) is suddenly executed, which surprises the player. It can be given to improve the interest.

(Variable display start setting process in Example 2)
Next, the variable display start setting process in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 11-49 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the second embodiment. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first reads the variable pattern command from the variable pattern command storage area (step 100 IWS801). Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays a decorative symbol display result (stop) according to the variation pattern command read in step 100IWS801 and the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command). The symbol) is determined (step 100IWS802).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets the execution of the advance notice effect to be executed during the variable display (step 108IWS802A). As a notice effect, for example, a timer effect can be executed in which a countdown is started after the start of fluctuation and an effect image suggesting a jackpot expectation is displayed when the count number becomes "0". In step 108IWS802A, the timer effect is executed. You may set the execution of.

FIG. 11-50 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the advance notice effect execution determination table and the advance notice effect mode determination table in the second embodiment. In step 108IWS802A of the second embodiment, whether or not the advance notice effect is executed is determined by using the advance notice effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 11-50 (A) regardless of the number of remaining times until the relief time is shortened. Further, when it is decided to execute the advance notice effect, the effect mode of the advance notice effect is determined using the advance notice effect mode determination table shown in FIG. 11-50 (B).

In the second embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11-50 (A) and 11-50, regardless of the number of times remaining until the relief time is shortened, whether or not the advance notice effect is executed and the effect mode when the advance notice effect is executed are determined. It is configured to be determined by a common ratio. Further, also in the second embodiment, as in the first embodiment, when the relief time is shortened and the time saving state C is shifted, the background image corresponding to the time saving state C (time saving state via the relief time saving) is displayed in the image display device 5. (In this example, the background image of the orange display color) is configured to be switched (see step 078IWS638). With such a configuration, a change in the background image (that is, a notification that the time reduction control by the relief time reduction is started) is suddenly executed, so that the player can be surprised and the interest can be improved. can.

As described above, in the second embodiment, in principle, it is not suggested that the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened and the relief time is close. The process for executing the countdown effect and the effect effect, and the process for displaying the initial result according to the number of times until the relief time is shortened are omitted.

In addition, also in Example 2, it may be possible to execute a fanning effect, a countdown effect, and an effect effect according to the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened. However, in the predetermined period before the relief time is shortened (for example, the period in which the remaining number of fluctuations is 10 or less), the execution of the fanning effect, the countdown effect, and the effect effect is restricted (for example). , The execution rate is reduced or not executed). With this configuration, the change in the background image (that is, the notification that the time reduction control by the relief time reduction is started) is suddenly executed, so that the player is surprised and the interest is improved. be able to.

Further, as described above, in the second embodiment, the variation display in which the relief time is shortened is not a dedicated variation pattern in the relief time reduction, but a variation pattern used in the variation display in which the relief time is not shortened (for example, the variation pattern PA1-1). (Normal variation)) is used. Therefore, in the second embodiment, the process for executing the time-saving rushing effect and the time-saving rushing masquerading effect is omitted. With such a configuration, for example, after the fluctuation display of the fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (normal fluctuation) is performed, the change of the background image (that is, the notification that the time reduction control by the relief time reduction is started) is suddenly executed. Therefore, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness and improve the interest.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the fluctuation pattern (step 108IWS811). Then, the process proceeds to step 108 IWS812.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 108IWS812).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command in the fluctuation time timer (step 108IWS814).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect processing during variable display (step S172) (step 108IWS815).

(Production execution timing in Example 2)
Next, the execution timing of the effect when executing the variable display that shortens the relief time in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 11-51 is a timing chart for explaining the execution timing of the effect when executing the variation display that shortens the relief time in the second embodiment.

As shown in FIGS. 11-51, in the fluctuation display immediately before the fluctuation display that shortens the relief time (the value of the relief time reduction counter is 1), the special symbol fluctuation time (the special symbol fluctuation time () after the fluctuation display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is started. When (for example, 12 seconds) elapses, it ends, and when the out-of-order symbol (no time reduction) is stopped and displayed, the out-of-order symbol (no time reduction) is confirmed and displayed over the symbol confirmation period of 0.5 seconds (see step 100IWS1137). Next, in the variation display (see steps 100IWS74 and S75) in which the value of the relief time reduction counter becomes 0 at the start of the variation display and the relief time is shortened, the variation display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is started as in the immediately preceding variation display. When the special symbol fluctuation time (for example, 12 seconds) elapses, the missed symbol (no time reduction) is stopped and displayed, and the missing symbol (no time reduction) is confirmed and displayed over the symbol confirmation period of 0.5 seconds. (See step 100 IWS1137). Then, when the symbol determination period elapses, the process shifts to the time saving state C, and as shown in FIGS. 11-51, the background image (this example) corresponding to the time saving state C (time saving state via the relief time saving) in the image display device 5. Then, it can be switched to the orange display color background image) (see step 100IWS638). With such a configuration, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness and prevent the production from becoming complicated. In addition, it is possible to clearly notify the player of the change in the gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest when the relief time is shortened.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-51, the right-handed notification is executed during the period in which the variation display is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, three times) after the transition to the time saving state C (FIG. 11-52 (C1). )reference). With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player recognize that the game state is a right-handed game while suppressing the production related to the transition to the time saving state C from becoming complicated, and the player is disadvantaged. Can be suppressed.

(Example of production in Example 2)
Next, a specific example of the effect mode until the transition to the time saving state C, which is the relief time saving in the second embodiment, will be described. FIG. 11-52 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the effect mode until the state shifts to the time saving state. In addition, in FIG. 11-52, the effect screen changes in the order of (A), (B), and (C).

In the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-52 (A), when the variation display for shortening the relief time is started and the special figure variation time (for example, 12 seconds) elapses, as shown in FIG. 11-52 (B). In addition, the decorative symbol 100IW100 and the small symbol 100IW101 are derived and displayed as a combination of the outlier symbols.

Then, when the symbol determination period elapses and the next variation display is started, as shown in FIG. 11-52 (C1), the image display device 5 responds to the time saving state C (time saving state via the relief time saving). The background image (in this example, the background image of the orange display color) is switched to, and the right-handed notification is executed.

If the hold storage is not stored when the symbol confirmation period has elapsed, the image display device 5 is based on the reception of the customer waiting demo designation command as shown in FIG. 11-52 (C2). In the above, the background image (in this example, the background image of the orange display color) corresponding to the time saving state C (the time saving state via the relief time saving) may be switched, and the right-handed notification may be executed.

Further, at the timing shown in FIGS. 11-52 (C1) and 11-52 (C2), the explanation regarding the relief time reduction by the telop display 100IW103 as shown in FIGS. 11-37 (A) and (B) (for example, the relief time reduction function and the relief time reduction) (Explanation of the production in) may be performed. Further, although the effect suggesting that the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened and the relief time is near is not executed, the telop display 100IW103 as shown in FIGS. 11-37 (A) and 11-37 (B) is performed at an arbitrary timing. May be displayed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

With the configuration shown in FIGS. 11-52, the change in the background image (that is, the notification that the time reduction control by the relief time reduction is started) is suddenly executed. Can be improved.

In addition, the change in the gaming state can be clearly notified to the player, and the interest when the relief time is shortened can be improved. In addition, it is possible to standardize the fluctuation pattern when the relief time reduction is established and before it is established, and the data capacity can be reduced.

It should be noted that the effect mode until the transition to the time saving state C, which is the relief time saving in the second embodiment, is not limited to that shown in FIGS. 11-52. For example, the modification 1 shown in FIGS. 11-53 and the modification 2 shown in FIG. 11-53 may be used.

(Production example in Example 2 [Modification example 1])
FIG. 11-53 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the effect mode until the relief time is shortened in the modified example 1 of the second embodiment.

In the modified example 1 shown in FIGS. 11-53, as shown in FIG. 11-53 (A), the variation display immediately before the variation display that shortens the relief time is stopped, and then the variation display that shortens the relief time is started. As shown in FIG. 11-53 (B), a time-saving rush effect (blackout effect) that makes it difficult to visually recognize the effect display (for example, decorative pattern 100IW100) displayed immediately before on the image display device 5 is executed. Will be done.

Then, when the special symbol fluctuation time (for example, 12 seconds) elapses, as shown in FIGS. 11-53 (C), the blackout state is eliminated, and the decorative symbol 100IW100 and the small symbol 100IW101 are derived by a combination of the outlier symbols. Is displayed.

Then, when the symbol determination period elapses and the next variation display is started, as shown in FIG. 11-53 (D), the image display device 5 responds to the time saving state C (time saving state via the relief time saving). The background image (in this example, the background image of the orange display color) is switched to, and the right-handed notification is executed. At the timing of FIG. 11-53 (C) when the blackout state is resolved, an image display or an output sound for notifying that the control of the time saving state (relief time saving) is started is performed. May be good.

With such a configuration, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness and improve the interest. Note that the effect shown in FIGS. 11-53 can be obtained by selecting, for example, a process table including a time reduction rush effect (blackout effect) in the variable display start setting process when the variable display is a relief time reduction. It can be realized.

(Production example in Example 2 [Modification 2])
FIG. 11-54 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the effect mode until the relief time is shortened in the modified example 2 of the second embodiment.

In the modified example 2 shown in FIGS. 11-54, as shown in FIG. 11-54 (A), the variation display that shortens the relief time is started, and a predetermined period (for example, 12 seconds) of the special figure variation time (for example, 12 seconds) is started. For example, after 8 seconds), as shown in FIGS. 11-54 (B), the decorative symbol 100IW100 is temporarily stopped and displayed in the image display device 5 in combination with the detached symbols. However, at the timing shown in FIGS. 11-54 (B), since the special figure fluctuation time has not elapsed, the small symbol 100IW101 is displayed in a variable manner.

Then, as shown in FIG. 11-54 (C), in the image display device 5, a time-saving rush effect (blackout effect) that makes it difficult to visually recognize the effect display (for example, decorative pattern 100IW100) displayed immediately before. Will be executed. Further, the special symbol fluctuation time elapses while the time saving rush effect (blackout effect) is being executed, and the small symbol 100IW101 is derived and displayed as a combination of the outlier symbols. The time saving rush effect (blackout effect) is continuously executed even during the symbol confirmation period.

Then, when the symbol determination period elapses and the next variation display is started, as shown in FIG. 11-54 (D), the blackout state is eliminated in the image display device 5, and the time saving state C ( It is possible to switch to the background image (in this example, the background image of the orange display color) according to the time saving state (time saving state via the relief time saving). Further, as shown in FIG. 11-54 (D), right-handed notification is executed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness and improve the interest. Note that the effect shown in FIGS. 11-53 can be obtained by selecting, for example, a process table including a time reduction rush effect (blackout effect) in the variable display start setting process when the variable display is a relief time reduction. It can be realized.

Relief by the telop display 100IW103 as shown in FIGS. 11-37 (A) and 11-37 (B) at the timings of FIGS. 11-53 (C), (D), 11-54 (C), (D), etc. An explanation regarding the time reduction (for example, an explanation of the relief time reduction function and the effect of the relief time reduction) may be given. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

In Example 1 of the feature unit 108IW shown above, in the period before the relief time is shortened (for example, the period in which the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief fluctuation is 10 or less), the fluctuation pattern that becomes the super reach is determined. , The decision to execute the advance notice effect is restricted, while in the second embodiment, none of them is restricted. However, by combining these, for example, before the relief time is shortened. In the period of (for example, the period in which the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief fluctuation is 10 or less), for example, the fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (normal fluctuation) is determined, and the notice of the type in which the degree of expectation is not so high among the notice effects is determined. The production may be made feasible. That is, it is possible to limit the determination of the fluctuation pattern that becomes the super reach, and also limit the execution of the notice effect of the type with high expectation among the advance notice effects.

Further, in the feature portion 108IW and each modification shown above, as an effect suggesting that the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened and the relief time reduction are close (also referred to as a relief suggestion effect), a fanning effect or a countdown effect, The effect effect is executed, and the initial appearance and the telop display waiting for the customer (for example, the telop display 108IW101 shown in FIGS. 11-26) are displayed according to the number of times until the relief time is shortened. Not limited. For example, an operation effect of operating the movable body 32 at an arbitrary timing during the fluctuation display or a fluctuation stop, a light emission effect in which a light emitting body such as a decorative LED is made to emit light in a specific mode (for example, a rainbow is made to emit light), or a movable body 32. Depending on the execution frequency and execution mode of the vibration effect that vibrates the stick controller 31A, the push button 31B, and the like, it may be suggested that the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened and the relief time is close.

Further, in the feature unit 108IW and each modification shown above, an effect control command (for example, an effect control command instructing recovery from a power failure or an effect control command instructing initialization) transmitted when the power is turned on is transmitted. , When the effect cannot be received normally on the production control board 12 side (for example, when a command is missed or a command is garbled), it is usually based on a command for specifying the game state or a command for specifying a fluctuation pattern. Although the effect of It may be possible). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from having expectations due to an erroneous relief suggestion effect.

Further, in the feature unit 108IW and each modification shown above, the relief time reduction number 1 designation command and the relief time reduction number 2 designation command (in this example, transmission is performed each time the variation display is executed) to specify the number of fluctuations up to the relief time reduction. If the message is not received normally, the relief suggestion effect may not be executed. In this case, the relief suggestion effect may not be executed only during the fluctuation display in which the relief time reduction number 1 specified command or the relief time reduction number 2 specified command could not be received normally, or the relief may be performed until the next big hit occurs. The suggestion effect may not be executed. In addition, for example, when the reception is not performed normally, the relief suggestion effect is executed in an effect mode or execution ratio that suggests that the number of remaining fluctuations that shortens the relief time is large (that is, the relief time is not close to the time reduction). You may. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from having expectations due to an erroneous relief suggestion effect.

Further, in the feature portion 108IW and each modification shown above, a case where the application is applied to a gaming machine that controls a jackpot game based on a variation display result is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, in a gaming machine configured to be able to execute a character game that controls a big hit game based on a game ball winning (V prize) in a specific area (V winning area) in the character during a small hit game. The configuration for controlling the feature portion 108IW shown above and the time saving state via the relief time saving shown in each modification may be applied.

Further, in the feature portion 108IW and each modification shown above, the case where the number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is fixed at 800 times is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, the value set in the relief time reduction counter may be switched to "800" or "900" depending on whether the RAM clear processing is executed or the jackpot occurs, or the value set in the relief time reduction counter at random may be set. It may be switched to "800" or "900".

In the feature portion 108IW and each modification shown above, the case where the time saving flag C is set each time the relief time saving occurs is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the time saving flag (fourth numerical value) set in the second relief time saving that has been transferred again may be different from the time saving flag (third numerical value) set in the first relief time saving.

In addition, in the feature portion 108IW and each modification shown above, the case where the time saving state after the big hit and the relief time saving have different effects (variation patterns) is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the time saving state after the big hit and the relief time saving may have the same effect (variation pattern). Specifically, even if the same notification (notification shown in FIG. 11-39 (K), notification suggesting future big hit acquisition, etc.) is performed as the end of the time reduction state after the big hit and the start of the relief time reduction. good.

In addition, in the feature portion 108IW and each modification shown above, the case where the effect (variation pattern) is different between the time reduction state of the time reduction and the relief time reduction is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the same effect (variation pattern) may be used for the time saving state where the time saving is off and the relief time saving. Specifically, even if the same notification (notification shown in FIG. 11-39 (K), notification suggesting future jackpot acquisition, etc.) is performed as the end of the time reduction state that is out of the time reduction and the start of the relief time reduction. good.

As described above, the features 108IW and each of the modified examples disclose the configurations of the gaming machines shown in the following (means 1A) to (means 8A).

(Means 1A) An advantageous advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game) based on the fact that the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed and the specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. A game machine that can be controlled to a state) and can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-17). Based on the execution of step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the control computer 100, the part in which step 100IWS537 is executed in the game control computer 100 as shown in FIG. 11-19) and the variable display. (For example, as shown in FIG. 11-13, a portion of the game control computer 100 for executing step 100 IWS71) is provided, and the state control means is updated by the update means. By setting the numerical information to a specific value corresponding to the special number of times the variable display is executed, it is possible to control the game to a special state when the special condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-13). The part that executes step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 in the computer 100 for game control, the part that executes step 100IWS170 and step 100IWS173 in the game control computer 100 as shown in FIG. 11-17), the updating means is the first identification information. The numerical information is updated depending on whether the variable display of the above is executed or the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-13, step 100 IWS 71 in the game control microcomputer 100 is performed. Steps to be executed), a predetermined suggestion effect execution means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-49) capable of executing a predetermined suggestion effect (for example, a notice effect) when the variable display is being executed, a step in the effect control CPU 120. 108IWS811 is executed) and a special notification effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-52 (C1) and (C2)) for notifying that the control of the special state is started based on the establishment of the special condition. Special notification that can execute (such as changing the background image, blacking out at the start of fluctuation as shown in FIG. 11-53 (B), blacking out at the end of fluctuation as shown in FIG. 11-54 (C), etc.) Production execution means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-23) The effect control CPU 120 further includes (a portion where the step 100 IWS638 is executed), and the predetermined suggestion effect execution means has a common ratio of executing the predetermined suggestion effect in the period before the special condition is satisfied (for example, FIG. 11). As shown in −44, the portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step 108IWS802A. See Figure 11-50). According to such a configuration, the player can be surprised by suddenly executing the special notification effect, and the interest can be improved.

(Means 2A) In the means 1A, the special notification effect executing means can execute the special notification effect when the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied is started, and the special notification effect is the special notification effect in the display means. This is an embodiment in which it is difficult to visually recognize the effect display displayed before the start (for example, blackout is performed at the start of the fluctuation as shown in FIG. 11-53 (B)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness and improve the interest.

(Means 3A) In the means 1A, an effect variable display executing means capable of executing a variable display of the effect identification information (for example, a decorative symbol) corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information. The special notification effect executing means can execute the special notification effect when the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied ends, and the special notification effect is an embodiment in which the identification information for the effect is difficult to see (for example). , Black out at the end of the fluctuation as shown in FIG. 11-54 (C)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness and improve the interest.

(Means 4A) In the means 1A, the special notification effect executing means can execute the special notification effect when the variable display after the variable display for which the special condition is satisfied is executed, and the special notification effect is displayed. In this mode, the background display in the means is changed to the background display corresponding to the special state (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-52 (C1), the background image (orange) is displayed when the next variable display is executed. NS). According to such a configuration, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness and improve the interest. In addition, it is possible to prevent the production from becoming complicated.

(Means 5A) In any one of means 1A to 4A, an explanatory effect executing means capable of executing an explanatory effect relating to a special state based on the establishment of a special condition is provided (for example, FIGS. 11-52 (C1), (C2). ), At the timing shown in FIGS. 11-53 (D) and 11-54 (D), the telop display 100IW103 as shown in FIGS. 11-37 (A) and 11-37 (B) will be described). According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

(Means 6A) In any of means 1A to means 5A, a variable display pattern determining means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100 determines a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns) shows a variation pattern shown in FIGS. 11-48. The variable display pattern determining means is provided with a variable display pattern (for example, variable pattern PA1-1 (normal variation)) that can be determined when the special condition is satisfied and even before the special condition is satisfied. )), The special notification effect executing means can execute the special notification effect after the non-specific display result (for example, the out-of-order symbol) is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied. According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify the player that the special condition is controlled by the establishment of the special condition, and it is possible to clearly notify the player of the change in the gaming state. It is possible to improve the interest when is established.

(Means 7A) In any of the means 1A to the means 6A, the variable display executing means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 is a step) capable of executing the variable display based on the establishment of the start condition and the establishment of the start condition. A portion for executing S112) and a hold storage means (for example, a first hold storage buffer and a second hold storage) that can store information related to variable display as hold information when the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not met. A buffer), a backup storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of holding numerical information updated by the update means and hold information stored by the hold storage means even when the power supply is stopped, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied. An initialization means that can execute an initialization process that initializes the stored contents of the backup storage means (for example, a portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S8) and backup storage when the power supply is started. A recovery means capable of executing a recovery process for recovering the numerical information updated by the update means and the hold information stored in the hold storage means based on the stored contents of the means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S6). Part) and. According to such a configuration, a power failure occurs in a situation where the hold storage corresponding to the variable display of the special number of times is stored before the power supply is stopped while optimizing the control by the initialization process. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages for the player when the game is played.

(Means 8A) In any of the means 1A to the means 6A, a state storage means capable of storing special state information (for example, the states of the time saving flags A to C) capable of identifying that the special state is controlled, and a special state storage means. Execution count storage means that can store execution count information (for example, the value of the time reduction counter) that can specify the number of times the variable display is executed in the state, and special state information and execution count information even if the power supply is stopped. A backup storage means that can hold numerical information (for example, RAM 102) and an initialization means that can execute an initialization process that initializes the stored contents of the backup storage means when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, game control). A portion of the computer 100 for executing step S8), and the initialization means holds special state information, execution count information, and numerical information by the backup storage means when a predetermined condition is satisfied. In the initialization process, the special state information and the execution count information are initialized, but the numerical information is not initialized (for example, the states of the time reduction flags A to C and the value of the time reduction counter are initialized. On the other hand, the value of the relief time reduction counter is not initialized (that is, the value before the power failure is set). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the numerical information from being intentionally initialized, and it is possible to increase the degree of relief for the player.

Further, the features 108IW and each modification disclose the configurations of the gaming machines shown in the following (means 1B) to (means 5B).

(Means 1B) An advantageous advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game) based on the fact that the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed and the specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. A game machine that can be controlled to a state) and can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-17). Based on the execution of step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the control microcomputer 100, the portion in which step 100IWS537 is executed in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 11-19) and the variable display. (For example, as shown in FIG. 11-13, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 for executing step 100 IWS71), a predetermined variable display pattern, and a predetermined variable display pattern are more variable than the predetermined variable display pattern. Variable display that determines a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a specific variable display pattern having a long display period (for example, variable pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) and variable pattern PA2-3 (super reach β)). A pattern determining means (for example, a portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes the variation pattern setting process shown in FIGS. 11-14) is provided, and the state control means variably displays the numerical information updated by the updating means. It is possible to control the special state when the special condition is satisfied by setting a specific value corresponding to the special number of times of execution (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-13, the step in the game control microcomputer 100. 100IWS74, a part for executing step 100IWS75, as shown in FIG. 11-17, a part for executing step 100IWS170 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100), the updating means is executed with variable display of the first identification information. The numerical information is updated (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-13, the portion where step 100 IWS 71 is executed in the game control microcomputer 100), and the numerical information is changed depending on whether the second identification information is variably displayed or the second identification information is executed. The display pattern determining means can determine the specific variable display pattern in both the case where the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result and the case where the display result does not become the specific display result (for example, FIG. 11-7 (for example, FIG. 11-7). A) , (B), the fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) and the fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) can be determined in both the case of a big hit and the case of a miss). When the display result of the variable display is the specific display result, the ratio of determining the specific variable display pattern is higher than that of the predetermined variable display pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (A), the variable pattern PA2- 2 (super reach α) and fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) are more likely to be determined in the case of a big hit than fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (normal fluctuation)), before the special conditions are satisfied. In the predetermined period, when the display result of the variable display does not become the specific display result, the ratio of determining the specific variable display pattern is lower than that in the period before the predetermined period (for example, FIG. 11-8 (F)). , (G), the rate of determining the fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) and the fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) is low immediately before the relief time is shortened). According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when the specific display result is not derived and displayed even though the variable display by the specific variable display pattern is executed in a predetermined period before the special condition is satisfied.

(Means 2B) The means 1B includes a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a countdown effect, an effect effect, a telop display waiting for a customer) related to the establishment of a special condition, and the suggestion effect execution means is provided. The rate of executing the suggestion effect is higher in the predetermined period before the special condition is satisfied than in the period before the predetermined period (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-31, the effect control CPU 120 causes the effect control CPU 120 to perform step 108IWS807. A portion for executing ~ S809; a portion for the effect control CPU 120 to execute 105IWS251). According to such a configuration, the player can be expected to establish the special condition, and the interest can be improved. In addition, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a disadvantage for the player due to the player ending the game immediately before the special condition is satisfied.

(Means 3B) In means 1B or means 2B, an explanatory effect regarding a special state based on the establishment of a special condition (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-37 (A) and 11-37 (B), a telop display 100IW103 is used for explanation). (For example, as shown in FIGS. 11-31, the portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes steps 108IWS803 to S804) is provided. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

(Means 4B) Execution of a notice effect (for example, a timer effect) capable of executing a notice effect (for example, a timer effect) for notifying that a specific display result is derived and displayed when the variable display is being executed in any of the means 1B to the means 3B. The notice effect executing means can execute the notice effect in both the case where the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result and the case where the display result of the variable display does not become the specific display result. Is higher in the case where the specific display result is obtained than in the case where the specific display result is not obtained, and the predetermined period before the special condition is satisfied (for example, the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less). (For example, as shown in FIGS. 11-31), the rate of executing the advance notice effect when the display result of the variable display does not become the specific display result is lower than that of the period before the predetermined period. , The portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step 108 IWS802A. See FIGS. 11-32 (A) and 11-32 (B). According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when the specific display result is not derived and displayed even though the notice effect is executed in the predetermined period before the special condition is satisfied.

(Means 5B) Execution of a notice effect (for example, a timer effect) capable of executing a notice effect (for example, a timer effect) for notifying that a specific display result is derived and displayed when the variable display is being executed in any of the means 1B to the means 4B. The notice effect executing means is provided with means, and the specific mode (for example, the effect mode "red") is defined in both cases where the display result of the variable display is the specific display result and the case where the display result is not the specific display result. The notice effect can be executed depending on the mode (for example, the effect mode "blue"), and when the display result of the variable display is the specific display result, the ratio of executing the notice effect in the specific mode is higher than that of the predetermined mode. When the variable display display result is not the specific display result in the predetermined period before the special condition is satisfied (for example, the period in which the remaining number of times until the relief time is 10 or less) is less than the period before the predetermined period. In addition, the ratio of executing the advance notice effect is low depending on the specific mode (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-31, the portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step 108IWS802A. See FIGS. 11-32 (C) and 11-32 (D)). .. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when the specific display result is not derived and displayed even though the advance notice effect is executed in the specific mode in the predetermined period before the special condition is satisfied.

Further, the features 108IW and each modification disclose the configurations of the gaming machines shown in the following (means 1C) to (means 8C).

(Means 1C) An advantageous advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game) based on the fact that the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed and the specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. A game machine that can be controlled to a state) and can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-17). Based on the execution of step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the control computer 100, the part in which step 100IWS537 is executed in the game control computer 100 as shown in FIG. 11-19) and the variable display. (For example, as shown in FIG. 11-13, the portion where step 100IWS71 is executed in the game control computer 100) and the special variable display pattern (for example, the variation pattern PA3-1 (for example, the variation pattern PA3-1)) in which the numerical information can be updated. Variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including (rushing off)) (for example, a portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes the variable pattern setting process shown in FIGS. 11-14). , And the state control means can control the special state when the special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times of execution of the variable display. (For example, as shown in FIG. 11-13, a portion for executing step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, and as shown in FIG. 11-17, step 100IWS170 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100. The updating means updates the numerical information depending on whether the variable display of the first identification information is executed or the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, in FIG. 11-13). As shown, the variable display pattern determining means in the game control microcomputer 100 for executing step 100IWS71) can determine the special variable display pattern when the special condition is satisfied, and before the special condition is satisfied. In, the special variable display pattern is not determined (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-14, the portion where steps 108IWS1701A and S1701B are executed in the game control microcomputer 100), and the special variable is not determined. When the variable display by the display pattern is executed, the specific notification effect executing means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-31) capable of executing the specific notification effect for notifying that the special state is controlled is used for game control. A portion of the microcomputer 100 that executes step 108 IWS806B. (See FIGS. 11-38 (G) and (H)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify the player that the special condition is controlled by the establishment of the special condition, and it is possible to improve the interest when the special condition is satisfied.

(Means 2C) In the means 1C, the specific notification effect executing means executes the specific notification effect when the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied is executed and the non-specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display. When the variable display that is possible and the special condition is satisfied is executed and the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, the specific display result is executed after the effect of the same mode as the specific notification effect is executed. Is executed by the special notification effect executing means (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-31, step 108 IWS806C in the game control microcomputer 100). 41 (see (G'), (H')). According to such a configuration, after the player once recognizes the establishment of the special condition, it is notified that the player is controlled in an advantageous state, so that the player can be surprised and the interest can be improved. Can be done.

(Means 3C) In means 1C or means 2C, when the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied is executed and the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, it is not executed before the special condition is satisfied. A predetermined notification effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined notification effect (for example, full rotation effect) for notifying that the specific display result is derived and displayed depending on the mode is provided. According to such a configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise and special feeling, and it is possible to improve the interest.

(Means 4C) In the means 1C or the means 2C, when the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied is executed and the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, the mode common to that before the special condition is satisfied. A notification effect execution means capable of executing a notification effect for notifying that a specific display result is derived and displayed (for example, even when the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0, the value varies as in the case where the value is not 0. It is provided with a pattern PB2-2 (super reach α) and a fluctuation pattern PB2-3 (realized by being determined by super reach β)). According to such a configuration, the variable display pattern can be shared between when the special condition is satisfied and before it is satisfied, and the data capacity can be reduced.

(Means 5C) In any of means 1C to means 4C, the display period (for example, 20 seconds) of the variable display display result when the special condition is satisfied is the display result of the variable display before the special condition is satisfied. The special condition is satisfied for longer than the display period (for example, 0.5 seconds) (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-15, the portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 100 IWS1135. See FIG. 11-36). In the display period of the display result of the variable display at the time of the operation, the notification effect execution means (for example, FIG. 11-33) capable of executing the notification effect (for example, the mode transition effect) for notifying that the control of the special state is started is shown. As shown, the effect control CPU 120 includes a portion that executes step 100 IWS847). According to such a configuration, it is possible to secure a period for executing the notification effect in the normal state, clarify the effect when switching the game state, and improve the interest.

(Means 6C) At the start of the display period of the display result of the variable display when the special condition is satisfied in any of the means 1C to the means 5C, a specific signal (for example, a fluctuation stop signal) corresponding to the start of the display period. Is output, and after the specific signal is output, a signal output means for outputting a special signal (for example, four jackpot signals) corresponding to the control of the special state is provided (see, for example, FIG. 11-18). According to such a configuration, when a specific signal and a special signal are output at the same time, it is possible to avoid an external signal omission.

(Means 7C) In the means 6C, the signal output means performs a special process (for example, the next fluctuation postponement process shown in FIGS. 11-45) executed after the display period of the display result of the variable display when the special condition is satisfied has elapsed. ) Is started, a special signal is output. According to such a configuration, when a specific signal and a special signal are output at the same time, it is possible to avoid an external signal omission.

(Means 8C) In any of means 1C to means 6C, a first passage area (for example, a first start winning opening) provided at a position where a game medium passing through a specific route (for example, a left-handed route) can pass. ), A second passage area (for example, a second start winning opening) provided at a position where a game medium passing through a special route (for example, a right-handed route) can pass, and a second as a variable display of identification information. Variable display execution means (for example, game control) capable of executing variable display of the first identification information based on the satisfaction of one start condition and variable display of the second identification information based on the satisfaction of the second start condition (for example, game control). A part where the microcomputer 100 executes step S112) and a special output that can specify that the game medium should be launched toward the special route (for example, in a gaming state in which the player is expected to make a right-handed strike). It is provided with a special output means capable of executing an output of a test signal or an external output signal indicating that the computer is present, and a notification that the player is in a state of right-handed striking. Is satisfied based on the passage of, the second start condition is satisfied based on the passage of the game medium through the second passage region, and the special output means is the display result of the variable display when the special condition is satisfied. The special output can be executed at the start of the special processing (for example, the next fluctuation postponement processing shown in FIGS. 11-45) that is executed after the display period of. According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute a special output that can specify that the game medium should be launched toward the special route at an appropriate timing.

Further, the features 108IW and each modification disclose the configurations of the gaming machines shown in the following (means 1D) to (means 5D).

(Means 1D) An advantageous advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game) based on the fact that the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed and the specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. A game machine that can be controlled to a state) and can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-17). Based on the execution of step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the control computer 100, the part in which step 100IWS537 is executed in the game control computer 100 as shown in FIG. 11-19) and the variable display. (For example, as shown in FIG. 11-13, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 for executing step 100 IWS71) and a variable display pattern for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns. A display pattern determining means (for example, a portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes the variation pattern setting process shown in FIGS. 11-48) is provided, and the state control means is variable in the numerical information updated by the updating means. By setting a specific value corresponding to the special number of times of display execution, it is possible to control the special state when the special condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-13, in the game control microcomputer 100. Step 100IWS74, a part for executing step 100IWS75, as shown in FIG. 11-17, a part for executing step 100IWS170 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100), the updating means is executed by variable display of the first identification information. Numerical information is updated depending on whether the second identification information is variably displayed or the second identification information is variably displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-13, the portion where step 100IWS71 is executed in the game control computer 100). The variable display pattern determining means determines a variable display pattern (for example, variation pattern PA1-1 (normal variation)) that can be determined even before the special condition is satisfied when the special condition is satisfied, and the special condition is satisfied. A special notification effect (for example, a background image corresponding to a reduction in relief time) for notifying that control of a special state is started after a non-specific display result (for example, an outlier symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display to be performed (for example, a background image corresponding to a reduction in relief time). Orange) display) can be executed A special notification effect executing means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step 100 IWS638) is further provided. According to such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify the player of the change in the gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest when the special condition is satisfied. In addition, the variable display pattern can be standardized when the special condition is satisfied and before it is satisfied, and the data capacity can be reduced.

(Means 2D) In the means 1D, a variable display executing means capable of executing a variable display based on the establishment of the start condition and the establishment of the start condition (for example, a portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S112). And the hold storage means (for example, the first hold storage number buffer and the second hold storage number buffer) that can store the information related to the variable display as the hold information when the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, and the hold storage. The look-ahead notice execution means is provided with a look-ahead notice execution means capable of executing a look-ahead notice effect (for example, a chance eye effect or a hold change effect) that targets a variable display corresponding to the hold information stored in the means. Of the variable displays corresponding to the hold information stored before the special condition is satisfied, it is possible to execute a look-ahead advance notice effect that targets the variable display when the special condition is satisfied, while the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied is satisfied. The execution of the look-ahead notice effect for which the variable display after the display is the target of the notice is restricted (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-27, the part where the effect control CPU 120 executes step 108 IWS702). According to such a configuration, it is possible to avoid complicating the control process and avoid inconsistency in the production contents.

(Means 3D) In the means 1D or the means 2D, the special notification effect executing means can execute the special notification effect when the variable display after the variable display for which the special condition is satisfied is executed, and the special notification effect can be executed. Is an embodiment in which the background display in the display means is changed to the background display corresponding to the special state (see, for example, FIG. 11-52 (C1)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness and improve the interest, and it is possible to prevent the production from becoming complicated.

(Means 4D) A suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a countdown effect, an effect effect, a telop display waiting for a customer, etc.) related to the establishment of a special condition is provided in any of the means 1D to the means 3D. , The suggestion effect execution means restricts the execution of the suggestion effect in a predetermined period before the special condition is satisfied. According to such a configuration, since the special notification effect is suddenly executed, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness and improve the interest.

(Means 5D) An explanatory effect executing means (for example, FIGS. 11-52 (C1), (C2)) capable of executing an explanatory effect relating to a special state based on the establishment of a special condition in any of the means 1D to the means 4D. At the timings shown in FIGS. 11-53 (D) and 11-54 (D), the telop display 100IW103 as shown in FIGS. 11-37 (A) and 11-37 (B) will be described). According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

Further, the features 108IW and each modification disclose the configurations of the gaming machines shown in the following (means 1E) to (means 4E).

(Means 1E-1) An advantageous advantageous state (for example,) based on the fact that the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed and the specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. As shown in FIG. 11-17, which is a game machine that can be controlled to a jackpot game state) and can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state. , Step 100IWS166 in the game control computer 100, a part for executing step 100IWS173, and a part for executing step 100IWS537 in the game control computer 100 as shown in FIG. 11-19) and variable display are executed. From the updating means (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-13, the portion where step 100IWS71 is executed in the game control microcomputer 100), the predetermined variable display pattern, and the predetermined variable display pattern, the numerical information can be updated based on the update means. A variable display pattern determining means (for example, a variable display pattern determining means) for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a shortened variable display pattern (for example, variable pattern PA1-4 (extremely shortened variation)) in which the variable display period is shortened. The game control microcomputer 100 includes a portion that executes the fluctuation pattern setting process shown in FIGS. 11-14), and the state control means is based on the fact that the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display. After being controlled to an advantageous state, it can be controlled to a special state (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-19, a portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 100 IWS537), and the numerical information updated by the updating means is By setting a specific value corresponding to the special number of times of execution of the variable display, it is possible to control the special state when the special condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-13, the game control microcomputer. Step 100IWS74 in 100, a part for executing step 100IWS75, as shown in FIG. 11-17, a part for executing step 100IWS170 and step 100IWS173 in the game control computer 100), the updating means is a variable display of the first identification information. (For example, as shown in FIG. 11-13, step 100 IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100 is actually performed. As for the variable display pattern determining means, the display result of the variable display is less in the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied than in the special state controlled after being controlled in the advantageous state. A portion for executing step 108 IWS1714 in the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIG. 11-14, in a high proportion of determining the shortened variable display pattern when a specific display result is obtained. See FIGS. 11-7 (C) and 11-8 (E)). According to such a configuration, when the number of times the variable display is executed reaches a specific number, the ratio of the variable display being executed by the shortened variable display pattern increases, and the period until the next advantageous state is controlled. Will be shortened, so it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

(Means 1E-2) An advantageous advantageous state (for example,) based on the fact that the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed and the specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. As shown in FIG. 11-17, which is a game machine that can be controlled to a jackpot game state) and can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state. , Step 100IWS166 in the game control computer 100, a part for executing step 100IWS173, and a part for executing step 100IWS537 in the game control computer 100 as shown in FIG. 11-19) and variable display are executed. An update means that can update numerical information based on (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-13, a portion that executes step 100 IWS 71 in the game control microcomputer 100) and a specific variable display pattern corresponding to the execution of the reach effect. Variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including the variable pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) and the variable pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) (for example, for game control). The microcomputer 100 includes (a portion for executing the fluctuation pattern setting process shown in FIGS. 11-14), and the state control means is in an advantageous state based on the fact that the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display. (For example, as shown in FIG. 11-19, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 100 IWS537), and the numerical information updated by the update means is variably displayed. It is possible to control the special state when the special condition is satisfied by setting a specific value corresponding to the special number of times of execution (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-13, the step in the game control microcomputer 100. 100IWS74, a part for executing step 100IWS75, as shown in FIG. 11-17, a part for executing step 100IWS170 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100), the updating means is executed with variable display of the first identification information. The numerical information is updated depending on the case where the variable display of the second identification information is executed and the case where the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-13, step 100 IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100 is executed. In the variable display pattern determining means, the display result of the variable display is not specified in the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied than in the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state. A portion for executing step 108 IWS1714 in the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIG. 11-14, at a low rate of determining the specific variable display pattern when the display result is obtained. See FIGS. 11-7 (C) and 11-8 (E)). According to such a configuration, when the number of times the variable display is executed reaches a specific number, the ratio of the variable display display result by the specific variable display pattern to the non-specific display result becomes low, which reduces the interest. It can be suppressed.

(Means 2E) In the means 1E, a background display means capable of displaying different background displays in the display means depending on the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state and the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 11-23, a portion for executing steps 100 IWS634 and S638 in the effect control CPU 120) is provided. According to such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify the player of the difference in the gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest.

(Means 3E) In the means 1E or the means 2E, a variable display executing means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) that can execute a variable display based on the establishment of the start condition and the establishment of the start condition (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S112). And a hold storage means (for example, a first hold storage buffer or a second hold storage buffer) that can store information related to variable display as hold information when the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not met. , A look-ahead notice execution means capable of executing a look-ahead notice effect (for example, a chance eye effect or a hold change effect) that targets a variable display corresponding to the hold information stored in the hold storage means, and executes the look-ahead notice. The means is a special state that is controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state and a special state that is controlled when a special condition is satisfied. The ratio of whether or not to execute the effect is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-27, the portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step 108 IWS703. See FIGS. 11-28 (A) and 11-28 (B)). According to such a configuration, the execution frequency and the type of the look-ahead advance notice effect are determined between the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state and the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied. It can be different and can improve the interest.

(Means 4E) In any of the means 1E to the means 3E, the variable display executing means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 is a step) capable of executing the variable display based on the establishment of the start condition and the establishment of the start condition. (Part where S112 is executed) and a hold storage means (for example, a first hold storage buffer or a second hold storage) that can store information related to variable display as hold information when the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not met. A buffer) and a look-ahead notice execution means capable of executing a look-ahead notice effect (for example, a chance eye effect or a hold change effect) for a variable display corresponding to the hold information stored in the hold storage means. The look-ahead notice execution means can execute a look-ahead notice effect that targets the variable display when the special condition is satisfied among the variable displays corresponding to the hold information stored before the special condition is satisfied. The execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect for which the variable display after the variable display for which the special condition is satisfied is to be announced is restricted (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-27, the part where the effect control CPU 120 executes step 108 IWS702). According to such a configuration, it is possible to avoid complicating the control process and avoid inconsistency in the production contents.

Further, the features 108IW and each modification disclose the configurations of the gaming machines shown in the following (means 1a) to (means 10a).

(Means 1a) An advantageous advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game) based on the fact that the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed and the specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. A game machine that can be controlled to a state) and can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-17). Based on the execution of step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the control computer 100, the part in which step 100IWS537 is executed in the game control computer 100 as shown in FIG. 11-19) and the variable display. (For example, as shown in FIG. 11-13, a portion of the game control computer 100 for executing step 100 IWS71) is provided, and the state control means is updated by the update means. When the special condition is satisfied, the numerical information becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times, so that the special state can be controlled (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-13, step 100 IWS74 in the game control microcomputer 100, The part that executes step 100IWS75, the part that executes step 100IWS172 and step 100IWS173 in the game control computer 100 as shown in FIG. 11-17), the updating means is the case where the variable display of the first identification information is executed. It is characterized in that the numerical information is updated depending on whether the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-13, the portion where step 100IWS71 is executed in the game control microcomputer 100). do. According to such a configuration, the relief of the player can be suitably realized. Specifically, even if the game state changes and the variable display of any identification information is executed, the numerical information is continuously updated, so that the player can be easily rescued and the motivation for the game is increased. Can be done.

In this example, the case where the initial value is set in the relief time reduction counter when a big hit occurs is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, multiple types of jackpots (big hits that are not given time reduction, jackpots with a small number of game balls acquired, jackpots with the second special symbol, etc.) are provided, and the initial value of the relief time reduction counter is not set for some jackpots. It may be configured as follows.

In this example, the case where the first special symbol is mainly changed in the normal state is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, the number of reserved memories may be increased so that both the first special symbol and the second special symbol fluctuate in the normal state.

(Means 2a) In the means 1a, the special condition is satisfied based on the fact that a predetermined display result (for example, an outlier symbol) different from the specific display result is continuously derived and displayed a special number of times as the display result of the variable display (means 2a). For example, as shown in FIG. 11-13, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 that executes step 100IWS63, step 100IWS71, step 100IWS74, and step 100IWS75, and as shown in FIG. 11-17, the game control microcomputer. It may be configured to execute step 100IWS172 and step 100IWS173 in 100). According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game because the display result, which is disadvantageous to the player, is relieved when the display result is continuously derived and displayed.

(Means 3a) In the means 1a or the means 2a, the updating means updates the numerical information when the variable display is executed even in a state different from the normal state (for example, a probabilistic state, a time saving state) (for example, FIG. 11). As shown in -17, it may be configured to execute step 100 IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100). According to such a configuration, the relief of the player can be suitably realized. Specifically, the numerical information is updated fairly, and even after being once controlled to the special state, it can be controlled to the special state again, so that it can be controlled to the special state until it is substantially controlled to the advantageous state. As a result, the investment of the player can be suppressed and the disadvantage to the player can be prevented.

In this example, the case where the relief time reduction counter is updated based on the low probability low base (normal state), the high probability high base (probability variation state), and the low probability high base (time reduction state) is shown. It is not limited to the aspect. For example, the relief time reduction counter is updated in all four states of low probability low base (normal state), high probability high base (probability change state), low probability high base (time reduction state), and high probability low base (latent probability change). It may be configured as follows. In this case, it can be applied to a gaming machine that executes a lottery for falling to a normal state in a probabilistic state.

In this example, the case where the second special symbol is preferentially digested is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, a variable winning ball device 6B is provided at the first starting winning opening, a high probability low base (small hit RUSH) in which small hits occur frequently is provided, and the game balls are digested in the order of winning, the first special symbol and the second special. The symbols may be configured to fluctuate at the same time.

In this example, the case where the first special symbol and the second special symbol are provided is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, it may be configured to provide only the first special symbol.

(Means 4a) In any of means 1a to 3a, the updating means sets numerical information as an initial value when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-16, a game control microcomputer. A part for executing step 100IWS135 in 100, a part for executing step 100IWS144, and a part for executing step 100IWS167 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 11-17) may be configured. According to such a configuration, when the player is controlled in an advantageous state, the situation becomes advantageous for the player, and it is not necessary to rescue the player, so that it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming higher than necessary.

(Means 5a) In the means 4a, the predetermined condition is controlled to an advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-16, a portion for executing step 100 IWS135 in the game control microcomputer 100). It may have been done. According to such a configuration, when the player is controlled in an advantageous state, the situation becomes advantageous for the player, and it is not necessary to rescue the player, so that it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming higher than necessary.

(Means 6a) In the means 4a, the state control means can control the special state when a special display result (for example, a time saving deviation) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed in the normal state (for example, FIG. 11). As shown in -17, the portion of the game control microcomputer 100 for executing step 100 IWS166), the predetermined condition is that the special display result is derived and displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-17, the game is played. The part that executes step 100 IWS167 in the control microcomputer 100) may be configured. According to such a configuration, when it is controlled to a special state, it becomes an advantageous situation for the player, and it is not necessary to rescue the player, so that it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming higher than necessary.

(Means 7a) In the means 4a, the predetermined condition is that the variable display is executed a special number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-16, the portion where the step 100 IWS 144 of the game control microcomputer 100 is executed). It may be configured in. According to such a configuration, it is possible to substantially control the special state until the next advantageous state, so that the degree of relief of the player can be increased.

(Means 8a) The means 4a includes a backup storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of holding numerical information to be updated by the update means even if the power supply is stopped when the power supply is stopped. , Set the numerical information held by the backup storage means to the initial value when a specific condition is satisfied (for example, execution of the initialization process) (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-11, the game control microcomputer. (Part of executing step 100IWS12 in 100), a predetermined condition is that a specific condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-11, a part of executing step 100IWS8 and step 100IWS12 in the game control microcomputer 100). ) May be configured. According to such a configuration, when the initialization is performed in the amusement park, if the numerical information up to the special number of times is retained, it may be too disadvantageous for the amusement park, so it is operated for the amusement park. It can be made easier.

(Means 9a) In any of means 1a to 8a, an effect control means corresponding to variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 7, a portion for executing steps S170 to S172 in the effect control CPU 120) is provided. The control means can be controlled to a special state for a specific period equal to or greater than the special number of times based on the execution of the variable display of the special number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-13, in the game control microcomputer 100. Based on the part where step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 are executed, the part where step 100IWS172 is executed in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 11-17), and the variable display of the special number of times is executed in the special state. It is possible to control the special state again for a specific period (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-13, the portion where step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 are executed in the game control microcomputer 100, and as shown in FIG. 11-17, the game. (Part of executing step 100IWS172 in the control microcomputer 100), the effect control means executes different effects in the first specific period and the second specific period (for example, the modification of FIGS. 11-47). It may be configured as shown in Example 4). According to such a configuration, when the special state is controlled in the second specific period, the situation is not controlled to the advantageous state for a long period of time, so measures such as shortening the execution time of the variable display should be taken. By changing the production mode, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

(Means 10a) In any of the means 1a to the means 8a, an effect control means corresponding to variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 7, a portion for executing steps S170 to S172 in the effect control CPU 120) is provided. The control means can be controlled to a special state for a specific period equal to or greater than the special number of times based on the execution of the variable display of the special number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-13, in the game control microcomputer 100. Based on the part where step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 are executed, the part where step 100IWS172 is executed in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 11-17), and the variable display of the special number of times is executed in the special state. It is possible to control the special state again for a specific period (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-13, the portion where step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 are executed in the game control microcomputer 100, and as shown in FIG. 11-17, the game. (Part of executing step 100IWS172 in the control microcomputer 100), the effect control means executes a common effect in the first specific period and the second specific period (for example, FIG. 11-47). It may be configured as shown in the modified example 2 and the modified example 3). According to such a configuration, when the special state is controlled in the second specific period, the advantageous state is not controlled for a long period of time. Therefore, by intentionally performing the same effect, the advantageous state is obtained for a long period of time. It is possible to prevent the player from being unnecessarily aware of the uncontrolled situation, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

Further, in the present feature portion 108IW and each modification, the configurations of the gaming machines shown in the following (means 1b-1), (means 1b-2) to (means 5b) are disclosed.

(Means 1b-1) An advantageous advantageous state (for example,) based on the fact that the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed and the specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. A gaming area that is a game machine that can be controlled to a jackpot game state) and can divide the game medium into a first path (for example, a left-handed path) and a second path (for example, a right-handed path). Step 100 IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIG. 11-17, are state control means that can control a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state. The part to be executed, as shown in FIG. 11-19, the part to execute step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100, and the updating means (for example, the part where the numerical information can be updated based on the execution of the variable display). As shown in FIG. 11-13, a game required to execute a plurality of types of processes including a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 for executing step 100 IWS71), variable display control, and advantageous state control. A process execution means (for example, as shown in FIG. 5, a portion for executing step S25 in the game control microcomputer 100) that updates a data value indicating a progress state and executes a process corresponding to the data value. In addition, the state control means can control the special state when the special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-13). In addition, the part that executes step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, and the part that executes step 100IWS172 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 11-17), the updating means is Numerical information is updated depending on whether the variable display of the first identification information is executed or the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-13, the game control microcomputer 100. The process executing means executes the first process related to the variable display when the data value is the first numerical value (for example, as shown in FIG. 5, the step 100 in the game control microcomputer 100). The part where S110 to S113 are executed), the data value is the first When the second numerical value is different from the numerical value, the second process relating to the advantageous state is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 5, the portion where steps S114 to S117 are executed in the game control microcomputer 100), and the data value is the first. When the numerical value and the third numerical value are different from the second numerical value, the state control means executes a third process for controlling the special state based on the establishment of the special condition (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-43, the game control. (Part of executing step 100 IWS114 in the microcomputer 100), in the normal state, the game medium is fired to the first path to play the game, and in the special state, the game medium is fired to the second path to play the game. The third process is being executed, the game medium is provided with a launch promotion notification means (see FIGS. 11-46) for executing a launch promotion notification to the effect that the game medium should be launched to the second path. With such a configuration, it is possible to enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications are complicated. For example, by performing the launch promotion notification to the second path before being controlled to the special state, it is possible to execute an effect related to the launch promotion notification early when the special state is controlled.

(Means 1b-2) An advantageous advantageous state (for example,) based on the fact that the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed and the specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. As shown in FIG. 11-17, which is a game machine that can be controlled to a jackpot game state) and can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state. , Step 100IWS166 in the game control computer 100, a part for executing step 100IWS173, and a part for executing step 100IWS537 in the game control computer 100 as shown in FIG. 11-19) and variable display are executed. Update means (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-13, the portion where step 100 IWS 71 is executed in the game control microcomputer 100), variable display control, and advantageous state control are provided. A process execution means (for example, as shown in FIG. 5, for game control) that updates a data value indicating a game progress state required to execute a plurality of types of processes including the computer and executes a process corresponding to the data value. The state control means is provided with (a portion for executing step S25 in the microcomputer 100), and the state control means is put into a special state when a special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to a special number of times. It is controllable (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-13, a portion for executing step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, and as shown in FIG. 11-17, a step in the game control microcomputer 100. 100IWS172, the part where step 100IWS173 is executed), the updating means updates the numerical information between the case where the variable display of the first identification information is executed and the case where the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, FIG. As shown in 11-13, the process executing means executes the first process related to the variable display when the data value is the first numerical value (for example, the portion that executes the step 100 IWS 67 in the game control computer 100) (for example, FIG. As shown in FIG. 5 (the portion where steps S110 to S113 are executed in the game control microcomputer 100), when the data value is a second numerical value different from the first numerical value, the second process regarding the advantageous state is executed (for example, FIG. As shown in 5, a micro computer for game control (Part of executing steps S114 to S117) in the data 100), when the data value is a third numerical value different from the first numerical value and the second numerical value, the state control means controls the special state based on the establishment of the special condition. Notification that the three processes are executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-43, the portion where the step 100 IWS 114 is executed in the game control microcomputer 100) is executed, and the special state is controlled during the execution of the third process. It is characterized in that it is provided with an effect executing means (see FIGS. 11-46) for executing the effect. With such a configuration, it is possible to enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications are complicated. For example, by performing the launch promotion notification to the second path before being controlled to the special state, it is possible to execute an effect related to the launch promotion notification early when the special state is controlled.

In this example, the case where the processing related to the big hit is prioritized is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, it may be configured to give priority to the process related to the variable display and the process related to the relief time reduction.

In this example, the case of right-handed notification in the next fluctuation postponement processing, which is the third processing, is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, it may be configured to execute only the mode transition effect suggesting the transition to the time saving state without performing the right-handed notification.

(Means 2b) In the means 1b-1 and the means 1b-2, the processing executing means executes the second processing after the first processing when the specific display result is derived and displayed in the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied (means 2b). For example, as shown in FIG. 11-16, when step 100IWS133 in the game control microcomputer 100 is Y, step 100IWS140 may be executed and step 100IWS114 may not be executed). According to such a configuration, since the control of the advantageous state is prioritized, the result is not disadvantageous to the player, and the deterioration of the interest of the game can be suppressed.

(Means 3b) In means 1b-1, means 1b-2 or means 2b, the updating means updates the numerical information when the variable display is started (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-13, for game control. The processing executing means changes the special information from the first information to the second information when the numerical information updated by the updating means becomes a specific value (for example, FIG. 11). As shown in -17, the part that executes step 100 IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100) changes the special information from the second information to the first information when the state control means controls the special state (for example, FIG. As shown in 11-16, the portion of the game control microcomputer 100 that executes step 100 IWS145) executes different processing when the special information is the first information and when the special information is the second information (for example, FIG. As shown in 11-14, it may be configured to execute step 100 IWS 1714 in the game control microcomputer 100). According to such a configuration, the process of shifting to the special state can be suitably executed by managing the special information.

(Means 4b) Means 3b includes variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern for variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 5, a portion for executing step S111 in the game control microcomputer 100) and is variable. The display pattern determining means determines a variable display pattern that differs depending on whether the special information is the first information or the second information (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-14, step 100 IWS1714 in the game control microcomputer 100. The part that executes) may be configured. According to such a configuration, the effect can be suitably executed when the variable display of a special number of times is executed.

(Means 5b) Means 3b includes variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern for variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 5, a portion for executing step S111 in the game control microcomputer 100) and is variable. The display pattern determining means determines a variable display pattern in which the confirmation time of the display result differs depending on whether the special information is the first information or the second information (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-15, for game control. It may be configured to execute step 100IWS1128 and step 100IWS1130 in the microcomputer 100). According to such a configuration, the effect can be suitably executed when the variable display of a special number of times is executed.

Further, the features 108IW and each modification disclose the configurations of the gaming machines shown in the following (means 1c) to (means 6c).

(Means 1c) An advantageous advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game) based on the fact that the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed and the specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. A game control means (for example, as shown in FIG. 5, a portion that executes step S25 in the effect control CPU 120) that is a game machine that can be controlled to a state) and can control the game, and a variable display. (For example, as shown in FIG. 7, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 for executing steps S170 to S172, and as shown in FIG. 11-31, step 108 IWS811 in the effect control CPU 120. As shown in FIG. 11-17, the game control means can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state. In addition, step 100IWS166 in the game control computer 100, a part for executing step 100IWS173, and a part for executing step 100IWS537 in the game control computer 100 as shown in FIG. 11-19) and variable display are executed. Based on this, the updating means that can update the numerical information (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-13, the part that executes step 100 IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100) and the state controlled by the state control means The state control means includes a state information control means for controlling the identifiable state information, and the state control means is put into a special state after being controlled to an advantageous state based on the derivation display of the specific display result as the display result of the variable display. It is controllable (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-12, the part where step 100IWS64 is executed in the game control microcomputer 100), and the numerical information updated by the updating means becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times. It is possible to control the special state when the special condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-13, the portion where step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 are executed in the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIG. 11-17. In addition, the part that executes step 100IWS172 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100), the updating means is a case where the variable display of the first identification information is executed and a case where the variable display of the second identification information is executed. Numerical information The information is updated (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-13, the portion where step 100 IWS71 is executed in the game control microcomputer 100), and the state information control means sets the state information as the first numerical value in the normal state (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-13). For example, as shown in FIGS. 11-16, the part that executes step 100IWS145 and step 100IWS149 in the game control microcomputer 100, that is, the time saving flags A and C are not set, and the corresponding data is "0". ), The state information is set to the second numerical value when the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display and then controlled to the special state after being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, in FIG. 11-19). As shown, the part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100, that is, the time saving flag A is set, and the data corresponding to the time saving flag A is “1”), based on the fact that the special condition is satisfied. When controlled to a special state, the state information is set to a third numerical value different from the first numerical value and the second numerical value (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-17, a portion for executing step 100 IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100, That is, the time saving flag C is set, the data corresponding to the time saving flag C is "1"), the game control means can transmit specific information to the effect control means, and the state information is displayed when it is in a special state. It is possible to transmit specific information according to the case of the second numerical value and the case of the third numerical value (for example, the part shown in FIG. 11-10, as shown in FIG. 11-19, the game control microcomputer. A portion of 100 that executes step 100IWS540, and a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 that executes step 100IWS174). With such a configuration, it is possible to enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications are complicated. For example, since different gaming states can be suitably identified, control becomes easy, and if specific information is also changed at that time, the effect can be preferably executed when the effect control means executes different effects.

In this example, the case where the time saving state A designation command and the time saving state C designation command are transmitted as specific information is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the background specification command and the fluctuation pattern command are configured to be transmitted in a mode that can be identified as being in the time saving state via the jackpot, the time saving state via the time saving loss, or the time saving state via the relief time saving. May be good. In addition, for example, when a big hit occurs, a big hit start designation command (fanfare designation command) or a jackpot end designation command (ending designation command) is transmitted in different modes depending on the game state, and depending on which command is received. It may be configured so that the fanfare period and the ending period change.

(Means 2c) In the means 1c, when the special condition is satisfied again after the state information control means is controlled to the special state based on the establishment of the special condition, the state information is subjected to the first numerical value, the second numerical value, and the second numerical value. It may be configured to have a fourth numerical value different from the third numerical value (for example, a portion for executing step 100 IWS166 in the game control microcomputer 100). With such a configuration, it is possible to enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications are complicated. For example, since different gaming states can be suitably identified, control becomes easy, and if specific information is also changed at that time, the effect can be preferably executed when the effect control means executes different effects.

(Means 3c) In the means 1c or the means 2c, the effect control means controls the state control means to a special state based on the derivation and display of the specific display result, and the state control means satisfies the special condition. The effect may be different from that when the special state is controlled based on the above (for example, the effect control CPU 120 may be configured to execute steps 100 IWS634 and S638). According to such a configuration, the variable display in the special state controlled by the establishment of the special condition can be efficiently digested, so that it becomes possible to execute the production according to the situation and improve the interest of the game. be able to.

(Means 4c) In any of the means 1c to the means 3c, the effect control means controls the state control means to a special state based on the derivation and display of the specific display result, and the state control means is special. It is possible to execute a common effect when the condition is controlled based on the condition being satisfied (for example, the effect control CPU 120 displays a common background image in step 100IWS634 and step 100IWS638). It may be configured in. According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to make the production in the controlled special state the same every time when the special condition is satisfied, which prevents an increase in development cost because a new production is not required. At the same time, the interest of the game can be improved because the player is not confused.

(Means 5c) In any of the means 1c to the means 4c, the state control means can control the special state when a special display result (for example, a time saving deviation) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed in the normal state. Yes (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-17, the portion where step 100IWS166 is executed in the game control microcomputer 100), the effect control means is based on the fact that the state control means derives and displays the special display result. It is possible to execute different effects depending on whether the state control means is controlled to the special state or the state control means is controlled to the special state based on the establishment of the special condition (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is in step 100 IWS636). It may be configured to execute S638). According to such a configuration, the variable display in the special state controlled by the establishment of the special condition can be efficiently digested, so that it becomes possible to execute the production according to the situation and improve the interest of the game. be able to.

(Means 6c) In any of the means 1c to the means 4c, the state control means can control the special state when a special display result different from the specific display result is derived and displayed in the normal state, and the effect control means can control the effect. It is common when the state control means controls the special state based on the fact that the special display result is derived and displayed, and when the state control means controls the special state based on the satisfaction of the special condition. The effect may be executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 may display a common background image in the step 100 IWS 636 and the step 100 IWS 638). According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to make the production in the controlled special state the same every time when the special condition is satisfied, which prevents an increase in development cost because a new production is not required. At the same time, the interest of the game can be improved because the player is not confused.

Further, the features 108IW and each modification disclose the configurations of the gaming machines shown in the following (means 1d) to (means 4d).

(Means 1d) An advantageous advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game) based on the fact that the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed and the specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. A game control means (for example, as shown in FIG. 5, a portion that executes step S25 in the effect control CPU 120) that is a game machine that can be controlled to a state) and can control the game, and a variable display. (For example, as shown in FIG. 7, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 for executing steps S170 to S172, and as shown in FIG. 11-31, step 108 IWS811 in the effect control CPU 120. As shown in FIG. 11-17, the game control means can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state. In addition, step 100IWS166 in the game control computer 100, a part for executing step 100IWS173, and a part for executing step 100IWS537 in the game control computer 100 as shown in FIG. 11-19) and variable display are executed. Based on this, when the numerical information can be updated (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-13, the portion where step 100 IWS 71 is executed in the game control microcomputer 100) and the power supply is stopped. The state control means includes a backup storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of holding numerical information regarding the number of times the variable display is executed, and the state control means is special because the numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times. When the condition is satisfied, it can be controlled to a special state (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-13, a portion in which step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 are executed in the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIG. 11-17. , The part that executes step 100IWS172 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100), the updating means depends on the case where the variable display of the first identification information is executed and the case where the variable display of the second identification information is executed. Numerical information is updated (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-13, a portion of the game control computer 100 for executing step 100 IWS71), and the game control means directs and controls predetermined information when power supply is started. It can be transmitted to the means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-11, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 for executing step 100 IWS11), and the effect control means supplies power based on the reception of predetermined information. Is characterized in that it is possible to execute a suggestion effect regarding the number of times the variable display is executed in a predetermined period after the start of the operation (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-22, a portion where step 100 IWS630 is executed in the effect control CPU 120). do. With such a configuration, it is possible to enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications are complicated. For example, it is possible to give the player a motivation to play a game from the start of business of the game hall, and to increase the operating rate of the game machine.

In this example, the initial appearance is shown as a suggestion effect regarding the number of times the variable display is executed, but the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, it may be configured to execute a change in the background, an effect during fluctuation up to 100 rotations, and a suggestion effect by displaying on a demo screen or a menu screen.

When a command for specifying initialization (S9 in FIG. 11-12) is transmitted, the effect control CPU 120 may be configured to recognize the number of times until the relief time is shortened as an initial value and execute the effect. ..

(Means 2d) In the means 1d, the game control means can transmit specific information that can identify the numerical information held by the backup storage means to the effect control means when the power supply is started (for example, FIG. As shown in 11-11, the game control microcomputer 100 may be configured to execute step 100 IWS11). With such a configuration, it is possible to enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications are complicated. For example, it is possible to give the player a motivation to play a game from the start of business of the game hall, increase the operating rate of the game machine, and suppress the increase in the processing load.

In this example, a command that can specify the value of the relief time reduction counter is transmitted at the time of recovery, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, 1 to 99 rotations can be specified in 100 rotation units, 100 to 199 rotations can be specified, ... 500 to 599 rotations can be specified, and so on. If the value of the time reduction counter is 128 or more, it cannot be specified, but if it is 127 or less, a identifiable command may be transmitted.

(Means 3d) In means 1d or means 2d, the game control means can transmit specific information to the effect control means in connection with the execution of the variable display (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-14). (Part of executing step 100 IWS1717 in the game control microcomputer 100), the effect control means can execute a special effect related to being controlled to a special state based on the establishment of a special condition based on specific information (a part that executes a special effect). For example, as shown in FIGS. 11-31), as specific information, it is possible to specify that the difference between the number of times the variable display is executed and the number of special times is equal to or less than a predetermined value. Second specific information that can specify that the difference between the first specific information (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-9, the command for specifying the number of times of relief time 1) and the number of executions of the variable display and the special number is larger than a predetermined value. And (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-9, the relief time reduction number 2 designation command) may be configured to include. With such a configuration, it is possible to enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications are complicated. For example, by periodically suggesting a function to a player, it is possible to reduce the risk of unknowingly causing a loss and preferably realize processing related to specific information.

In this example, when the difference between the number of times the variable display is executed and the number of special times is larger than a predetermined value, the second specific information, the rescue time reduction number 2 designation command, is transmitted. I can't be limited. For example, when the difference between the number of times the variable display is executed and the number of special times is larger than a predetermined value, the second specific information, the relief time reduction number 2 specified command, may not be transmitted.

(Means 4d) In any of means 1d to means 3d, the effect control means is controlled to a special state when a special condition is satisfied based on the execution of the first predetermined number of variable displays less than the special number of times. It is possible to execute a suggestion effect suggesting that (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-33, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 for executing step 100 IWS847, FIGS. 11-39 (I) to 11-40 (M). )), It is possible to execute the suggestion effect every time the second predetermined number of variable displays, which is less than the first predetermined number, is executed before the special number of variable displays is executed (for example, in FIGS. 11-31). As shown, the portion of the effect control CPU 120 that executes step 100 IWS804 may be configured as shown in FIGS. 11-37 (A) to 11-38 (F). With such a configuration, it is possible to enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications are complicated. For example, by periodically suggesting a function to a player, the risk of unknowingly causing a loss can be reduced.

In this example, the case where the effect is executed based on the count value of the relief time reduction counter is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the effect control CPU 120 may be configured to count the number of fluctuations and execute the effect after resetting the relief time reduction counter.

Further, the features 108IW and each modification disclose the configurations of the gaming machines shown in (means 1e-1) and (means 1e-2) shown below.

(Means 1e-1) An advantageous advantageous state (for example,) based on the fact that the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed and the specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. A game machine that can be controlled to a jackpot game state) and a game control means capable of controlling the game (for example, as shown in FIG. 5, a portion that executes step S25 in the effect control CPU 120). The effect control means for controlling the effect corresponding to the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 7, the portion of the effect control CPU 120 for executing steps S170 to S172, and as shown in FIGS. 11-31, the effect control CPU 120. Step 108 (a portion for executing IWS811), and the game control means can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state (for example, FIG. 11-17). As shown, the part that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100, and the part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 11-19) and the variable display are executed. When the power supply is stopped and the updating means (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-13, the part where the step 100 IWS 71 is executed in the game control microcomputer 100) that can update the numerical information based on the above. In addition, a backup storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of holding numerical information regarding the number of times the variable display is executed, and backup storage including information regarding the number of times the predetermined display result is continuously derived and displayed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The state control means includes an initialization means capable of initializing the stored contents of the means (for example, a portion for executing step S8 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 11-14), and the state control means is an update means. When the special condition is satisfied, the numerical information updated by the player becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times, so that the special state can be controlled (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-13, in the game control microcomputer 100. Step 100IWS74, a part for executing step 100IWS75, as shown in FIG. 11-17, a part for executing step 100IWS172 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100), the updating means is actually a variable display of the first identification information. Numerical information is updated depending on whether it is executed or when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-13, the portion where step 100 IWS 71 is executed in the game control microcomputer 100). The effect control means is controlled to a special state by the state control means based on the establishment of the special condition before the specific display result is derived and displayed after the storage contents of the backup storage means are initialized. When the specific display result is derived and displayed after the storage contents of the backup storage means are initialized, and then the state control means controls the special state based on the establishment of the special condition, and when the specific display result is controlled to the special state. It is characterized in that different effects are executed (for example, the portion shown in the modification 2 and the modification 3 of FIGS. 11-47). With such a configuration, it is possible to enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications are complicated. For example, since it is possible to grasp that the stored contents of the backup storage means have been initialized, factors such as guessing the set value are increased, and the fun of the game can be improved.

(Means 1e-2) An advantageous advantageous state (for example,) based on the fact that the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed and the specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. A game machine that can be controlled to a jackpot game state) and a game control means capable of controlling the game (for example, as shown in FIG. 5, a portion that executes step S25 in the effect control CPU 120). The effect control means for controlling the effect corresponding to the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 7, the portion of the effect control CPU 120 for executing steps S170 to S172, and as shown in FIGS. 11-31, the effect control CPU 120. Step 108 (a portion for executing IWS811), and the game control means can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state (for example, FIG. 11-17). As shown, the part that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100, and the part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 11-19) and the variable display are executed. When the power supply is stopped and the updating means (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-13, the part where the step 100 IWS 71 is executed in the game control microcomputer 100) that can update the numerical information based on the above. In addition, a backup storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of holding numerical information regarding the number of times the variable display is executed, and backup storage including information regarding the number of times the predetermined display result is continuously derived and displayed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The state control means includes an initialization means capable of initializing the stored contents of the means (for example, a portion for executing step S8 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 11-14), and the state control means is an update means. When the special condition is satisfied, the numerical information updated by the player becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times, so that the special state can be controlled (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-13, in the game control microcomputer 100. Step 100IWS74, a part for executing step 100IWS75, as shown in FIG. 11-17, a part for executing step 100IWS172 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100), the updating means is actually a variable display of the first identification information. Numerical information is updated depending on whether it is executed or when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-13, the portion where step 100 IWS 71 is executed in the game control microcomputer 100). The effect control means is controlled to a special state by the state control means based on the establishment of the special condition before the specific display result is derived and displayed after the storage contents of the backup storage means are initialized. It differs between when the specific display result is derived and displayed after the storage contents of the backup storage means are initialized and then controlled to the special state by the state control means based on the establishment of the special condition, and after being controlled to the special state in. It is characterized in that the effect is executed (for example, the portion shown in the modification 2 and the modification 3 of FIGS. 11-47). With such a configuration, it is possible to enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications are complicated. For example, since it is possible to grasp that the stored contents of the backup storage means have been initialized, factors such as guessing the set value are increased, and the fun of the game can be improved.

In this example, the case where only the fluctuation pattern table B is used after the RAM is cleared is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, it may be configured to be used with a plurality of fluctuation pattern tables as in the case of after a big hit.

The configuration of the gaming machine shown in the following (means 1f) to (means 15h) may be applied to the feature portion 108IW and each modification.

(Means 1f) A gaming machine capable of executing variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and controlling to an advantageous advantageous state based on the derivation display of the specific display result, which is usually The state control means includes a state control means capable of controlling a special state in which variable display is more easily executed than a state, and an update means capable of updating numerical information based on the execution of variable display. The state control means is a variable display. It is possible to control to a special state after being controlled to an advantageous state based on the fact that the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of, and the numerical information updated by the updating means becomes the special number of times the variable display is executed. It is possible to control the special state when the special condition is satisfied by becoming the corresponding specific value, and the updating means executes the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information. Numerical information is updated depending on the case, and there are a plurality of types of advantageous states including a specific advantageous state and a special advantageous state, and the advantageous state is controlled depending on which of the plurality of types is controlled. The advantage of the special state controlled after is different, and the advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to the special advantageous state is higher than the advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to the specific advantageous state. , The advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied is higher than the advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to the specific advantageous state. According to such a configuration, the degree of relief of the player can be increased.

In order to apply the gaming machine of the means 1f in the feature unit 108IW and each modification, for example, the special advantageous state is the probability variation jackpot, the specific advantage state is the normal jackpot, and the time reduction state after the probability variation time reduction is the normal jackpot. The advantage may be higher than the time saving state of, and the time saving state of the relief time saving may be configured to have a higher advantage than the time saving state after the normal big hit.

(Means 2f) In the means 1f, the advantageous state is obtained when the first identification information is controlled in an advantageous state triggered by the variable display and when the second identification information is controlled in an advantageous state triggered by the variable display. After being controlled, the ratio of being controlled to the special state of the special advantage is different, and when the control is performed in the advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the first identification information, and when the variable display of the second identification information is triggered, the advantageous state is set. The number of times the variable display is executed for satisfying the special condition is the same as when it is controlled. According to such a configuration, the first identification information is variable while enhancing the interest by exhibiting different playability between the case where the first identification information is variablely displayed and the case where the second identification information is variablely displayed. Since the special number of times is common between the case of displaying and the case of performing variable display of the second identification information, it is possible to suppress an excessive increase in gambling.

In order to apply the gaming machine of the means 2f to the feature unit 108IW and each modification, for example, the ratio of the special advantage in the time saving state after the big hit (the time saving continues until the next big hit) is set to the first special symbol. And the 2nd special symbol are different, and 800 times, which is a condition to be controlled in a short relief time depending on whether the jackpot is controlled based on the 1st special symbol or the jackpot based on the 2nd special symbol. It suffices to configure so that the number of fluctuations of is common.

(Means 3f) In means 1f or means 2f, a disadvantage setting value in which the probability of being controlled in an advantageous state is the first probability, and an advantage setting in which the probability of being controlled in an advantageous state is higher than the first probability. A setting means that can set one of a plurality of setting values including a value is provided, and a setting that is set to a disadvantage setting value has a special condition rather than a setting value that is set to an advantage setting value. The advantage of the special state, which is easy to hold and is controlled when the special condition is satisfied, is higher than the advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state. According to such a configuration, even when the disadvantage setting value is set, the advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied is controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state. By being higher than the advantage of the state, the player can be rescued more effectively.

In order to apply the gaming machine of the means 3f to the feature unit 108IW and each modification, for example, any one of a plurality of set values having different advantages for the player (in this example, the jackpot probability is different). It is possible to set the set value of, and execute the setting confirmation process and the setting change process when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, so that the current set value can be confirmed and the set value can be changed. For example, the setting can be changed in 6 stages of the setting values "1" to "6". And, when it is set to an unfavorable setting (for example, "1"), the number of fluctuations which is a condition for controlling the relief time is smaller than when it is set to an advantageous setting value (for example, "6"). However, the advantage in the relief time reduction may be configured to be higher than the advantage in the time reduction state after the big hit. It should be noted that the one set to the disadvantageous setting (for example, "1") has a higher relief time reduction arrival rate than the one set to the advantageous setting value (for example, "6"), and the relief time reduction is always shortened. Since the number of times is 800 times (substantially until the next big hit), the advantage may be higher than the time saving state via the big hit (for example, the time saving number is 100 times after the normal big hit).

(Means 4f) In any of means 1f to means 3f, a setting means capable of setting any of a plurality of set values having different probabilities of being controlled in an advantageous state is provided, and the set value is controlled in an advantageous state. Which of the multiple types of special states will be controlled later is the same regardless of which setting value is set, and the special state advantage that is controlled when the special condition is satisfied. Is common when any setting value is set. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the improvement of gambling due to the set value, and it is possible to realize sound playability.

In order to apply the gaming machine of the means 4f to the feature unit 108IW and each modification, for example, any one of a plurality of set values having different advantages for the player (in this example, the jackpot probability is different). It is possible to set the set value of, and execute the setting confirmation process and the setting change process when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, so that the current set value can be confirmed and the set value can be changed. For example, the setting can be changed in 6 stages of the setting values "1" to "6". Then, which of the multiple types of time saving states is controlled after the big hit is made common when any setting value is set, and the advantage in the relief time saving is also set when any setting value is set. May be configured to be common.

(Means 5f) In any of the means 1f to the means 4f, when the first identification information is controlled in an advantageous state triggered by the variable display, and when the second identification information is controlled in an advantageous state triggered by the variable display. The ratio of which of the multiple types is controlled to the advantageous state is different, and it corresponds to the case where the special condition is satisfied corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information. Then, when the special condition is satisfied, the advantage of the special state controlled after the special condition is satisfied is the same. According to such a configuration, while exhibiting different playability between the case where the first identification information is variably displayed and the case where the second identification information is variably displayed, it is controlled when a special condition is satisfied. Since the advantage of the special state is common regardless of which set value is set, it is possible to obtain an appropriate degree of relief while suppressing the improvement of gambling.

In order to apply the gaming machine of the means 5f in the feature unit 108IW and each modification, for example, when a big hit is generated by the first special symbol and when a big hit is generated by the second special symbol. The ratios controlled for the normal jackpot and the probabilistic jackpot are different, and the relief time is shortened depending on whether the relief time is controlled based on the first special symbol or the second special symbol. It suffices to configure so that the advantages of are common.

(Means 6f) In any of means 1f to means 5f, a variable display pattern is obtained from a plurality of variable display patterns including a predetermined variable display pattern and a shortened variable display pattern in which the variable display period is shorter than that of the predetermined variable display pattern. A variable display pattern determining means for determining is provided, and the variable display pattern determining means has a variable display in a special state controlled when a special condition is satisfied, rather than a special state controlled after being controlled in an advantageous state. When the display result of is a non-specific display result, the ratio of determining the shortened variable display pattern is high. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, in this feature part 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of means 6f is based on, for example, the configuration which uses the variation pattern table E of FIG. 11-8 (E).

(Means 7f) In any one of means 1f to means 6f, a variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a specific variable display pattern corresponding to execution of a reach effect is provided, and a variable display pattern is provided. The determination means is that the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied is a non-specific display result when the display result of the variable display is a non-specific display result than the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state. The ratio of determining the specific variable display pattern is low. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, in this feature part 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of means 7f is based on, for example, the configuration which uses the variation pattern table E of FIG. 11-8 (E).

(Means 8f) In any of means 1f to means 7f, the updating means can update specific numerical information different from the numerical information based on the variable display being executed in the special state, and the state controlling means can update the specific numerical information. It is possible to control the special state by setting the special information, and it is possible to end the special state by canceling the setting of the special information. In the special state, the specific numerical information becomes a predetermined value corresponding to a predetermined number of times. Based on this, a backup storage means capable of holding numerical information and specific numerical information updated by the updating means even if the special state is terminated and the power supply is stopped, and setting information of the special information, and a predetermined condition are satisfied. When the backup storage means is provided with an initialization means capable of initializing the stored contents of the backup storage means, the initialization means initializes the setting information of special information and the specific numerical information when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Do not initialize numerical information. According to such a configuration, the degree of relief of the player can be increased even when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

In the feature unit 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of the means 8f initializes the time saving flags A to C and the value of the time saving number counter in the initialization process shown in FIG. 11-11, for example. The value of the relief time reduction counter may be configured so as not to be initialized.

(Means 1g) A gaming machine capable of executing variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and controlling to an advantageous advantageous state based on the derivation display of the specific display result, which is usually A state control means that can control a special state in which variable display is easier to execute than a state, an update means that can update numerical information based on the execution of variable display, and a start condition are satisfied and a start condition is satisfied. Variable display execution means that can execute variable display based on the above, hold storage means that can store information about variable display as hold information when the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, and power supply is stopped. When the data is set, the backup storage means that can hold the numerical information and the hold information, the initialization means that can initialize the stored contents of the backup storage means when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the power supply are started. The state control means is provided with a recovery means capable of executing recovery control for recovering the numerical information updated by the update means and the hold information stored in the hold storage means based on the stored contents of the backup storage means. , The numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times the variable display is executed, so that the special state can be controlled when the special condition is satisfied, and after the recovery control is executed. , It is possible to control the special state when the special condition is satisfied based on the execution of the variable display corresponding to the recovered pending information, and the updating means is the case where the variable display of the first identification information is executed and the second. Numerical information is updated when variable display of identification information is executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages of the player while optimizing the control by initialization.

In order to apply the game machine of the means 1g in the feature unit 108IW and each modification, for example, the relief time reduction counter and the hold memory are reset when the initialization process is executed, while the power failure is restored. The relief time reduction counter and the hold memory are restored, and when the fluctuation display corresponding to the hold memory at the time of restoration becomes the 800th fluctuation and the condition for controlling the relief time reduction is satisfied, the relief time reduction can be controlled. Just do it.

(Means 2g) In the means 1g, the advantageous state is obtained when the first identification information is controlled in an advantageous state triggered by the variable display and when the second identification information is controlled in an advantageous state triggered by the variable display. After being controlled, the ratio of being controlled to the special state of the special advantage is different, and when the control is performed in the advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the first identification information, and when the variable display of the second identification information is triggered, the advantageous state is set. The number of times the variable display is executed for satisfying the special condition is the same as when it is controlled. According to such a configuration, the first identification information is variable while enhancing the interest by exhibiting different playability between the case where the first identification information is variablely displayed and the case where the second identification information is variablely displayed. Since the special number of times is common between the case of displaying and the case of performing variable display of the second identification information, it is possible to suppress an excessive increase in gambling.

In addition, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 2g in this feature unit 108IW and each modification, for example, the ratio of the special advantage in the time saving state after the big hit (the time saving continues until the next big hit) is set to the first special symbol. And the second special symbol are different, and when the jackpot is controlled based on the first special symbol and when the jackpot is controlled based on the second special symbol, the variation that is the condition for controlling the relief time is shortened. It may be configured so that the number of times is common.

(Means 3g) In the means 1g or the means 2g, the disadvantage setting value in which the probability of being controlled in the advantageous state is the first probability and the advantage setting in which the probability of being controlled in the advantageous state is higher than the first probability. A setting means that can set one of a plurality of setting values including a value is provided, and a setting that is set to a disadvantage setting value has a special condition rather than a setting value that is set to an advantage setting value. The advantage of the special state, which is easy to hold and is controlled when the special condition is satisfied, is higher than the advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state. According to such a configuration, even when the disadvantage setting value is set, the advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied is controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state. By being higher than the advantage of the state, the player can be rescued more effectively.

In order to apply the gaming machine of the means 3g in the feature unit 108IW and each modification, for example, any one of a plurality of set values having different advantages for the player (in this example, the jackpot probability is different). It is possible to set the setting value of, and execute the setting confirmation process and the setting change process when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, so that the current setting value can be confirmed and the setting value can be changed. For example, the setting can be changed in 6 stages of the setting values "1" to "6". Then, when the setting is disadvantageous (for example, "1"), the number of fluctuations until the relief time is reduced and the relief time is shortened, as compared with the case where the setting value is advantageous (for example, "6"). The advantage of the above may be set to be higher than the advantage of the time saving state after the big hit. It should be noted that the setting of an unfavorable setting (for example, "1") has a higher probability of being out of order than the setting of an advantageous setting value (for example, "6"), so that the relief time is likely to be shortened. Since the relief time is always 800 times (substantially until the next big hit), it is more advantageous than the time saving state via the big hit (for example, after the normal big hit, the time reduction is 100 times). May be good.

(Means 4b) In any of means 1g to means 3g, a setting means capable of setting any of a plurality of setting values having different probabilities of being controlled in an advantageous state is provided, and the means is controlled in an advantageous state. Which of the multiple types of special states will be controlled later is the same regardless of which setting value is set, and the special state advantage that is controlled when the special condition is satisfied. Is common when any setting value is set. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the improvement of gambling due to the set value, and it is possible to realize sound playability.

In order to apply the gaming machine of the means 4g in the feature unit 108IW and each modification, for example, any one of a plurality of set values having different advantages for the player (in this example, the jackpot probability is different). It is possible to set the set value of, and execute the setting confirmation process and the setting change process when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, so that the current set value can be confirmed and the set value can be changed. For example, the setting can be changed in 6 stages of the setting values "1" to "6". Then, which of the multiple types of time saving states is controlled after the big hit is made common when any setting value is set, and the advantage in the relief time saving is also set when any setting value is set. May be configured to be common.

(Means 5g) In any of the means 1g to the means 4g, when the first identification information is controlled in an advantageous state triggered by the variable display and when the second identification information is controlled in an advantageous state triggered by the variable display. The ratio of which of the multiple types is controlled to the advantageous state is different, and it corresponds to the case where the special condition is satisfied corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information. Then, when the special condition is satisfied, the advantage of the special state controlled after the special condition is satisfied is the same. According to such a configuration, while exhibiting different playability between the case where the first identification information is variably displayed and the case where the second identification information is variably displayed, it is controlled when a special condition is satisfied. Since the advantage of the special state is common regardless of which set value is set, it is possible to obtain an appropriate degree of relief while suppressing the improvement of gambling.

In addition, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 5g in this feature part 108IW and each modification, for example, when the big hit is generated by the first special symbol and when the big hit is generated by the second special symbol. The ratios controlled for the normal jackpot and the probabilistic jackpot are different, and the relief time is shortened depending on whether the relief time is controlled based on the first special symbol or the second special symbol. It suffices to configure so that the advantages of are common.

(Means 6g) In any of the means 1g to the means 5g, a variable display pattern is obtained from a plurality of variable display patterns including a predetermined variable display pattern and a shortened variable display pattern in which the variable display period is shorter than that of the predetermined variable display pattern. A variable display pattern determining means for determining is provided, and the variable display pattern determining means has a variable display in a special state controlled when a special condition is satisfied, rather than a special state controlled after being controlled in an advantageous state. When the display result of is a non-specific display result, the ratio of determining the shortened variable display pattern is high. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, in this feature part 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of means 6g is based on the structure which uses the variation pattern table E of FIG. 11-8 (E), for example.

(Means 7g) In any one of the means 1g to the means 6g, a variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a specific variable display pattern corresponding to the execution of the reach effect is provided, and the variable display pattern is provided. The determination means is that the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied is a non-specific display result when the display result of the variable display is a non-specific display result than the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state. The ratio of determining the specific variable display pattern is low. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, in this feature part 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of means 7g is based on, for example, the configuration which uses the variation pattern table E of FIG. 11-8 (E).

(Means 8g) In any of the means 1g to the means 7g, the updating means can update specific numerical information different from the numerical information based on the variable display being executed in the special state, and the state controlling means can update the specific numerical information. It is possible to control the special state by setting the special information, and it is possible to end the special state by canceling the setting of the special information. In the special state, the specific numerical information becomes a predetermined value corresponding to a predetermined number of times. Based on this, a backup storage means capable of holding numerical information and specific numerical information updated by the updating means even if the special state is terminated and the power supply is stopped, and setting information of the special information, and a predetermined condition are satisfied. When the backup storage means is provided with an initialization means capable of initializing the stored contents of the backup storage means, the initialization means initializes the setting information of special information and the specific numerical information when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Do not initialize numerical information. According to such a configuration, the degree of relief of the player can be increased even when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

In the feature unit 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of the means 8g initializes the time saving flags A to C and the value of the time saving number counter in the initialization process shown in FIG. 11-11, for example. The value of the relief time reduction counter may be configured so as not to be initialized.

(Means 1h) A gaming machine capable of executing variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and controlling to an advantageous advantageous state based on the derivation display of the specific display result, which is usually The state control means includes a state control means capable of controlling a special state in which variable display is more easily executed than a state, and an update means capable of updating numerical information based on the execution of variable display. The state control means is an update means. The numerical information updated by is a specific value corresponding to the special number of times of execution of the variable display, so that the special state can be controlled when the special condition is satisfied, and the updating means is the variable of the first identification information. Numerical information is updated depending on whether the display is executed or the variable display of the second identification information is executed, and the suggestion effect execution means capable of executing the suggestion effect related to the establishment of the special condition is further provided, and the suggestion effect is provided. The execution means differs in the ratio of which of the plurality of effect modes the suggestion effect is executed according to the number of times the variable display is executed, and the effect mode of the suggestion effect suggests the period until the special condition is satisfied. It is a mode to do. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to the production mode of the suggestion effect, and to promote the operation of the gaming machine.

In addition, in order to apply the gaming machine of the means 1h in the feature unit 108IW and each modification, for example, whether or not to execute a countdown effect in an aspect suggesting the number of fluctuations which is a condition to be controlled in the relief time reduction. The ratio may be changed according to the count value of the relief time reduction counter. Further, the gaming machine of the means 1h can be realized by, for example, using the table shown in FIGS. 11-25 to determine whether or not the telop display while waiting for a customer is executed and the effect mode.

(Means 2h) In the means 1h, the effect mode of the suggestion effect is a mode in which the number of times the variable display is executed until the special condition is satisfied can be specified. According to such a configuration, the player can be clearly notified of the number of times the variable display is executed until the special condition is satisfied.

It should be noted that, in the feature unit 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of the means 2h is based on, for example, executing a countdown effect of an aspect suggesting the number of fluctuations which is a condition controlled to shorten the relief time.

(Means 3h) In the means 1h or the means 2h, the suggestion effect is an effect of displaying a specific image, and the specific image is displayed in a plurality of modes in which at least one of a color and a size is different, and is displayed in any of the modes. The period until the suggested special conditions are met differs depending on whether or not it is done. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to the aspect of the specific image.

In addition, in this feature unit 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of means 3h is configured to determine whether or not to execute the telop display while waiting for customers and the mode of production by using, for example, the table shown in FIG. 11-25. Originally. Further, in order to apply the gaming machine of the means 3h, for example, the color and size of the numbers to be counted down in the image of the countdown effect may be configured to be different according to the count value of the relief time reduction counter.

(Means 4h) In any of the means 1h to the means 3h, the variable display executing means capable of executing the variable display based on the establishment of the start condition and the establishment of the start condition, and the start condition are satisfied but the start condition is satisfied. A hold storage means that can store information related to variable display as hold information when it is not established, and a predetermined image that can display a predetermined image when the hold storage is not executed and the hold storage means does not store the variable display. The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect when the predetermined image is displayed, and the predetermined image is displayed according to the number of times the variable display is executed until the special condition is satisfied. When displayed, the rate at which the suggestion effect is executed is different. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to whether or not the suggestion effect is executed, and it is possible to promote the operation of the gaming machine.

In the feature unit 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of the means 4h is based on, for example, using the table shown in FIGS. 11-25 to determine whether or not to execute the telop display while waiting for a customer.

(Means 5h) In any of the means 1h to the means 4h, the variable display executing means capable of executing the variable display based on the establishment of the start condition and the establishment of the start condition, and the start condition are satisfied but the start condition is satisfied. A hold storage means that can store information related to variable display as hold information when it is not established, and a predetermined image that can display a predetermined image when the hold storage is not executed and the hold storage means does not store the variable display. The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect when the predetermined image is displayed, and the predetermined image is displayed according to the number of times the variable display is executed until the special condition is satisfied. When displayed, the ratio of executing the suggestion effect differs depending on the predetermined mode. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to the presence or absence of the mode of suggestive effect, and it is possible to promote the operation of the gaming machine.

In the feature unit 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of the means 5h is based on, for example, using the table shown in FIGS. 11-25 to determine the effect mode of the telop display while waiting for customers.

(Means 6h) In any of the means 1h to the means 5h, the variable display executing means capable of executing the variable display based on the establishment of the start condition and the establishment of the start condition, and the start condition are satisfied but the start condition is satisfied. A hold storage means that can store information related to variable display as hold information when it is not established, and a predetermined image that can display a predetermined image when the hold storage is not executed and the hold storage means does not store the variable display. The suggestion effect executing means includes at least one of the detection that the operation means is operated and the detection that the game medium has passed through the predetermined area when the predetermined image is displayed. Suggestive effects can be performed based on what has been done. According to such a configuration, it is possible to give a suggestion effect to the player who actually plays the game, and it is possible to promote the operation of the game machine.

In order to apply the gaming machine of the means 6h in the feature unit 108IW and each modification, for example, when the demo state is entered, the gaming ball is operated by the operation of the ball striking operation handle (operation knob) 30 or at the starting port. When it is detected, it may be configured to execute a telop display suggesting the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened.

(Means 7h) In any of the means 1h to the means 6h, a setting means capable of setting any of a plurality of setting values having different probabilities of being controlled in an advantageous state is provided, and the suggestion effect executing means is provided. The ratio of executing the suggestion effect differs depending on which set value is set. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to whether or not the suggestion effect is executed, and it is possible to promote the operation of the gaming machine by suggesting the set value.

In addition, in this feature part 108IW and each modification, means 7h is based on the structure which determines whether or not the telop display while waiting for a customer is executed by using the table shown in FIG. 11-25.

(Means 8h) In any of the means 1h to the means 7h, a setting means capable of setting any of a plurality of setting values having different probabilities of being controlled in an advantageous state is provided, and the suggestion effect executing means is provided. Depending on which set value is set, the ratio of executing the suggestion effect differs depending on the specific mode. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to the mode of the suggestion effect, and it is possible to promote the operation of the gaming machine by suggesting the set value.

In addition, in this feature part 108IW and each modification, means 8h is based on the structure which determines whether or not the telop display is executed while waiting for a customer, and the effect mode, using the table shown in FIG. 11-25.

(Means 9h) In any of the means 1h to the means 6h, a setting means capable of setting any set value from a plurality of set values having different probabilities of being controlled in an advantageous state, and a set value set. The setting suggestion effect execution means that can execute the suggestion suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect execution means are provided, and the ratio of executing the setting suggestion effect differs depending on which setting value is set, and the suggestion is made. The effect execution means has a common ratio of executing the suggestion effect regardless of which set value is set. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to the presence or absence of execution of the suggestion effect, and it is possible to suppress the complexity of control.

In order to apply the gaming machine of the means 9h to the feature unit 108IW and each modification, for example, any one of a plurality of set values having different advantages for the player (in this example, the jackpot probability is different). It is possible to set the set value of, and execute the setting confirmation process and the setting change process when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, so that the current set value can be confirmed and the set value can be changed. For example, the setting can be changed in 6 stages of the setting values "1" to "6". Then, while it is possible to execute an effect suggesting a set value (for example, an effect in which the execution ratio differs depending on the set value), the telop display waiting for a customer is executed regardless of which set value is set. It may be configured so that the ratio is common.

(Means 10h) In any of the means 1h to the means 6h and the means 9h, a setting means capable of setting any of a plurality of setting values having different probabilities of being controlled in an advantageous state is set. The setting suggestion effect executing means that can execute the setting suggestion effect that suggests the set value is provided, and the setting suggestion effect execution means performs the setting suggestion effect according to a specific mode according to which setting value is set. The ratio of execution is different, and the ratio of executing the suggestion effect is the same regardless of which set value is set for the suggestion effect execution means. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to the mode of the suggestion effect, and it is possible to suppress the complication of control.

In order to apply the gaming machine of the means 10h to the feature unit 108IW and each modification, for example, any one of a plurality of set values having different advantages for the player (in this example, the jackpot probability is different). It is possible to set the set value of, and execute the setting confirmation process and the setting change process when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, so that the current set value can be confirmed and the set value can be changed. For example, the setting can be changed in 6 stages of the setting values "1" to "6". Then, while it is possible to execute an effect that suggests a set value (for example, an effect in which the execution ratio differs depending on the set value), no matter which set value is set, the customer is waiting in the red effect mode. It suffices to configure so that the execution ratio of the telop display of is common.

(Means 11h) In any of the means 1h to the means 10h, the suggestion effect executing means supplies power depending on whether the initialization process is executed when the power supply is started and the recovery process is executed. The rate at which the suggestion effect is executed in a specific period after the start is different. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to whether or not the suggestion effect is executed, and it is possible to promote the operation of the gaming machine.

In order to apply the gaming machine of the means 11c in the feature unit 108IW and each modification, for example, the execution ratio of the telop display and the countdown effect waiting for customers differs between after the initialization process and after the power failure is restored. It may be configured as follows.

(Means 12h) In any one of means 1h to 11h, a variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a special variable display pattern is provided, and the variable display pattern determining means has special conditions. When the special variable display pattern is satisfied, the special variable display pattern can be determined, and before the special condition is satisfied, the special variable display pattern is not determined, and when the variable display by the special variable display pattern is executed, the special state is set. Further provided is a specific notification effect execution means capable of executing a specific notification effect for notifying the fact that it is controlled. According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify the player that the special condition is controlled by the establishment of the special condition, and it is possible to clearly notify the player of the change in the gaming state. Can be improved.

In the feature portion 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of the means 12h is based on, for example, a configuration using the relief time saving variation deviation pattern table shown in FIG. 11-8 (I).

(Means 13h) In any of the means 1h to the means 12h, a variable display pattern is determined from a plurality of variable display patterns including a predetermined variable display pattern and a specific variable display pattern having a longer variable display period than the predetermined variable display pattern. A variable display pattern determining means is provided, and the variable display pattern determining means can determine a specific variable display pattern regardless of whether the variable display display result is a specific display result or not. Yes, when the display result of the variable display is a specific display result, the ratio of determining the specific variable display pattern is higher than that of the predetermined variable display pattern, and the predetermined period before the special condition is satisfied is the predetermined period. When the display result of the variable display does not become the specific display result, the ratio of determining the specific variable display pattern is lower than that of the previous period. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

In the feature unit 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of the means 13h is based on, for example, a configuration using the variation pattern table shown in FIGS. 11-8 (F) and 11-8 (G).

(Means 14h) In any one of the means 1h to the means 13h, a notice effect executing means capable of executing a notice effect for notifying that a specific display result is derived and displayed when the variable display is being executed is provided, and the notice effect is provided. The execution means can execute the advance notice effect in both the case where the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result and the case where the display result of the variable display does not become the specific display result, and the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result. In the case, the ratio of executing the advance notice effect is higher than in the case where the specific display result is not obtained, and the variable display is displayed in the predetermined period before the special condition is satisfied than in the period before the predetermined period. When the result is not a specific display result, the ratio of executing the advance notice effect is low. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, in this feature part 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of means 14h is based on the structure which determines whether or not the advance notice effect is executed, for example, by using the table shown in FIG. 11-32.

(Means 15h) In any of the means 1h to the means 14h, a notice effect executing means capable of executing a notice effect for notifying that a specific display result is derived and displayed when the variable display is being executed is provided, and the notice effect is provided. The execution means can execute the advance notice effect depending on the specific mode and the predetermined mode regardless of whether the display result of the variable display is the specific display result or not, and the variable display is displayed. When the result is a specific display result, the ratio of executing the advance notice effect in the specific mode is higher than that in the predetermined mode, and the predetermined period before the special condition is satisfied is more variable than the period before the predetermined period. When the display result of the display does not become the specific display result, the ratio of executing the advance notice effect according to the specific mode is low. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

In the feature unit 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of the means 15h is based on, for example, using the table shown in FIGS. 11-32 to determine whether or not the advance notice effect is executed and the effect mode.

1 ... Pachinko game machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Game machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special symbol display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Winning ball device 6B ... Variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9… Game effect lamp 10… General winning opening 11… Main board 12… Production control board 13… Voice control board 14… Lamp control board 15… Relay board 20… Ordinary symbol display 21… Gate switch 22A, 22B… Starting port Switch 23 ... Count switch 30 ... Hitting ball operation handle 31A ... Stick controller 31B ... Push button 32 ... Movable body 100 ... Game control microcomputer 101, 121 ... ROM
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... Random number circuit 105, 125 ... I / O
120 ... CPU for production control
123… Display control unit 75SG001… Pachinko game machine 300… First production unit 301… Base member 302… Cover member 303… LED board 331… Decorative pattern 400… Second production unit 401… Base member 402… Cover member 403… LED board 420 ... Decorative part 600 ... 3rd production unit 800 ... 4th production unit 801 ... Base member 802 ... Cover member 803 ... LED substrate

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of executing variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and controlling the specific display result to an advantageous state advantageous to the player when the specific display result is derived and displayed.
Electronic components that are visible to the player and
A specific member provided around the electronic component and formed in a color similar to that of the electronic component,
A translucent member which is a translucent member and is provided so that the player can visually see the electronic component and the specific member through the member.
Display means and
A state control means that can control a special state in which variable display is easier to execute than the normal state,
An update method that can update numerical information based on the execution of variable display,
With
The translucent member has a decorative pattern formed so as to straddle the electronic component and the specific member.
The electronic component is provided at a position farther from the display means than the specific member.
The state control means can control the special state when a special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to a special number of times.
The updating means is a gaming machine characterized in that numerical information is updated depending on whether the variable display of the first identification information is executed or the variable display of the second identification information is executed.

Images